Nastar GSM User Manual

GENEX Nastar GSM
V200R005
User Manual
Issue
02
Date
2008-02-22
Part Number
31018397
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. provides customers with comprehensive technical support and service. For
any assistance, please contact our local office or company headquarters.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address:
Huawei Industrial Base

Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China
Website:
http://www.huawei.com
Email:
support@huawei.com
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2008. All rights reserved.

No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior
written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective
holders.
Notice
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Contents
Contents
About This Document.....................................................................................................................1
1 Overview......................................................................................................................................1-1
1.1 Introduction to the Nastar GSM ..................................................................................................................1-2
1.1.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................................1-2
1.1.2 Software Structure ....................................................................................................................................1-2
1.1.3 Networking Mode.....................................................................................................................................1-4
1.1.4 Server/Client Mode ..................................................................................................................................1-8
1.1.5 Stand-Alone Mode..................................................................................................................................1-10
1.1.6 NE Version .............................................................................................................................................1-12
1.2 Applications of the Nastar GSM................................................................................................................1-13
1.2.1 Application Scenarios.............................................................................................................................1-13
1.2.2 Application Modes .................................................................................................................................1-13
2 Installation of the Nastar GSM ...............................................................................................2-1

2.1 Introduction to the Installation ....................................................................................................................2-2
2.1.1 Requirements for User..............................................................................................................................2-2
2.1.2 Flow Chart................................................................................................................................................2-2
2.2 Preparing the PNS .......................................................................................................................................2-3
2.2.1 Checking the Hardware of the Server.......................................................................................................2-3
2.2.2 Checking the System Environment ..........................................................................................................2-5
2.3 Installing the Related Software....................................................................................................................2-9
2.3.1 Installing the SQL Server .........................................................................................................................2-9
2.3.2 Installing the MSDE ...............................................................................................................................2-29
2.3.3 Installing the GENEX Shared Components ...........................................................................................2-31
2.3.4 Installing the Nastar GSM ......................................................................................................................2-35
2.4 Introduction to the Installation Directory ..................................................................................................2-42
2.5 Uninstalling the Nastar GSM ....................................................................................................................2-44
2.5.1 Flow Chart..............................................................................................................................................2-44
2.5.2 Uninstalling the GENEX Shared Components.......................................................................................2-44
2.5.3 Uninstalling the Nastar GSM .................................................................................................................2-47
2.6 License Management.................................................................................................................................2-50
2.6.1 Installing the Dongle ..............................................................................................................................2-50
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Contents
2.6.2 Updating the License..............................................................................................................................2-50
3 GUI................................................................................................................................................3-1
3.1 Nastar GSM GUI.........................................................................................................................................3-2
3.1.1 Introduction to the GUI ............................................................................................................................3-2
3.1.2 Menu Bar..................................................................................................................................................3-3
3.1.3 Toolbar....................................................................................................................................................3-10
3.1.4 Function Window ...................................................................................................................................3-13
3.1.5 Property Window....................................................................................................................................3-19
3.1.6 Site View ................................................................................................................................................3-21
3.2 GUI of the Transdata .................................................................................................................................3-21
3.2.1 Introduction to the GUI of the Transdata................................................................................................3-21
3.2.2 Menu Bar................................................................................................................................................3-22
3.2.3 Toolbar....................................................................................................................................................3-26
3.2.4 Project View ...........................................................................................................................................3-27
3.2.5 Main View ..............................................................................................................................................3-28
3.2.6 Output Window ......................................................................................................................................3-28
4 Using the Transdata...................................................................................................................4-1

4.1 Basic Operation ...........................................................................................................................................4-2
4.1.1 Starting the SQL Server............................................................................................................................4-2
4.1.2 Starting the Transdata ...............................................................................................................................4-2
4.1.3 Closing the Transdata ...............................................................................................................................4-5
4.2 NE Operations .............................................................................................................................................4-6
4.2.1 Creating a Network ..................................................................................................................................4-6
4.2.2 Creating a BSC.........................................................................................................................................4-8
4.2.3 Upgrading a BSC....................................................................................................................................4-12
4.2.4 Deleting a BSC.......................................................................................................................................4-12
4.2.5 Adding a PCU.........................................................................................................................................4-13
4.2.6 Deleting a PCU.......................................................................................................................................4-15
4.2.7 Deleting a Network ................................................................................................................................4-16
4.2.8 Operator Management ............................................................................................................................4-17
4.2.9 Network Swap ........................................................................................................................................4-21
4.3 Data Management......................................................................................................................................4-24
4.3.1 Importing BSC Configuration Data........................................................................................................4-24
4.3.2 Importing PCU Configuration Data .......................................................................................................4-26
4.3.3 Statically Importing Performance Data ..................................................................................................4-28
4.3.4 Dynamically Importing Performance Data.............................................................................................4-32
4.3.5 Deleting History Data.............................................................................................................................4-34
4.4 Task Management......................................................................................................................................4-36
4.4.1 Initializing a Task ...................................................................................................................................4-36
4.4.2 Backing Up a Task..................................................................................................................................4-38
4.4.3 Restoring a Task .....................................................................................................................................4-39
ii

Issue 02 (2008-02-22)
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Contents
5 Common Operations .................................................................................................................5-1

5.1 Project Management....................................................................................................................................5-2
5.1.1 Introduction to the Project Management ..................................................................................................5-2
5.1.2 Creating a Project .....................................................................................................................................5-3
5.1.3 Opening a Project .....................................................................................................................................5-5
5.1.4 Modifying and Deleting a Project ............................................................................................................5-7
5.2 Data Management........................................................................................................................................5-8
5.2.1 Introduction to Data Management............................................................................................................5-8
5.2.2 Management of Configuration Data ....................................................................................................... 5-11
5.2.3 Managing Project Parameters.................................................................................................................5-24
5.2.4 Management of Performance Data .........................................................................................................5-37
5.2.5 Checking Parameters ..............................................................................................................................5-43
5.3 User Management......................................................................................................................................5-50
5.3.1 Management of User Access Rights .......................................................................................................5-50
5.3.2 Management of User Log.......................................................................................................................5-52
5.4 Managing NEs...........................................................................................................................................5-54
5.4.1 Creating a Site ........................................................................................................................................5-54
5.4.2 Editing a Site ..........................................................................................................................................5-57
5.4.3 Moving a Site .........................................................................................................................................5-58
5.4.4 Deleting a Site ........................................................................................................................................5-58
5.4.5 Deleting a Cell........................................................................................................................................5-59
5.4.6 Querying NE Property............................................................................................................................5-60
5.5 Managing Map ..........................................................................................................................................5-61
5.5.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................................5-61
5.5.2 Importing a Map.....................................................................................................................................5-61
5.5.3 General Operation of a Map ...................................................................................................................5-64
5.5.4 Managing Map Layers............................................................................................................................5-65
5.5.5 Managing the Legend .............................................................................................................................5-66
5.6 Setting the Analysis Conditions.................................................................................................................5-68
5.6.1 Setting the Time Range ..........................................................................................................................5-68
5.6.2 Setting the Save Path ..............................................................................................................................5-68
5.6.3 Setting Cell Groups ................................................................................................................................5-69
5.6.4 Setting the Common Period....................................................................................................................5-74
5.6.5 Setting Up the Synchronization Mode....................................................................................................5-75
5.6.6 Setting BSC Groups ...............................................................................................................................5-77
5.7 Processing the Analysis Result ..................................................................................................................5-81
5.7.1 Operating the Analysis Table..................................................................................................................5-82
5.7.2 Operating the Analysis Chart..................................................................................................................5-93
6 Optimizing the Network ..........................................................................................................6-1

6.1 Introduction .................................................................................................................................................6-2
6.2 Geographic Display .....................................................................................................................................6-2
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

iii
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Contents
6.2.1 Background ..............................................................................................................................................6-2

6.2.2 Searching a Cell........................................................................................................................................6-2
6.2.3 Displaying a Location Area or a Site........................................................................................................6-5
6.2.4 Displaying the Network Optimization Theme........................................................................................6-12
6.2.5 Displaying a Reference Grid ..................................................................................................................6-15
6.2.6 Switching 900/1800 Layer .....................................................................................................................6-16
6.2.7 Configuring the Neighbors Switching ....................................................................................................6-18
6.2.8 Displaying Project Parameters on a Map................................................................................................6-19
6.2.9 Modifying Display Setting .....................................................................................................................6-22
7 Network Performance Alarms .................................................................................................7-1

7.1 Introduction .................................................................................................................................................7-2
7.2 Types of Performance Alarm .......................................................................................................................7-3
7.2.1 Standard Alarm.........................................................................................................................................7-3
7.2.2 Optional Alarm .........................................................................................................................................7-8
7.2.3 Customizing an Alarm............................................................................................................................7-17
7.3 Operations About Network Performance Alarms ......................................................................................7-17
7.3.1 Starting, Suspending, or Activating Alarm Tasks ...................................................................................7-17
7.3.2 Checking Alarm Tasks............................................................................................................................7-21
7.3.3 Alarm Task Process ................................................................................................................................7-21
7.3.4 Creating an Alarm Task ..........................................................................................................................7-24
7.3.5 Deleting an Alarm Task ..........................................................................................................................7-26
7.3.6 Modifying an Alarm Task.......................................................................................................................7-27
7.3.7 Searching for a History Alarm Task .......................................................................................................7-29
7.3.8 Setting Filtering Conditions for Alarms .................................................................................................7-32
7.4 Setting the Performance Alarms ................................................................................................................7-33
8 Generating a Network Monitoring Report ...........................................................................8-1

8.1 Introduction .................................................................................................................................................8-2
8.2 Daily, Weekly and Monthly Report .............................................................................................................8-2
8.2.1 Background ..............................................................................................................................................8-2
8.2.2 Customizing a Report Template ...............................................................................................................8-2
8.2.3 Generating a Daily Report......................................................................................................................8-13
8.2.4 Generating a Weekly Report...................................................................................................................8-20
8.2.5 Generating a Monthly Report .................................................................................................................8-24
8.2.6 Introduction to the Reports .....................................................................................................................8-30
8.2.7 Configuring the Daily, Weekly and Monthly Report..............................................................................8-38
8.3 Network Monitoring Report ......................................................................................................................8-38
8.3.1 Background ............................................................................................................................................8-38
8.3.2 Generating the Network Monitoring Report...........................................................................................8-39
8.3.3 Report Description .................................................................................................................................8-47
8.4 PCU Performance Monitoring Report.......................................................................................................8-49
8.4.1 Background ............................................................................................................................................8-49
iv

Issue 02 (2008-02-22)
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Contents
8.4.2 Generating the PCU Performance Monitoring Report ...........................................................................8-50

8.5 Swap Comparison Report..........................................................................................................................8-57
8.5.1 Background ............................................................................................................................................8-57
8.5.2 Generating the Swap Comparison Report ..............................................................................................8-57
8.6 Enhanced Traffic Statistics ........................................................................................................................8-61
8.6.1 Background ............................................................................................................................................8-61
8.6.2 Setting the Template of Traffic Statistics................................................................................................8-62
8.6.3 Generating the Traffic Statistic Report ...................................................................................................8-65
9 Further Locating Network Problems......................................................................................9-1

9.1 Introduction .................................................................................................................................................9-1
9.2 Analyzing the Configuration .......................................................................................................................9-2
9.2.1 Background ..............................................................................................................................................9-2
9.2.2 Analyzing the Frequency Optimization ....................................................................................................9-2
9.2.3 Planning Neighbors and Configuration Check Report .............................................................................9-8
9.2.4 Configuration Check Report...................................................................................................................9-10
9.2.5 Configuration Parameters Comparison Report....................................................................................... 9-11
9.2.6 Geographical Display for Configuration Parameters..............................................................................9-13
9.2.7 Using Configuration Parameters to Update Project Parameters .............................................................9-13
9.3 Querying Performance Data ......................................................................................................................9-13
9.3.1 Background ............................................................................................................................................9-13
9.3.2 Querying Performance Guideline...........................................................................................................9-13
9.3.3 Drawing Query Result............................................................................................................................9-13
9.3.4 Geographical Performance Guideline.....................................................................................................9-13
9.3.5 TopN Sorting for Cells Performance Guide Line ...................................................................................9-13
9.4 Analyzing Performance .............................................................................................................................9-15
9.4.1 Analyzing the KPI Performance .............................................................................................................9-15
9.4.2 Analyzing the Performance of PS KPIs..................................................................................................9-33
9.4.3 Analyzing the Cell Accessibility.............................................................................................................9-35
9.4.4 Analyzing the Retainability Performance...............................................................................................9-36
9.4.5 Analyzing the Intercell Handover...........................................................................................................9-39
9.4.6 Analyzing the Outgoing Inter-cell Handover..........................................................................................9-40
9.5 Analyzing Frequency.................................................................................................................................9-41
9.5.1 Background ............................................................................................................................................9-41
9.5.2 Checking Co-Channel and Adjacent Channel ........................................................................................9-41
9.5.3 Checking Co-Channel and Co-BSIC......................................................................................................9-46
9.5.4 Checking Idle ARFCNS .........................................................................................................................9-49
9.5.5 Checking Spectrum Utilization Rate ......................................................................................................9-50
9.5.6 Checking Co-HSN and Co-MA..............................................................................................................9-52
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Contents
9.5.7 Checking Frequency Optimization .........................................................................................................9-53

9.5.8 Generating the Frequency Hopping Check Report.................................................................................9-55
9.5.9 Exporting the Frequency Scripts ............................................................................................................9-57
9.6 Analyzing Neighbors .................................................................................................................................9-58
9.6.1 Background ............................................................................................................................................9-58
9.6.2 Checking Unidirectional Neighbors .......................................................................................................9-59
9.6.3 Maintaining Relation of Neighbors ........................................................................................................9-61
9.6.4 Importing the Neighbor Relation............................................................................................................9-65
9.6.5 Importing Neighbor Relation of the Standard Format............................................................................9-65
9.6.6 Exporting Neighbor Relation..................................................................................................................9-69
9.6.7 Analyzing the Redundant Neighbors......................................................................................................9-72
9.6.8 Exporting Neighbors Adjusting Script....................................................................................................9-74
9.7 Analyzing the TRX Measurement Performance ........................................................................................9-74
9.7.1 Background ............................................................................................................................................9-74
9.7.2 Analyzing the Measurement Report .......................................................................................................9-76
9.7.3 Analyzing the TRX Level /Qual./TA/Link Balance................................................................................9-80
9.8 Analyzing Antenna & Feeder ....................................................................................................................9-82
9.8.1 Background ............................................................................................................................................9-82
9.8.2 Procedures ..............................................................................................................................................9-82
9.9 Analyzing Uplink Interference (BSC32) ...................................................................................................9-88
9.9.1 Background ............................................................................................................................................9-88
9.9.2 Procedures ..............................................................................................................................................9-89
10 Predicting Network Trend ...................................................................................................10-1

10.1 Network Expansion Report .....................................................................................................................10-2
10.1.1 Background ..........................................................................................................................................10-2
10.1.2 Procedure..............................................................................................................................................10-3
10.2 Analyzing Report of LAC Capacity ........................................................................................................10-7
10.2.1 Background ..........................................................................................................................................10-7
10.2.2 Generating an LAC Capacity Analysis Report .....................................................................................10-8
10.2.3 Introduction to the LAC Capacity Analysis Report............................................................................10-13
10.3 Analyzing the Radio Resource Utility Ratio .........................................................................................10-14
10.3.1 Background ........................................................................................................................................10-14
10.3.2 Analyzing the Daily Capability of a Cell............................................................................................10-14
10.3.3 Analyzing the Extra Busy Cells..........................................................................................................10-16
10.3.4 Analyzing the Extra Idle Cells............................................................................................................10-18
10.3.5 Analyzing the Cell Traffic in Rush Hours ..........................................................................................10-19
11 FAQ ...........................................................................................................................................11-1
11.1 Installing Notice ...................................................................................................................................... 11-2
11.1.1 MSDE is Recommended in the Stand-alone Version............................................................................ 11-2
11.1.2 Problem Caused by Uninstalling the Earlier-Version Nastar................................................................ 11-2
11.2 Problems of Running Program ................................................................................................................ 11-3
vi

Issue 02 (2008-02-22)
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Contents
11.2.1 Problems Caused by Expired License .................................................................................................. 11-3

11.2.2 Why Cannot the Program Be Correctly Started After the Installation of the Nastar GSM2.4 Hard Dongle
Version?........................................................................................................................................................... 11-5
11.2.3 Why Cannot the MSDE Be Correctly Installed? .................................................................................. 11-6
11.3 Problems of Importing Data .................................................................................................................... 11-7
11.3.1 How to Upgrade Performance Statistics Query Task in the Old Database After the Installation of the
Latest Version? ................................................................................................................................................ 11-7
11.3.2 How to Use the Nastar GSM Version 2.5 to Analyze the Results Imported by the Old Nastar GSM
Version?........................................................................................................................................................... 11-7
11.3.3 Why was the BSC32 Configuration Data Imported Incorrectly? ......................................................... 11-8
11.3.4 Importing Performance Data Error ....................................................................................................... 11-8
11.3.5 Common Problems in Performance Data Import.................................................................................. 11-9
11.4 Functional Problems .............................................................................................................................. 11-10
11.4.1 FAQs Concerning the Comparison, Backup, and Recovery of Project Parameters............................ 11-10
11.4.2 Configured Neighbor Relation ........................................................................................................... 11-10
11.4.3 Planned Neighbor Relation................................................................................................................. 11-11
11.4.4 Meaning of Each CI (Cell Identify).................................................................................................... 11-11
11.4.5 Selected Cells Lack Relevant Neighbors............................................................................................ 11-12
11.4.6 Switching Between Network Optimization Operations and Common Operations............................. 11-13
11.4.7 Why Cannot the Project Parameters Be Exported? ............................................................................ 11-15
11.4.8 Why Cannot a Task Be Running? ....................................................................................................... 11-15
11.4.9 Language of Task Tree........................................................................................................................ 11-15
11.4.10 Incorrect Antenna Icons.................................................................................................................... 11-16
11.4.11 Why Cannot the Workspace or Property Window Be Displayed? .................................................... 11-16
11.4.12 What do the Begin Time and End Time in the Network Monitoring Report Stand For? .................. 11-16
11.4.13 What do the Statistic Begin Date and Statistic End Date in the Network Monitoring Report Stand For?
....................................................................................................................................................................... 11-16
11.4.14 Description of Data Source for Channel Analysis and Network Optimization Analysis .................. 11-16
11.4.15 What Problems Occur if the Project Parameters Are Inconsistent with Configuration Parameters? 11-17
11.4.16 Result of RNP Parameter Rationality Check is inconsistent with That of Frequency Optimization
Check............................................................................................................................................................. 11-17
11.4.17 Description of the Calculation Formula of Non-Original in the Network Monitoring Report ......... 11-18
11.4.18 When Using the Shortcut Key, the Displayed Dialog Box Is Not the Related Function Dialog Box,
Why? ............................................................................................................................................................. 11-19
11.4.19 How to Adjust Parameters That Makes the View Can Display Antenna as the Zoom Changing?.... 11-20
11.5 Others .................................................................................................................................................... 11-22
11.5.1 Obtaining the Data from the Earlier-Version ...................................................................................... 11-22
11.5.2 From Tab File to MapX File ............................................................................................................... 11-28
11.5.3 Implications of the Handover Indicators in the Nastar GSM.............................................................. 11-28
12 Acronyms and Abbreviations..............................................................................................12-1

A Introduction to the Data Collection Tool ........................................................................... A-1
A.1 System Description....................................................................................................................................A-2
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

vii
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Contents
A.2 Procedures .................................................................................................................................................A-3
B GUI of the Data Collection Tool ...........................................................................................B-1

B.1 Main Interface............................................................................................................................................ B-2
B.2 Menu Bar ................................................................................................................................................... B-3
B.2.1 File................................................................................................................................................... B-3
B.2.2 Task.................................................................................................................................................. B-4
B.2.3 Help ................................................................................................................................................. B-4
B.3 Toolbar....................................................................................................................................................... B-4
C Task Management....................................................................................................................C-1
C.1 Creating a Data Collection Task ................................................................................................................ C-2
C.2 Viewing a Data Collection Task............................................................................................................... C-13
C.2.1 Viewing a Task List ....................................................................................................................... C-13
C.2.2 View the Task Information............................................................................................................. C-14
C.3 Managing Data Collection Tasks ............................................................................................................. C-21
C.3.1 Managing a Single Data Collection Task....................................................................................... C-21
C.3.2 Managing Tasks for the Entire BSC/RNC ..................................................................................... C-24
D GSM Index Definition........................................................................................................... D-1

E Engineering Parameters........................................................................................................... E-1
F Shortcut Keys............................................................................................................................. F-1
G Acronyms and Abbreviations............................................................................................... G-1
viii

Issue 02 (2008-02-22)
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Figures
Figures
Figure 1-1 Networking mode of the Nastar GSM (collecting data from the M2000).......................................1-5
Figure 1-2 Networking mode of the Nastar GSM (collecting data from the BAM) .........................................1-7
Figure 1-3 Workflow of the Nastar GSM .......................................................................................................1-10
Figure 2-1 Flow chart of installing the Nastar GSM ........................................................................................2-2
Figure 2-2 Local Area Connection Status dialog box .......................................................................................2-6
Figure 2-3 Local Area Connection Properties dialog box.................................................................................2-7
Figure 2-4 Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties dialog box ...........................................................................2-8
Figure 2-5 Initial installation interface ...........................................................................................................2-10
Figure 2-6 Installation type selection screen .................................................................................................. 2-11
Figure 2-7 Setup progress bar......................................................................................................................... 2-11
Figure 2-8 Welcome dialog box......................................................................................................................2-12
Figure 2-9 Computer Name dialog box ..........................................................................................................2-13
Figure 2-10 Installation Selection dialog box.................................................................................................2-14
Figure 2-11 User Information dialog box .......................................................................................................2-15
Figure 2-12 Software License Agreement dialog box ....................................................................................2-16
Figure 2-13 CD-Key dialog box .....................................................................................................................2-17
Figure 2-14 Installation Definition dialog box ...............................................................................................2-18
Figure 2-15 Instance Name dialog box...........................................................................................................2-19
Figure 2-16 Setup Type dialog box.................................................................................................................2-20
Figure 2-17 Select Components dialog box....................................................................................................2-21
Figure 2-18 Services Accounts dialog box .....................................................................................................2-22
Figure 2-19 Authentication Mode...................................................................................................................2-23
Figure 2-20 Collation Settings dialog box......................................................................................................2-24
Figure 2-21 Network Libraries dialog box .....................................................................................................2-25
Figure 2-22 Start Copying Files dialog box....................................................................................................2-26
Figure 2-23 Choose Licensing Mode dialog box............................................................................................2-27
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

ix
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Figures
Figure 2-24 Standard Edition progress dialog box .........................................................................................2-28

Figure 2-25 Setup Complete dialog box .........................................................................................................2-29
Figure 2-26 Welcome dialog box....................................................................................................................2-30
Figure 2-27 Installation progress bar ..............................................................................................................2-30
Figure 2-29 License Agreement dialog box....................................................................................................2-32
Figure 2-30 Setup Status progress dialog box ................................................................................................2-33
Figure 2-31 InstallShield Wizard Complete dialog box..................................................................................2-34
Figure 2-32 Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for Nastar GSM dialog box..............................................2-35
Figure 2-33 License Agreement dialog box....................................................................................................2-36
Figure 2-34 Customer Information dialog box ...............................................................................................2-37
Figure 2-35 Setup Type dialog box.................................................................................................................2-38
Figure 2-36 Choose Destination Location dialog box ....................................................................................2-39
Figure 2-37 Select Program Folder dialog box...............................................................................................2-40
Figure 2-38 Setup Status dialog box...............................................................................................................2-41
Figure 2-39 Maintenance Complete dialog box..............................................................................................2-42
Figure 2-40 Flow chart of uninstalling the Nastar GSM ................................................................................2-44
Figure 2-41 Add or Remove Programs dialog box .........................................................................................2-45
Figure 2-43 Confirm Uninstall dialog box .....................................................................................................2-46
Figure 2-44 Uninstall Complete dialog box ...................................................................................................2-47
Figure 2-45 Uninstalling the GENEX GSM dialog box .................................................................................2-48
Figure 2-47 Confirm Uninstall dialog box .....................................................................................................2-49
Figure 2-48 Uninstall Complete dialog box ...................................................................................................2-50
Figure 2-49 Updating license dialog box........................................................................................................2-51
Figure 3-1 GUI of the Nastar GSM ..................................................................................................................3-2
Figure 3-2 Menu bar .........................................................................................................................................3-3
Figure 3-3 Submenus of the Project menu........................................................................................................3-4
Figure 3-4 Submenus of the Frequency Analysis menu ...................................................................................3-5
Figure 3-5 Submenus of the Neighbors Analysis menu....................................................................................3-5
Figure 3-6 Submenus of the Analysis Reports menu........................................................................................3-6
Figure 3-7 Submenus of the Geographic Display menu ...................................................................................3-7

Issue 02 (2008-02-22)
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Figures
Figure 3-8 Submenus of the View menu...........................................................................................................3-7

Figure 3-9 Submenus of the Window menu .....................................................................................................3-9
Figure 3-10 Help menu.....................................................................................................................................3-9
Figure 3-11 Network Management toolbar.....................................................................................................3-10
Figure 3-12 Network Optimization toolbar .................................................................................................... 3-11
Figure 3-13 Map Tool toolbar.........................................................................................................................3-12
Figure 3-14 Performance toolbar....................................................................................................................3-12
Figure 3-15 Network Element pane................................................................................................................3-14
Figure 3-16 Search menu of NE .....................................................................................................................3-15
Figure 3-17 Network Monitor pane ................................................................................................................3-16
Figure 3-18 Network Trend pane....................................................................................................................3-17
Figure 3-19 Performance Alarm pane.............................................................................................................3-18
Figure 3-20 Trouble Shooting pane ................................................................................................................3-19
Figure 3-21 Property window.........................................................................................................................3-20
Figure 3-22 Site View window .......................................................................................................................3-21
Figure 3-23 GUI of the Nastar GSM Transdata..............................................................................................3-22
Figure 3-24 Menu bar .....................................................................................................................................3-23
Figure 3-25 File menu ....................................................................................................................................3-23
Figure 3-26 View menu ..................................................................................................................................3-23
Figure 3-27 Tools menu..................................................................................................................................3-24
Figure 3-28 Options dialog box......................................................................................................................3-25
Figure 3-29 Help menu...................................................................................................................................3-25
Figure 3-30 Toolbar ........................................................................................................................................3-26
Figure 3-31 Project view ................................................................................................................................3-27
Figure 3-32 Main view ...................................................................................................................................3-28
Figure 3-33 Output window............................................................................................................................3-28
Figure 4-1 SQL Server Service Manager dialog box........................................................................................4-2
Figure 4-2 Login dialog box .............................................................................................................................4-3
Figure 4-4 Main interface of the Transdata ......................................................................................................4-5
Figure 4-5 Quit menu .......................................................................................................................................4-6
Figure 4-6 Quit dialog box ...............................................................................................................................4-6
Figure 4-7 Network Information dialog box.....................................................................................................4-7
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

xi
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Figures
Figure 4-8 Add BSC\PCU dialog box ..............................................................................................................4-9

Figure 4-9 Adding BSC\PCU ...........................................................................................................................4-9
Figure 4-10 Creating BSC32 ..........................................................................................................................4-10
Figure 4-11 Creating BSC6000 ...................................................................................................................... 4-11
Figure 4-12 Information dialog box ............................................................................................................... 4-11
Figure 4-13 BSC Upgrade dialog box ............................................................................................................4-12
Figure 4-14 Confirmation dialog box .............................................................................................................4-13
Figure 4-15 Add BSC\PCU dialog box...........................................................................................................4-14
Figure 4-16 Adding PCU dialog box ..............................................................................................................4-14
Figure 4-17 Success load message .................................................................................................................4-15
Figure 4-18 Information dialog box ...............................................................................................................4-15
Figure 4-20 Shortcut menu .............................................................................................................................4-16
Figure 4-22 Operator management dialog box ...............................................................................................4-17
Figure 4-23 KPI Configuration Setting dialog box.........................................................................................4-19
Figure 4-24 Open dialog box..........................................................................................................................4-20
Figure 4-26 Swap Cell Configuration Setting dialog box...............................................................................4-23
Figure 4-27 Swap success messages...............................................................................................................4-23
Figure 4-28 BSC information .........................................................................................................................4-24
Figure 4-29 Button in the File Path column ...................................................................................................4-24
Figure 4-30 Browse for Folder dialog box .....................................................................................................4-25
Figure 4-31 Successful import of configuration data .....................................................................................4-25
Figure 4-32 PCU information dialog box .......................................................................................................4-26
Figure 4-33 The button in file path.................................................................................................................4-26
Figure 4-34 Browse for Folder .......................................................................................................................4-27
Figure 4-35 Successful import of configuration data .....................................................................................4-27
Figure 4-36 Options dialog box......................................................................................................................4-28
Figure 4-37 Tasks Information dialog box......................................................................................................4-30
Figure 4-38 Check Task Time dialog box.......................................................................................................4-31
Figure 4-39 Import success information.........................................................................................................4-31
Figure 4-40 Created BSC ...............................................................................................................................4-32
xii

Issue 02 (2008-02-22)
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Figures
Figure 4-41 Import Task setting dialog box....................................................................................................4-32

Figure 4-42 Import Task setting dialog box....................................................................................................4-33
dynamically import setting dialog box ..........................................................................................................4-34
Figure 4-43 .....................................................................................................................................................4-34
Figure 4-46 History Data dialog box ..............................................................................................................4-36
Figure 4-48 Message displayed during task initialization ..............................................................................4-37
Figure 4-49 Message of task backup ..............................................................................................................4-38
Figure 4-50 Message of task restore ...............................................................................................................4-39
Figure 5-2 Project Setting dialog box ...............................................................................................................5-4
Figure 5-3 New Project dialog box...................................................................................................................5-4
Figure 5-4 New project in the Project Setting dialog box.................................................................................5-5
Figure 5-6 Project menu ...................................................................................................................................5-7
Figure 5-7 Browse for Folder dialog box .......................................................................................................5-14
Figure 5-8 Information dialog box .................................................................................................................5-14
Figure 5-9 Progress bar...................................................................................................................................5-15
Figure 5-10 Total Records information dialog box.........................................................................................5-15
Figure 5-11 Reloading cell information and Huawei neighbor relations wait progress bar............................5-15
Figure 5-12 Neb Configuration dialog box.....................................................................................................5-16
Figure 5-15 Please choose Siemens configure file dialog box .......................................................................5-18
Figure 5-17 Synchronization Report dialog box.............................................................................................5-19
Figure 5-18 Output result window..................................................................................................................5-20
Figure 5-19 Huawei GPRS Cell Parameter pane............................................................................................5-21
Figure 5-20 Submenu of exporting configuration parameters ........................................................................5-22
Figure 5-21 Configuration parameter table exported in an .xls file................................................................5-22
Figure 5-22 Output PCU Config. dialog box..................................................................................................5-23
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

xiii
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Figures
Figure 5-23 Configuration parameter exported in an .xls file.........................................................................5-24

Figure 5-24 Open dialog box..........................................................................................................................5-25
Figure 5-25 Select Table dialog box ...............................................................................................................5-25
Figure 5-26 Import Setting dialog box ...........................................................................................................5-26
Figure 5-27 Confirming information dialog box ............................................................................................5-27
Figure 5-28 Successfully importing the project parameter.............................................................................5-27
Figure 5-29 Output dialog box .......................................................................................................................5-29
Figure 5-30 Compare project parameters menu..............................................................................................5-30
Figure 5-31 Result of comparing project parameters .....................................................................................5-31
Figure 5-32 Project Parameters sheet .............................................................................................................5-32
Figure 5-33 Neighbor Record sheet................................................................................................................5-32
Figure 5-34 Autoplan Neighbor Record sheet ................................................................................................5-33
Figure 5-35 Backup Project Parameter dialog box .........................................................................................5-34
Figure 5-36 Backup Project Parameter dialog box .........................................................................................5-35
Figure 5-37 Information box after you upload the project parameters ...........................................................5-36
Figure 5-38 Information box after you download the project parameters ......................................................5-36
Figure 5-39 Data Backup command ...............................................................................................................5-38
Figure 5-41 Progress bar.................................................................................................................................5-39
Figure 5-42 Data backup complete dialog box ...............................................................................................5-40
Figure 5-43 Data Restore submenu ................................................................................................................5-41
Figure 5-45 Progress bar.................................................................................................................................5-42
Figure 5-46 Data restore complete dialog box................................................................................................5-42
Figure 5-47 Frequency & Neighbor Config. Para. Check dialog box ............................................................5-43
Figure 5-49 BSC-RNP Para Setting tab page .................................................................................................5-45
Figure 5-50 Parameter Rationality Check report in an .xls file ......................................................................5-47
Figure 5-51 Huawei RNP Check Setting ........................................................................................................5-48
Figure 5-52 Report on the check of Huawei configuration parameters in an .xls file ....................................5-49
Figure 5-53 User Management dialog box .....................................................................................................5-51
Figure 5-54 Set User Access Rights dialog box .............................................................................................5-52
Figure 5-55 User Log dialog box....................................................................................................................5-53
xiv

Issue 02 (2008-02-22)
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Figures
Figure 5-56 Site Edit dialog box.....................................................................................................................5-55

Figure 5-57 Cell Information tab page ...........................................................................................................5-56
Figure 5-58 Site Edit dialog box.....................................................................................................................5-57
Figure 5-59 Dialog box of confirming drag BTS operation ...........................................................................5-58
Figure 5-63 Open Raster Image dialog box....................................................................................................5-62
Figure 5-64 Raster Image dialog box .............................................................................................................5-63
Figure 5-65 Click Image to add a point dialog box ........................................................................................5-64
Figure 5-66 Site view toolbar .........................................................................................................................5-64
Figure 5-67 Layer Control dialog box ............................................................................................................5-66
Figure 5-68 Legend window for network optimization analysis ....................................................................5-67
Figure 5-69 Legend window during adjacent channel checking ....................................................................5-67
Figure 5-70 Browse For Folder ......................................................................................................................5-69
Figure 5-71 Cell Group dialog box.................................................................................................................5-70
Figure 5-72 New Cell Group dialog box ........................................................................................................5-71
Figure 5-74 Edit Cell Group dialog box .........................................................................................................5-73
Figure 5-76 Common Period Setting dialog box ............................................................................................5-75
Figure 5-77 Data Synchronization Setting dialog box....................................................................................5-76
Figure 5-78 Synchronization Report dialog box.............................................................................................5-76
Figure 5-79 BSC Group dialog box................................................................................................................5-77
Figure 5-80 New BSC Group dialog box .......................................................................................................5-78
Figure 5-82 BSC Group Edit dialog box ........................................................................................................5-80
Figure 5-84 Delete BSC group .......................................................................................................................5-81
Figure 5-85 Quick Draw Setting dialog box...................................................................................................5-83
Figure 5-86 Quick drawing.............................................................................................................................5-84
Figure 5-87 Sum of a selected row .................................................................................................................5-86
Figure 5-88 Result sorting ..............................................................................................................................5-87
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

xv
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Figures
Figure 5-89 Filtering query results .................................................................................................................5-88

Figure 5-90 Stretching window ......................................................................................................................5-89
Figure 5-91 New Cell Group on the shortcut menu........................................................................................5-90
Figure 5-92 Draw Selected Column on Map option.......................................................................................5-91
Figure 5-93 Telephone Statistic Map Color Setting dialog box......................................................................5-92
Figure 5-94 Geographical display of performance data..................................................................................5-93
Figure 5-95 Quick drawing.............................................................................................................................5-94
Figure 5-96 Chart analysis menu....................................................................................................................5-96
Figure 5-97 Legend ........................................................................................................................................5-97
Figure 6-1 Search Cells dialog box ..................................................................................................................6-3
Figure 6-2 searching a cell................................................................................................................................6-4
Figure 6-3 Location area displaying setting dialog box....................................................................................6-5
Figure 6-4 Color Setting dialog box .................................................................................................................6-6
Figure 6-5 LAC displayed on the map..............................................................................................................6-7
Figure 6-6 Color setting dialog box..................................................................................................................6-8
Figure 6-7 GPRS cells highlighted on the map ................................................................................................6-9
Figure 6-8 BSC Display Setting dialog box ...................................................................................................6-10
Figure 6-9 Color Setting dialog box ...............................................................................................................6-10
Figure 6-10 BSC Coverage highlighted on the map ....................................................................................... 6-11
Figure 6-11 All sites displayed on the map.....................................................................................................6-12
Figure 6-12 Display Network Optimization Theme Setting menu .................................................................6-13
Figure 6-13 Show Theme dialog box .............................................................................................................6-14
Figure 6-14 Result of the highlighted theme ..................................................................................................6-15
Figure 6-15 Reference grid.............................................................................................................................6-16
Figure 6-16 900 MHz layer ............................................................................................................................6-17
Figure 6-17 1800 MHz layer ..........................................................................................................................6-18
Figure 6-18 Project Parameter Select dialog box ...........................................................................................6-19
Figure 6-19 Color Config dialog box .............................................................................................................6-20
Figure 6-20 Display on the map .....................................................................................................................6-21
Figure 6-21 Show Items Option dialog box....................................................................................................6-22
Figure 6-22 Option dialog box .......................................................................................................................6-23
Figure 6-23 Result figure with the cell label ..................................................................................................6-24
Figure 6-24 Grid Setting dialog box ...............................................................................................................6-25
xvi

Issue 02 (2008-02-22)
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Figures
Figure 6-25 Config data show setting dialog box...........................................................................................6-26

Figure 7-1 Performance Alarm navigation tree ................................................................................................7-3
Figure 7-2 Modify alarm task ...........................................................................................................................7-4
Figure 7-3 Carrier Frequency Disabled Cell Alarm Parameter Setting dialog box...........................................7-5
Figure 7-4 Alarm condition setting...................................................................................................................7-6
Figure 7-5 Alarm condition setting modified ...................................................................................................7-7
Figure 7-6 Carrier frequency disabled cell alarm parameter setting dialog box ...............................................7-8
Figure 7-7 Alarm condition setting dialog box .................................................................................................7-9
Figure 7-8 Alarm condition setting dialog box ...............................................................................................7-10
Figure 7-9 Alarm condition setting dialog box ............................................................................................... 7-11
Figure 7-10 Alarm of SDCCH Congestion Cell .............................................................................................7-12
Figure 7-11 Alarm Condition Setting dialog box............................................................................................7-13
Figure 7-12 Alarm of SDCCH call drop cell ..................................................................................................7-14
Figure 7-13 Alarm of immediate assignment success cell..............................................................................7-15
Figure 7-14 Alarm of radio connected cell .....................................................................................................7-16
Figure 7-15 Alarm of successful handover cell ..............................................................................................7-17
Figure 7-16 Starting an alarm task..................................................................................................................7-18
Figure 7-17 Suspending an Alarm Task..........................................................................................................7-19
Figure 7-18 Activating an alarm task..............................................................................................................7-20
Figure 7-19 Performance Alarm navigation tree ............................................................................................7-21
Figure 7-20 Alarm Operation dialog box........................................................................................................7-22
Figure 7-21 Filling in detailed information about the alarm task ...................................................................7-23
Figure 7-22 Creating an alarm task ................................................................................................................7-24
Figure 7-23 Alarm Template navigation tree ..................................................................................................7-24
Figure 7-24 Alarm Parameter Setting dialog box ...........................................................................................7-25
Figure 7-25 Alarm Condition Setting dialog box ...........................................................................................7-26
Figure 7-26 Deleting an alarm task ................................................................................................................7-27
Figure 7-27 Confirmation dialog box about deleting an alarm task ...............................................................7-27
Figure 7-28 Modifying an alarm task .............................................................................................................7-28
Figure 7-29 Alarm Parameter Setting dialog box ...........................................................................................7-28
Figure 7-30 Alarm Condition Setting dialog box ...........................................................................................7-29
Figure 7-31 History Alarm Search dialog box................................................................................................7-30
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

xvii
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Figures
Figure 7-32 Alarm window.............................................................................................................................7-31

Figure 7-33 Alarm Filtrate Setting Menu .......................................................................................................7-32
Figure 7-34 Alarm KPI Filter Setting dialog box ...........................................................................................7-33
Figure 7-35 Notepad.......................................................................................................................................7-34
Figure 8-1 Report customization template dialog box......................................................................................8-3
Figure 8-2 KPI Dialog box ...............................................................................................................................8-4
Figure 8-3 TopN dialog box..............................................................................................................................8-6
Figure 8-4 Overthreshold dialog box................................................................................................................8-7
Figure 8-5 New List dialog box........................................................................................................................8-8
Figure 8-6 CHART dialog box .........................................................................................................................8-9
Figure 8-7 Worst Cell dialog box.................................................................................................................... 8-11
Figure 8-8 Daily report command ..................................................................................................................8-13
Figure 8-9 Setting tab page of the Daily Report dialog box ...........................................................................8-14
Figure 8-10 Advanced tab page of the daily report dialog box.......................................................................8-16
Figure 8-12 New Cell Group dialog box ........................................................................................................8-18
Figure 8-13 Daily report .................................................................................................................................8-19
Figure 8-14 Weekly report command .............................................................................................................8-20
Figure 8-15 Setting tab page of the weekly report dialog box........................................................................8-21
Figure 8-16 Advanced tab page of the Weekly Report dialog box .................................................................8-22
Figure 8-17 Weekly report..............................................................................................................................8-23
Figure 8-18 Monthly report command............................................................................................................8-25
Figure 8-19 Setting tab of the Monthly Report dialog box.............................................................................8-26
Figure 8-20 Advance tab of the monthly report dialog box............................................................................8-28
Figure 8-21 Monthly report ............................................................................................................................8-29
Figure 8-22 KPI sheet in the daily report .......................................................................................................8-30
Figure 8-23 VIC sheet of Daily Report ..........................................................................................................8-31
Figure 8-24 KPI sheet of the weekly report....................................................................................................8-33
Figure 8-25 VIC sheet of weekly report .........................................................................................................8-35
Figure 8-26 Network Monitoring Report command .......................................................................................8-40
Figure 8-27 Network Monitoring Report dialog box......................................................................................8-41
Figure 8-28 Network Monitor Report Advanced tab page.............................................................................8-43
Figure 8-29 Index ...........................................................................................................................................8-44
xviii

Issue 02 (2008-02-22)
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Figures
Figure 8-30 Network Monitoring Report........................................................................................................8-46

Figure 8-31 Analysis Reports menu ...............................................................................................................8-50
Figure 8-32 PCU Network Monitoring Report dialog box .............................................................................8-51
Figure 8-33 Engineer report type of the PCU network monitoring report......................................................8-53
Figure 8-34 The PCU network monitoring report of Team leader report type ...............................................8-55
Figure 8-35 The PCU network monitoring report of Compare Report type ...................................................8-56
Figure 8-36 Swap Comparison Report ...........................................................................................................8-58
Figure 8-37 Swap Compare ............................................................................................................................8-59
Figure 8-38 Swap Comparison Report ...........................................................................................................8-60
Figure 8-39 Report Output dialog box............................................................................................................8-62
Figure 8-40 Saving a template........................................................................................................................8-64
Figure 8-41 Report output ..............................................................................................................................8-66
Figure 8-42 Generating an .xls report.............................................................................................................8-67
Figure 9-1 Auto Frequency Optimization Report dialog box ...........................................................................9-3
Figure 9-2 Auto Frequency Optimization Report (No data there) ....................................................................9-4
Figure 9-3 Advance Setting tab page of the Auto Frequency Optimization Report dialog box........................9-5
Figure 9-4 Auto Frequency Optimization Report .............................................................................................9-7
Figure 9-5 Project Parameter Check dialog box ...............................................................................................9-9
Figure 9-6 ProjectPara Check Report in an .xls file .......................................................................................9-10
Figure 9-7 Configuration parameter comparison report dialog box ............................................................... 9-11
Figure 9-8 Configure parameter compare report ............................................................................................9-12
Figure 9-9 TopN Cell Analysis dialog box .....................................................................................................9-14
Figure 9-10 Trouble Shooting item list...........................................................................................................9-16
Figure 9-11 BSC-level KPI Analysis dialog box ............................................................................................9-17
Figure 9-12 Busy Time Modify dialog box ....................................................................................................9-18
Figure 9-13 Objects tab page..........................................................................................................................9-19
Figure 9-14 Trouble Shooting tab page ..........................................................................................................9-20
Figure 9-15 One Week Trend of Cell's KPI Stat dialog box ...........................................................................9-21
Figure 9-16 Time Range tab of the One Week Trend of Cells KPI Stat dialog box ......................................9-22
Figure 9-17 Queried Objects tab page of the One Week Trend of Cells KPI Stat dialog box .......................9-23
Figure 9-18 User-defined Cell Filter dialog box.............................................................................................9-24
Figure 9-19 Query Filter Condition dialog box ..............................................................................................9-25
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

xix
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Figures
Figure 9-21 TopN Cell Analysis dialog box ...................................................................................................9-27

Figure 9-23 Cell KPI Trend Chart & Sheet dialog box...................................................................................9-29
Figure 9-25 Queried Objects tab page ............................................................................................................9-31
Figure 9-26 Extra Bad Cell Analysis dialog box ............................................................................................9-32
Figure 9-28 Cell Access Analysis dialog box .................................................................................................9-35
Figure 9-30 SDCCH /TCH Drops Analysis(BSC32) dialog box....................................................................9-37
Figure 9-32 Inter-cell handover analysis(BSC32) dialog box ........................................................................9-39
Figure 9-34 Frequency analysis by cell shortcut menu ..................................................................................9-42
Figure 9-35 Co-Channel and Adjacent Channel Check dialog box ................................................................9-42
Figure 9-36 Channel check dialog box ...........................................................................................................9-43
Figure 9-37 Frequency analysis by ARFCN shortcut menu ...........................................................................9-43
Figure 9-38 Co-Channel and Adjacent Channel Check dialog box ................................................................9-43
Figure 9-39 ARFCN Check dialog box ..........................................................................................................9-44
Figure 9-40 Check result of the adjacent channel...........................................................................................9-45
Figure 9-41 Legend window...........................................................................................................................9-46
Figure 9-42 Co-BCCH Co-BSIC Check menu...............................................................................................9-46
Figure 9-43 Search Co-BCCH BSIC Cells dialog box ...................................................................................9-47
Figure 9-44 Co-channel and Co-BSIC cell check dialog box.........................................................................9-48
Figure 9-45 Idle ARFCNS menu ....................................................................................................................9-49
Figure 9-46 Idle ARFCN Check dialog box ...................................................................................................9-49
Figure 9-47 Idle ARFCN Query Results dialog box.......................................................................................9-50
Figure 9-48 Spectrum Utilization menu .........................................................................................................9-50
Figure 9-49 Spectrum Utilization dialog box .................................................................................................9-51
Figure 9-50 Result dialog box of ARFCN Utilization Check.........................................................................9-51
Figure 9-51 Co-HSN Co-MA Check menu ....................................................................................................9-52
Figure 9-52 Co-HSN Co-MA Check dialog box ............................................................................................9-52
Figure 9-53 Channel Check dialog box ..........................................................................................................9-53
xx

Issue 02 (2008-02-22)
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Figures
Figure 9-54 ARFCN Display dialog box ........................................................................................................9-54

Figure 9-55 Frequency Analysis menu ...........................................................................................................9-55
Figure 9-56 Hopping report object setting dialog box....................................................................................9-56
Figure 9-57 Frequency hopping check report in .xls format...........................................................................9-57
Figure 9-58 Browse For Folder ......................................................................................................................9-58
Figure 9-59 Check Unidirectional Neighbors menu .......................................................................................9-59
Figure 9-60 Unidirectional neighbor check result ..........................................................................................9-60
Figure 9-61 Neighbor Analysis menu.............................................................................................................9-61
Figure 9-62 Neighbors relation effect.............................................................................................................9-62
Figure 9-63 Add Bidirectional Neighbors ......................................................................................................9-63
Figure 9-64 Import Neighbor File menu.........................................................................................................9-65
Figure 9-65 Neighbor Analysis menu.............................................................................................................9-66
Figure 9-66 Please choose level adjacent relation file to import dialog box ..................................................9-67
Figure 9-67 Please choose upright adjacent relation file import dialog box...................................................9-68
Figure 9-68 Export Neighbors menu ..............................................................................................................9-69
Figure 9-69 Export Neighbors dialog box ......................................................................................................9-69
Figure 9-70 Table of horizontal neighbor relation in .xls format....................................................................9-70
Figure 9-71 Table of vertical neighbor relation in .xls format ........................................................................9-71
Figure 9-72 Clear Config. Neighbors menu ...................................................................................................9-72
Figure 9-73 Confirmation box ........................................................................................................................9-72
Figure 9-74 Redundant Neighborcell Analysis(BSC32) dialog box...............................................................9-73
Figure 9-75 Measurement Report Analysis command....................................................................................9-76
Figure 9-76 Measurement Report Analysis dialog box ..................................................................................9-77
Figure 9-77 CarrierAnalyReport.....................................................................................................................9-79
Figure 9-78 Full Rate TRX Level-Qual.-TA-Link Balance Analysis(BSC32) dialog box .............................9-81
Figure 9-79 Antenna & Feeder Analysis dialog box.......................................................................................9-83
Figure 9-80 Analysis Setting menu.................................................................................................................9-84
Figure 9-81 Setting dialog box .......................................................................................................................9-85
Figure 9-82 Net Element tab page of the Antenna & Feeder Analysis dialog box .........................................9-86
Figure 9-83 Analysis Parameters tab page of Antenna & Feeder Analysis dialog box...................................9-87
Figure 9-84 Trouble Shooting menu...............................................................................................................9-89
Figure 9-85 UL Interference Analysis dialog box ..........................................................................................9-90
Figure 9-86 Queried Objects tab page of the UL Interference Analysis dialog box .......................................9-91
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

xxi
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Figures
Figure 9-87 Uplink interference frequency setting dialog box .......................................................................9-92

Figure 9-88 There is no data...........................................................................................................................9-92
Figure 10-1 Network Expansion Report command ........................................................................................10-3
Figure 10-2 Network Expansion Report dialog box .......................................................................................10-4
Figure 10-3 Query Object tab page of the Network Expansion Report dialog box ........................................10-5
Figure 10-4 Network Expansion Report.........................................................................................................10-6
Figure 10-5 Network Expansion Report in OWC mode.................................................................................10-7
Figure 10-6 LAC Capacity Analysis Report command ..................................................................................10-8
Figure 10-7 LAC Capacity Analysis dialog box.............................................................................................10-9
Figure 10-8 Parameters Setting tab page of the LAC Capacity Analysis dialog box ................................... 10-11
Figure 10-9 LAC Capacity report.................................................................................................................10-13
Figure 10-10 Daily Cell Capability Analysis dialog box..............................................................................10-15
Figure 10-11 Extra Busy Cell Analysis dialog box.......................................................................................10-17
Figure 10-12 Extra Idle Cell Analysis dialog box ........................................................................................10-18
Figure 10-13 Cell Traffic Rush Hour Stat dialog box...................................................................................10-19
Figure 11-1 License Error dialog box ............................................................................................................. 11-3
Figure 11-2 Open dialog box .......................................................................................................................... 11-4
Figure 11-3 License information .................................................................................................................... 11-5
Figure 11-4 Input performance data error....................................................................................................... 11-8
Figure 11-5 Network information dialog box ................................................................................................. 11-9
Figure 11-6 Problem hint dialog box ............................................................................................................ 11-10
Figure 11-7 Co-channel and adjacent channel check.................................................................................... 11-13
Figure 11-8 Amplified map of co-channel and adjacent channel check ....................................................... 11-14
Figure 11-9 Site View ................................................................................................................................... 11-15
Figure 11-10 Show Items Option dialog box................................................................................................ 11-20
Figure 11-11 Case of a too large displaying area .......................................................................................... 11-21
Figure 11-12 Displaying the area range after being corrected ...................................................................... 11-22
Figure 11-13 Export Neighbors command.................................................................................................... 11-23
Figure 11-14 Export Neighbors dialog box .................................................................................................. 11-23
Figure 11-15 Neighbor Analysis menu ......................................................................................................... 11-24
Figure 11-16 Please choose level adjacent relation file to import dialog box............................................... 11-24
Figure 11-17 Please choose upright adjacent relation file to import dialog box........................................... 11-25
Figure 11-18 Output dialog box.................................................................................................................... 11-26
xxii

Issue 02 (2008-02-22)
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Figures
Figure 11-19 Open dialog box ...................................................................................................................... 11-27

Figure 11-20 Select Table dialog box ........................................................................................................... 11-27
Figure 11-21 Import Setup dialog box.......................................................................................................... 11-28
Figure A-1 Procedures .....................................................................................................................................A-4
Figure B-1 Blank window ............................................................................................................................... B-2
Figure B-2 Interface of the operating tasks ..................................................................................................... B-3
Figure B-3 File menu....................................................................................................................................... B-3
Figure B-4 Task menu ..................................................................................................................................... B-4
Figure B-5 Help menu ..................................................................................................................................... B-4
Figure B-6 Toolbar .......................................................................................................................................... B-4
Figure C-1 BSC/RNC Selection dialog box .................................................................................................... C-2
Figure C-2 New BSC/RNC dialog box ........................................................................................................... C-3
Figure C-3 Information dialog box.................................................................................................................. C-3
Figure C-4 Data Type tab page in the New Task dialog box ........................................................................... C-4
Figure C-5 BSC Server tab page in the New Task dialog box......................................................................... C-5
Figure C-6 DataSource Path tab page.............................................................................................................. C-6
Figure C-7 Performance tab page.................................................................................................................... C-7
Figure C-8 Configuration tab page.................................................................................................................. C-8
Figure C-9 Collection Data Time tab page...................................................................................................... C-9
Figure C-10 Collection Task Time tab page .................................................................................................. C-10
Figure C-11 Advance tab page ...................................................................................................................... C-11
Figure C-12 Data Save Path tab page............................................................................................................ C-12
Figure C-13 Data Reserve Days tab page...................................................................................................... C-13
Figure C-14 Task list ..................................................................................................................................... C-14
Figure C-15 Interface of checking task information...................................................................................... C-15
Figure C-16 Interface of checking system logs ............................................................................................. C-15
Figure C-17 Interface of task information ..................................................................................................... C-16
Figure C-18 Interface of task configuration information............................................................................... C-17
Figure C-19 Collection Task tab page ........................................................................................................... C-17
Figure C-20 Selecting a record...................................................................................................................... C-18
Figure C-21 Task Period Info window .......................................................................................................... C-18
Figure C-22 Upload Task interface................................................................................................................ C-19
Figure C-23 Selecting a task on the Upload Task interface........................................................................... C-19
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

xxiii
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Figures
Figure C-24 Upload Record Info window..................................................................................................... C-19

Figure C-25 Operation log information interface.......................................................................................... C-20
Figure C-26 Deleting or exporting a log ....................................................................................................... C-20
Figure C-27 Title bar in the task information pane........................................................................................ C-20
Figure C-28 Title bar in the task log pane ..................................................................................................... C-21
Figure C-29 Shortcut menu of a task............................................................................................................. C-22
Figure C-30 Modifying task configuration window...................................................................................... C-23
Figure C-31 Shortcut menu of a BSC node................................................................................................... C-24
xxiv

Issue 02 (2008-02-22)
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Tables
Tables
Table 1-1 Data collection methods for different types of NEs..........................................................................1-3
Table 1-2 Networking mode of the Nastar GSM (collecting data from the M2000) ........................................1-6
Table 1-3 Networking mode of the Nastar GSM (collecting data from the BAM)...........................................1-8
Table 1-4 Software configuration of each entity of the Nastar GSM................................................................1-9
Table 1-5 Software configuration of each entity of the Nastar GSM.............................................................. 1-11
Table 1-6 Supported NE versions ...................................................................................................................1-12
Table 2-1 Nastar GSM system configuration in server/client version ..............................................................2-3
Table 2-2 Configuration of the stand-alone edition ..........................................................................................2-4
Table 2-3 Selecting the edition of the SQL Server............................................................................................2-9
Table 2-4 Operation in the Instance Name dialog box....................................................................................2-19
Table 2-5 Structure of the directory ................................................................................................................2-43
Table 3-1 Description of the Nastar GSM GUI ................................................................................................3-3
Table 3-2 Description of the View menu ..........................................................................................................3-8
Table 3-3 Description of the Help menu .........................................................................................................3-10
Table 3-4 Description of the Network Management toolbar...........................................................................3-10
Table 3-5 Description of the Network Optimization toolbar .......................................................................... 3-11
Table 3-6 Description of the Map Tool toolbar...............................................................................................3-12
Table 3-7 Description of the performance toolbar ..........................................................................................3-13
Table 3-8 Description of the GUI of the Transdata.........................................................................................3-22
Table 3-9 Description of the View menu ........................................................................................................3-24
Table 3-10 Description of the Help menu .......................................................................................................3-26
Table 3-11 Icons on the toolbar.......................................................................................................................3-26
Table 4-1 Description of the Login dialog box .................................................................................................4-4
Table 4-2 Elements in the Network Information dialog box.............................................................................4-7
Table 5-1 Data sources......................................................................................................................................5-9
Table 5-2 Import data supported by the Nastar GSM .....................................................................................5-10
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

xxv
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Tables
Table 5-3 Importing configuration parameter mode ....................................................................................... 5-11

Table 5-4 Related configuration parameter requirement.................................................................................5-12
Table 5-5 Description of the result of comparing project parameters .............................................................5-31
Table 5-6 Description of the elements in the Frequency & Neighbor Config. Para. Check dialog box..........5-44
Table 5-7 Description of the BSC-RNP parameter setting tab page ...............................................................5-45
Table 5-8 Description of the configuration parameter check report................................................................5-49
Table 5-9 Options on the shortcut menu .........................................................................................................5-53
Table 5-10 Description of the site view toolbar ..............................................................................................5-65
Table 5-11 Icons on the toolbar.......................................................................................................................5-94
Table 5-12 Function of each item in the analysis chart...................................................................................5-96
Table 6-1 Elements in the show theme dialog box..........................................................................................6-14
Table 7-1 Alarm condition setting symbol ........................................................................................................7-6
Table 7-2 Checking alarm messages...............................................................................................................7-21
Table 7-3 Description of fields .......................................................................................................................7-34
Table 8-1 Functions of the buttons....................................................................................................................8-5
Table 8-2 Settings and functions.....................................................................................................................8-10
Table 8-3 Description of the Setting tab page.................................................................................................8-14
Table 8-4 Element on the Setting tab page......................................................................................................8-26
Table 8-5 TopN ...............................................................................................................................................8-44
Table 8-6 Sheets in the engineer monitoring report ........................................................................................8-47
Table 8-7 Sheets in the team leader monitoring report ...................................................................................8-48
Table 8-8 Sheets in the comparison monitoring report ...................................................................................8-49
Table 8-9 Description of the Network Monitor Report dialog box .................................................................8-51
Table 8-10 Functions of each sheet in Engineer Report..................................................................................8-53
Table 8-11 Function of each sheet in Team Leader Report .............................................................................8-55
Table 8-12 Function of each sheet in Compare Report...................................................................................8-57
Table 8-13 Sheets in the swap comparison report...........................................................................................8-61
Table 8-14 Output setting of the report...........................................................................................................8-63
Table 9-1 Description of configuration analysis ...............................................................................................9-2
Table 9-2 Frequency band and range ................................................................................................................9-6
Table 9-3 Description of the Configuration parameter comparison report dialog box.................................... 9-11
Table 9-4 Frequencies supported for the Nastar GSM....................................................................................9-41
Table 9-5 Description of the ARFCN Display dialog box ..............................................................................9-54
xxvi

Issue 02 (2008-02-22)
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Tables
Table 9-6 Description of Time and Object Setting tab page ...........................................................................9-77
Table 9-7 Description of the Antenna & Feeder Analysis dialog box.............................................................9-83
Table 9-8 Description of Analysis Parameters tab page in Antenna & Feeder Analysis dialog box ...............9-88
Table 9-9 Description of the Time Range tab page in UL Interference Analysis dialog box ..........................9-90
Table 10-1 Settings of the Parameter Setting tab page in the Network Expansion Report dialog box ...........10-4
Table 10-2 Description of the LAC Capacity Analysis dialog box .................................................................10-9
Table 10-3 Describes the items in the Parameters Setting tab page of the LAC Capacity Analysis dialog box
.......................................................................................................................................................................10-12
Table 11-1 Process procedure ......................................................................................................................... 11-6
Table 11-2 Calculation formula of non-original............................................................................................ 11-18
Table 11-3 Handover success rate................................................................................................................. 11-29
Table 12-1 Abbreviations................................................................................................................................12-1
Table A-1 Data source types for specified versions .........................................................................................A-2
Table A-2 Description of data source...............................................................................................................A-2
Table B-1 Description of buttons ..................................................................................................................... B-5
Table D-1 Description of the definition of access index..................................................................................D-1
Table E-1 Engineering parameters................................................................................................................... E-1
Table F-1 Shortcut keys ....................................................................................................................................F-1
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

xxvii
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Contents
Contents
About This Document.....................................................................................................................1
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
About This Document
About This Document

Purpose
This document provides guides to get the related versions, intended audience, conventions,
and update history of the GENEX Nastar GSM.
Related Versions
The following table lists the product versions related to this document.
Product Name
Version
GENEX Nastar GSM
V200R005
Intended Audience
This document is intended for:
z
Network planning and optimization engineers
Technical support engineer
Organization
This document consists of twelve chapters and an appendix and is organized as follows.
Chapter
Content
1 Overview
This chapter introduces the basic information about the

GENEX Nastar GSM, which consists of basic functions,
networking topology, software configuration and workflow
of different versions, corresponding product versions, and
application scenarios.
2 Installation of the Nastar

GSM
This chapter describes the installation of the GENEX

Nastar GSM, which consists of the installation and
uninstallation of the GENEX Nastar GSM and the
components.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
About This Document
Chapter
Content
3 GUI
This chapter describes the GENEX Nastar GSM and the

user interface of the tool. The user interface consists of the
Nastar GSM user interface and the Transdata user interface.
4 Using the Transdata
This chapter describes the basic operations of the

Transdata.
5 Common Operations
This chapter describes the commonly performed operations

of the GENEX Nastar GSM.
6 Optimizing the Network
This chapter describes the geographic display of the Nastar

GSM.
7 Network Performance
Alarms
This chapter describes the types, operations, and settings of

the network performance alarms.
8 Generating a Network
Monitoring Report
This chapter describes the functions of monitoring report

and the procedures for generating monitoring reports.
9 Further Locating Network

Problems
This chapter describes the functions of problem locating

and procedures for locating network problems.
10 Predicting Network
Trend
This chapter describes the network expansion analysis,

location area expansion analysis, and radio resource
utilization analysis.
11 FAQ
This chapter provides solutions to the faults that the Nastar

CDMA incurs.
12 Acronyms and
Abbreviations
This chapter lists the acronyms and abbreviations in this

document.
Appendix
The appendix contains the data collection tool, GSM index

definitions, engineering parameters, shortcut keys, and
acronyms and abbreviations.
Conventions
Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Symbol
Description
Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk that, if not avoided,
will result in death or serious injury.
Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk which, if
not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.

Issue 02 (2008-02-22)
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
About This Document
Symbol
Description
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided,
could cause equipment damage, data loss, and performance
degradation, or unexpected results.
Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save time.
Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement
important points of the main text.
General Conventions
Convention
Description
Times New Roman
Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.
Boldface
Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in

boldface. For example, log in as user root.
Italic
Book titles are in italics.
Courier New
Terminal display is in Courier New.
Command Conventions
Convention
Description
Boldface
The keywords of a command line are in boldface.
Italic
Command arguments are in italics.
[]
Items (keywords or arguments) in square brackets [ ] are

optional.
{ x | y | ... }
Alternative items are grouped in braces and separated by

vertical bars. One is selected.
[ x | y | ... ]
Optional alternative items are grouped in square brackets

and separated by vertical bars. One or none is selected.
{ x | y | ... } *
Alternative items are grouped in braces and separated by

vertical bars. A minimum of one or a maximum of all can
be selected.
GUI Conventions
Convention
Description
Boldface
Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, windows, and dialog titles

are in boldface. For example, click OK.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
About This Document
Convention
Description
>
Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"

signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.
Keyboard Operation
Format
Description
Key
Press the key. For example, press Enter and press Tab.
Key 1+Key 2
Press the keys concurrently. For example, pressing

Ctrl+Alt+A means the three keys should be pressed
concurrently.
Key 1, Key 2
Press the keys in turn. For example, pressing Alt, A means

the two keys should be pressed in turn.
Mouse Operation
Action
Description
Click
Select and release the primary mouse button without

moving the pointer.
Double-click
Press the primary mouse button twice continuously and

quickly without moving the pointer.
Drag
Press and hold the primary mouse button and move the
pointer to a certain position.
Update History
Updates between document versions are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document version
contains all updates made to previous versions.
Updates in Issue 01 (2007-12-29)

Initial release.
Updates in Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

Second release

Issue 02 (2008-02-22)
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Contents
Contents
1 Overview......................................................................................................................................1-1
1.1 Introduction to the Nastar GSM ....................................................................................................................1-2
1.1.1 Overview..............................................................................................................................................1-2
1.1.2 Software Structure................................................................................................................................1-2
1.1.3 Networking Mode ................................................................................................................................1-4
1.1.4 Server/Client Mode..............................................................................................................................1-8
1.1.5 Stand-Alone Mode .............................................................................................................................1-10
1.1.6 NE Version .........................................................................................................................................1-12
1.2 Applications of the Nastar GSM .................................................................................................................1-13
1.2.1 Application Scenarios ........................................................................................................................1-13
1.2.2 Application Modes .............................................................................................................................1-13
2 Installation of the Nastar GSM ...............................................................................................2-1

2.1 Introduction to the Installation ......................................................................................................................2-2
2.1.1 Requirements for User .........................................................................................................................2-2
2.1.2 Flow Chart ...........................................................................................................................................2-2
2.2 Preparing the PNS .........................................................................................................................................2-3
2.2.1 Checking the Hardware of the Server ..................................................................................................2-3
2.2.2 Checking the System Environment......................................................................................................2-5
2.3 Installing the Related Software .....................................................................................................................2-9
2.3.1 Installing the SQL Server.....................................................................................................................2-9
2.3.2 Installing the MSDE ..........................................................................................................................2-29
2.3.3 Installing the GENEX Shared Components .......................................................................................2-31
2.3.4 Installing the Nastar GSM..................................................................................................................2-35
2.4 Introduction to the Installation Directory ....................................................................................................2-42
2.5 Uninstalling the Nastar GSM ......................................................................................................................2-44
2.5.1 Flow Chart .........................................................................................................................................2-44
2.5.2 Uninstalling the GENEX Shared Components ..................................................................................2-44
2.5.3 Uninstalling the Nastar GSM.............................................................................................................2-47
2.6 License Management...................................................................................................................................2-50
2.6.1 Installing the Dongle..........................................................................................................................2-50
2.6.2 Updating the License .........................................................................................................................2-50
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Contents
3 GUI................................................................................................................................................3-1
3.1 Nastar GSM GUI...........................................................................................................................................3-2
3.1.1 Introduction to the GUI........................................................................................................................3-2
3.1.2 Menu Bar .............................................................................................................................................3-3
3.1.3 Toolbar ...............................................................................................................................................3-10
3.1.4 Function Window...............................................................................................................................3-13
3.1.5 Property Window ...............................................................................................................................3-19
3.1.6 Site View............................................................................................................................................3-21
3.2 GUI of the Transdata ...................................................................................................................................3-21
3.2.1 Introduction to the GUI of the Transdata ...........................................................................................3-21
3.2.2 Menu Bar ...........................................................................................................................................3-22
3.2.3 Toolbar ...............................................................................................................................................3-26
3.2.4 Project View.......................................................................................................................................3-27
3.2.5 Main View..........................................................................................................................................3-28
3.2.6 Output Window..................................................................................................................................3-28
4 Using the Transdata...................................................................................................................4-1

4.1 Basic Operation.............................................................................................................................................4-2
4.1.1 Starting the SQL Server .......................................................................................................................4-2
4.1.2 Starting the Transdata...........................................................................................................................4-2
4.1.3 Closing the Transdata...........................................................................................................................4-5
4.2 NE Operations...............................................................................................................................................4-6
4.2.1 Creating a Network ..............................................................................................................................4-6
4.2.2 Creating a BSC ....................................................................................................................................4-8
4.2.3 Upgrading a BSC ...............................................................................................................................4-12
4.2.4 Deleting a BSC ..................................................................................................................................4-12
4.2.5 Adding a PCU ....................................................................................................................................4-13
4.2.6 Deleting a PCU ..................................................................................................................................4-15
4.2.7 Deleting a Network ............................................................................................................................4-16
4.2.8 Operator Management........................................................................................................................4-17
4.2.9 Network Swap....................................................................................................................................4-21
4.3 Data Management .......................................................................................................................................4-24
4.3.1 Importing BSC Configuration Data ...................................................................................................4-24
4.3.2 Importing PCU Configuration Data ...................................................................................................4-26
4.3.3 Statically Importing Performance Data..............................................................................................4-28
4.3.4 Dynamically Importing Performance Data ........................................................................................4-32
4.3.5 Deleting History Data ........................................................................................................................4-34
4.4 Task Management .......................................................................................................................................4-36
4.4.1 Initializing a Task...............................................................................................................................4-36
4.4.2 Backing Up a Task .............................................................................................................................4-38
4.4.3 Restoring a Task.................................................................................................................................4-39
5 Common Operations .................................................................................................................5-1
ii

Manual Version 02(2008-02-22)
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Contents
5.1 Project Management......................................................................................................................................5-2

5.1.1 Introduction to the Project Management..............................................................................................5-2
5.1.2 Creating a Project.................................................................................................................................5-3
5.1.3 Opening a Project.................................................................................................................................5-5
5.1.4 Modifying and Deleting a Project ........................................................................................................5-7
5.2 Data Management .........................................................................................................................................5-8
5.2.1 Introduction to Data Management .......................................................................................................5-8
5.2.2 Management of Configuration Data................................................................................................... 5-11
5.2.3 Managing Project Parameters ............................................................................................................5-24
5.2.4 Management of Performance Data.....................................................................................................5-37
5.2.5 Checking Parameters .........................................................................................................................5-43
5.3 User Management .......................................................................................................................................5-50
5.3.1 Management of User Access Rights ..................................................................................................5-50
5.3.2 Management of User Log ..................................................................................................................5-52
5.4 Managing NEs.............................................................................................................................................5-54
5.4.1 Creating a Site....................................................................................................................................5-54
5.4.2 Editing a Site......................................................................................................................................5-57
5.4.3 Moving a Site.....................................................................................................................................5-58
5.4.4 Deleting a Site....................................................................................................................................5-58
5.4.5 Deleting a Cell ...................................................................................................................................5-59
5.4.6 Querying NE Property .......................................................................................................................5-60
5.5 Managing Map ............................................................................................................................................5-61
5.5.1 Overview............................................................................................................................................5-61
5.5.2 Importing a Map ................................................................................................................................5-61
5.5.3 General Operation of a Map...............................................................................................................5-64
5.5.4 Managing Map Layers .......................................................................................................................5-65
5.5.5 Managing the Legend.........................................................................................................................5-66
5.6 Setting the Analysis Conditions ..................................................................................................................5-68
5.6.1 Setting the Time Range ......................................................................................................................5-68
5.6.2 Setting the Save Path .........................................................................................................................5-68
5.6.3 Setting Cell Groups............................................................................................................................5-69
5.6.4 Setting the Common Period ...............................................................................................................5-74
5.6.5 Setting Up the Synchronization Mode ...............................................................................................5-75
5.6.6 Setting BSC Groups...........................................................................................................................5-77
5.7 Processing the Analysis Result....................................................................................................................5-81
5.7.1 Operating the Analysis Table .............................................................................................................5-82
5.7.2 Operating the Analysis Chart .............................................................................................................5-93
6 Optimizing the Network ..........................................................................................................6-1

6.1 Introduction ...................................................................................................................................................6-2
6.2 Geographic Display.......................................................................................................................................6-2
6.2.1 Background..........................................................................................................................................6-2
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

iii
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Contents
6.2.2 Searching a Cell ...................................................................................................................................6-2

6.2.3 Displaying a Location Area or a Site ...................................................................................................6-5
6.2.4 Displaying the Network Optimization Theme ...................................................................................6-12
6.2.5 Displaying a Reference Grid..............................................................................................................6-15
6.2.6 Switching 900/1800 Layer .................................................................................................................6-16
6.2.7 Configuring the Neighbors Switching ...............................................................................................6-18
6.2.8 Displaying Project Parameters on a Map ...........................................................................................6-19
6.2.9 Modifying Display Setting.................................................................................................................6-22
7 Network Performance Alarms .................................................................................................7-1

7.1 Introduction ...................................................................................................................................................7-2
7.2 Types of Performance Alarm.........................................................................................................................7-3
7.2.1 Standard Alarm ....................................................................................................................................7-3
7.2.2 Optional Alarm.....................................................................................................................................7-8
7.2.3 Customizing an Alarm .......................................................................................................................7-17
7.3 Operations About Network Performance Alarms........................................................................................7-17
7.3.1 Starting, Suspending, or Activating Alarm Tasks...............................................................................7-17
7.3.2 Checking Alarm Tasks .......................................................................................................................7-21
7.3.3 Alarm Task Process ............................................................................................................................7-21
7.3.4 Creating an Alarm Task......................................................................................................................7-24
7.3.5 Deleting an Alarm Task......................................................................................................................7-26
7.3.6 Modifying an Alarm Task ..................................................................................................................7-27
7.3.7 Searching for a History Alarm Task ...................................................................................................7-29
7.3.8 Setting Filtering Conditions for Alarms .............................................................................................7-32
7.4 Setting the Performance Alarms..................................................................................................................7-33
8 Generating a Network Monitoring Report ...........................................................................8-1

8.1 Introduction ...................................................................................................................................................8-2
8.2 Daily, Weekly and Monthly Report...............................................................................................................8-2
8.2.1 Background..........................................................................................................................................8-2
8.2.2 Customizing a Report Template...........................................................................................................8-2
8.2.3 Generating a Daily Report .................................................................................................................8-13
8.2.4 Generating a Weekly Report ..............................................................................................................8-20
8.2.5 Generating a Monthly Report ............................................................................................................8-24
8.2.6 Introduction to the Reports ................................................................................................................8-30
8.2.7 Configuring the Daily, Weekly and Monthly Report .........................................................................8-38
8.3 Network Monitoring Report........................................................................................................................8-38
8.3.1 Background........................................................................................................................................8-38
8.3.2 Generating the Network Monitoring Report ......................................................................................8-39
8.3.3 Report Description .............................................................................................................................8-47
8.4 PCU Performance Monitoring Report.........................................................................................................8-49
8.4.1 Background........................................................................................................................................8-49
8.4.2 Generating the PCU Performance Monitoring Report .......................................................................8-50
iv

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Contents

8.5 Swap Comparison Report............................................................................................................................8-57
8.5.1 Background........................................................................................................................................8-57
8.5.2 Generating the Swap Comparison Report..........................................................................................8-57
8.6 Enhanced Traffic Statistics ..........................................................................................................................8-61
8.6.1 Background........................................................................................................................................8-61
8.6.2 Setting the Template of Traffic Statistics ...........................................................................................8-62
8.6.3 Generating the Traffic Statistic Report...............................................................................................8-65
9 Further Locating Network Problems......................................................................................9-1

9.1 Introduction ...................................................................................................................................................9-2
9.2 Analyzing the Configuration .........................................................................................................................9-2
9.2.1 Background..........................................................................................................................................9-2
9.2.2 Analyzing the Frequency Optimization................................................................................................9-3
9.2.3 Planning Neighbors and Configuration Check Report.........................................................................9-9
9.2.4 Configuration Check Report .............................................................................................................. 9-11
9.2.5 Configuration Parameters Comparison Report ..................................................................................9-12
9.2.6 Geographical Display for Configuration Parameters .........................................................................9-14
9.2.7 Using Configuration Parameters to Update Project Parameters.........................................................9-14
9.3 Querying Performance Data........................................................................................................................9-14
9.3.1 Background........................................................................................................................................9-14
9.3.2 Querying Performance Guideline ......................................................................................................9-14
9.3.3 Drawing Query Result .......................................................................................................................9-14
9.3.4 Geographical Performance Guideline ................................................................................................9-14
9.3.5 TopN Sorting for Cells Performance Guide Line...............................................................................9-14
9.4 Analyzing Performance ...............................................................................................................................9-16
9.4.1 Analyzing the KPI Performance.........................................................................................................9-16
9.4.2 Analyzing the Performance of PS KPIs .............................................................................................9-34
9.4.3 Analyzing the Cell Accessibility ........................................................................................................9-36
9.4.4 Analyzing the Retainability Performance ..........................................................................................9-37
9.4.5 Analyzing the Intercell Handover ......................................................................................................9-40
9.4.6 Analyzing the Outgoing Inter-cell Handover .....................................................................................9-41
9.5 Analyzing Frequency...................................................................................................................................9-42
9.5.1 Background........................................................................................................................................9-42
9.5.2 Checking Co-Channel and Adjacent Channel....................................................................................9-42
9.5.3 Checking Co-Channel and Co-BSIC .................................................................................................9-47
9.5.4 Checking Idle ARFCNS.....................................................................................................................9-50
9.5.5 Checking Spectrum Utilization Rate..................................................................................................9-51
9.5.6 Checking Co-HSN and Co-MA .........................................................................................................9-53
9.5.7 Checking Frequency Optimization ....................................................................................................9-54
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Contents
9.5.8 Generating the Frequency Hopping Check Report ............................................................................9-56

9.5.9 Exporting the Frequency Scripts........................................................................................................9-58
9.6 Analyzing Neighbors...................................................................................................................................9-59
9.6.1 Background........................................................................................................................................9-59
9.6.2 Checking Unidirectional Neighbors...................................................................................................9-60
9.6.3 Maintaining Relation of Neighbors....................................................................................................9-62
9.6.4 Importing the Neighbor Relation .......................................................................................................9-66
9.6.5 Importing Neighbor Relation of the Standard Format .......................................................................9-66
9.6.6 Exporting Neighbor Relation .............................................................................................................9-70
9.6.7 Analyzing the Redundant Neighbors .................................................................................................9-73
9.6.8 Exporting Neighbors Adjusting Script ...............................................................................................9-75
9.7 Analyzing the TRX Measurement Performance..........................................................................................9-75
9.7.1 Background........................................................................................................................................9-75
9.7.2 Analyzing the Measurement Report...................................................................................................9-77
9.7.3 Analyzing the TRX Level /Qual./TA/Link Balance ...........................................................................9-81
9.8 Analyzing Antenna & Feeder ......................................................................................................................9-83
9.8.1 Background........................................................................................................................................9-83
9.8.2 Procedures..........................................................................................................................................9-83
9.9 Analyzing Uplink Interference (BSC32) .....................................................................................................9-89
9.9.1 Background........................................................................................................................................9-89
9.9.2 Procedures..........................................................................................................................................9-90
10 Predicting Network Trend ...................................................................................................10-1

10.1 Network Expansion Report .......................................................................................................................10-2
10.1.1 Background ......................................................................................................................................10-2
10.1.2 Procedure .........................................................................................................................................10-3
10.2 Analyzing Report of LAC Capacity ..........................................................................................................10-7
10.2.1 Background ......................................................................................................................................10-7
10.2.2 Generating an LAC Capacity Analysis Report ................................................................................10-8
10.2.3 Introduction to the LAC Capacity Analysis Report .......................................................................10-13
10.3 Analyzing the Radio Resource Utility Ratio ...........................................................................................10-14
10.3.1 Background ....................................................................................................................................10-14
10.3.2 Analyzing the Daily Capability of a Cell .......................................................................................10-14
10.3.3 Analyzing the Extra Busy Cells .....................................................................................................10-16
10.3.4 Analyzing the Extra Idle Cells .......................................................................................................10-18
10.3.5 Analyzing the Cell Traffic in Rush Hours ......................................................................................10-19
11 FAQ ...........................................................................................................................................11-1
11.1 Installing Notice ........................................................................................................................................ 11-2
11.1.1 MSDE is Recommended in the Stand-alone Version ....................................................................... 11-2
11.1.2 Problem Caused by Uninstalling the Earlier-Version Nastar ........................................................... 11-2
11.2 Problems of Running Program .................................................................................................................. 11-3
11.2.1 Problems Caused by Expired License .............................................................................................. 11-3
vi

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Contents
11.2.2 Why Cannot the Program Be Correctly Started After the Installation of the Nastar GSM2.4 Hard
Dongle Version?.......................................................................................................................................... 11-5
11.2.3 Why Cannot the MSDE Be Correctly Installed?.............................................................................. 11-6
11.3 Problems of Importing Data ...................................................................................................................... 11-7
11.3.1 How to Upgrade Performance Statistics Query Task in the Old Database After the Installation of the
Latest Version?............................................................................................................................................ 11-7
11.3.2 How to Use the Nastar GSM Version 2.5 to Analyze the Results Imported by the Old Nastar GSM
Version? ...................................................................................................................................................... 11-7
11.3.3 Why was the BSC32 Configuration Data Imported Incorrectly? ..................................................... 11-8
11.3.4 Importing Performance Data Error .................................................................................................. 11-8
11.3.5 Common Problems in Performance Data Import ............................................................................. 11-9
11.4 Functional Problems................................................................................................................................ 11-10
11.4.1 FAQs Concerning the Comparison, Backup, and Recovery of Project Parameters .......................11-10
11.4.2 Configured Neighbor Relation ....................................................................................................... 11-10
11.4.3 Planned Neighbor Relation ............................................................................................................ 11-11
11.4.4 Meaning of Each CI (Cell Identify) ............................................................................................... 11-11
11.4.5 Selected Cells Lack Relevant Neighbors ....................................................................................... 11-12
11.4.6 Switching Between Network Optimization Operations and Common Operations ........................ 11-13
11.4.7 Why Cannot the Project Parameters Be Exported? ........................................................................ 11-15
11.4.8 Why Cannot a Task Be Running? .................................................................................................. 11-15
11.4.9 Language of Task Tree ................................................................................................................... 11-15
11.4.10 Incorrect Antenna Icons ............................................................................................................... 11-16
11.4.11 Why Cannot the Workspace or Property Window Be Displayed?................................................ 11-16
11.4.12 What do the Begin Time and End Time in the Network Monitoring Report Stand For? ............. 11-16
11.4.13 What do the Statistic Begin Date and Statistic End Date in the Network Monitoring Report Stand
For? ........................................................................................................................................................... 11-16
11.4.14 Description of Data Source for Channel Analysis and Network Optimization Analysis.............. 11-16
11.4.15 What Problems Occur if the Project Parameters Are Inconsistent with Configuration Parameters?
.................................................................................................................................................................. 11-17
11.4.16 Result of RNP Parameter Rationality Check is inconsistent with That of Frequency Optimization
Check ........................................................................................................................................................ 11-17
11.4.17 Description of the Calculation Formula of Non-Original in the Network Monitoring Report..... 11-18
11.4.18 When Using the Shortcut Key, the Displayed Dialog Box Is Not the Related Function Dialog Box,
Why?......................................................................................................................................................... 11-19
11.4.19 How to Adjust Parameters That Makes the View Can Display Antenna as the Zoom Changing?11-20
11.5 Others ...................................................................................................................................................... 11-22
11.5.1 Obtaining the Data from the Earlier-Version.................................................................................. 11-22
11.5.2 From Tab File to MapX File........................................................................................................... 11-28
11.5.3 Implications of the Handover Indicators in the Nastar GSM ......................................................... 11-28
12 Acronyms and Abbreviations..............................................................................................12-1
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

vii
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Figures
Figures
Figure 1-1 Networking mode of the Nastar GSM (collecting data from the M2000) ........................................1-5
Figure 1-2 Networking mode of the Nastar GSM (collecting data from the BAM)...........................................1-7
Figure 1-3 Workflow of the Nastar GSM .........................................................................................................1-10
Figure 2-1 Flow chart of installing the Nastar GSM ..........................................................................................2-2
Figure 2-2 Local Area Connection Status dialog box.........................................................................................2-6
Figure 2-3 Local Area Connection Properties dialog box ..................................................................................2-7
Figure 2-4 Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties dialog box.............................................................................2-8
Figure 2-5 Initial installation interface .............................................................................................................2-10
Figure 2-6 Installation type selection screen .................................................................................................... 2-11
Figure 2-7 Setup progress bar........................................................................................................................... 2-11
Figure 2-8 Welcome dialog box .......................................................................................................................2-12
Figure 2-9 Computer Name dialog box............................................................................................................2-13
Figure 2-10 Installation Selection dialog box...................................................................................................2-14
Figure 2-11 User Information dialog box .........................................................................................................2-15
Figure 2-12 Software License Agreement dialog box ......................................................................................2-16
Figure 2-13 CD-Key dialog box.......................................................................................................................2-17
Figure 2-14 Installation Definition dialog box .................................................................................................2-18
Figure 2-15 Instance Name dialog box.............................................................................................................2-19
Figure 2-16 Setup Type dialog box ..................................................................................................................2-20
Figure 2-17 Select Components dialog box .....................................................................................................2-21
Figure 2-18 Services Accounts dialog box .......................................................................................................2-22
Figure 2-19 Authentication Mode ....................................................................................................................2-23
Figure 2-20 Collation Settings dialog box........................................................................................................2-24
Figure 2-21 Network Libraries dialog box .......................................................................................................2-25
Figure 2-22 Start Copying Files dialog box .....................................................................................................2-26
Figure 2-23 Choose Licensing Mode dialog box .............................................................................................2-27
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

ix
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Figures
Figure 2-24 Standard Edition progress dialog box ...........................................................................................2-28

Figure 2-25 Setup Complete dialog box...........................................................................................................2-29
Figure 2-26 Welcome dialog box .....................................................................................................................2-30
Figure 2-27 Installation progress bar................................................................................................................2-30
Figure 2-29 License Agreement dialog box .....................................................................................................2-32
Figure 2-30 Setup Status progress dialog box ..................................................................................................2-33
Figure 2-31 InstallShield Wizard Complete dialog box ...................................................................................2-34
Figure 2-32 Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for Nastar GSM dialog box ...............................................2-35
Figure 2-33 License Agreement dialog box .....................................................................................................2-36
Figure 2-34 Customer Information dialog box.................................................................................................2-37
Figure 2-35 Setup Type dialog box ..................................................................................................................2-38
Figure 2-36 Choose Destination Location dialog box ......................................................................................2-39
Figure 2-37 Select Program Folder dialog box.................................................................................................2-40
Figure 2-38 Setup Status dialog box.................................................................................................................2-41
Figure 2-39 Maintenance Complete dialog box ...............................................................................................2-42
Figure 2-40 Flow chart of uninstalling the Nastar GSM ..................................................................................2-44
Figure 2-41 Add or Remove Programs dialog box...........................................................................................2-45
Figure 2-43 Confirm Uninstall dialog box .......................................................................................................2-46
Figure 2-44 Uninstall Complete dialog box .....................................................................................................2-47
Figure 2-45 Uninstalling the GENEX GSM dialog box...................................................................................2-48
Figure 2-47 Confirm Uninstall dialog box .......................................................................................................2-49
Figure 2-48 Uninstall Complete dialog box .....................................................................................................2-50
Figure 2-49 Updating license dialog box .........................................................................................................2-51
Figure 3-1 GUI of the Nastar GSM....................................................................................................................3-2
Figure 3-2 Menu bar...........................................................................................................................................3-3
Figure 3-3 Submenus of the Project menu .........................................................................................................3-4
Figure 3-4 Submenus of the Frequency Analysis menu .....................................................................................3-5
Figure 3-5 Submenus of the Neighbors Analysis menu .....................................................................................3-5
Figure 3-6 Submenus of the Analysis Reports menu..........................................................................................3-6
Figure 3-7 Submenus of the Geographic Display menu.....................................................................................3-7

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Figures
Figure 3-8 Submenus of the View menu ............................................................................................................3-7

Figure 3-9 Submenus of the Window menu .......................................................................................................3-9
Figure 3-10 Help menu.......................................................................................................................................3-9
Figure 3-11 Network Management toolbar ......................................................................................................3-10
Figure 3-12 Network Optimization toolbar ...................................................................................................... 3-11
Figure 3-13 Map Tool toolbar ..........................................................................................................................3-12
Figure 3-14 Performance toolbar......................................................................................................................3-12
Figure 3-15 Network Element pane..................................................................................................................3-14
Figure 3-16 Search menu of NE.......................................................................................................................3-15
Figure 3-17 Network Monitor pane..................................................................................................................3-16
Figure 3-18 Network Trend pane .....................................................................................................................3-17
Figure 3-19 Performance Alarm pane ..............................................................................................................3-18
Figure 3-20 Trouble Shooting pane ..................................................................................................................3-19
Figure 3-21 Property window...........................................................................................................................3-20
Figure 3-22 Site View window.........................................................................................................................3-21
Figure 3-23 GUI of the Nastar GSM Transdata................................................................................................3-22
Figure 3-24 Menu bar.......................................................................................................................................3-23
Figure 3-25 File menu ......................................................................................................................................3-23
Figure 3-26 View menu ....................................................................................................................................3-23
Figure 3-27 Tools menu....................................................................................................................................3-24
Figure 3-28 Options dialog box........................................................................................................................3-25
Figure 3-29 Help menu.....................................................................................................................................3-25
Figure 3-30 Toolbar..........................................................................................................................................3-26
Figure 3-31 Project view ..................................................................................................................................3-27
Figure 3-32 Main view .....................................................................................................................................3-28
Figure 3-33 Output window .............................................................................................................................3-28
Figure 4-1 SQL Server Service Manager dialog box..........................................................................................4-2
Figure 4-2 Login dialog box...............................................................................................................................4-3
Figure 4-4 Main interface of the Transdata ........................................................................................................4-5
Figure 4-5 Quit menu .........................................................................................................................................4-6
Figure 4-6 Quit dialog box .................................................................................................................................4-6
Figure 4-7 Network Information dialog box ......................................................................................................4-7
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

xi
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Figures
Figure 4-8 Add BSC\PCU dialog box ................................................................................................................4-9

Figure 4-9 Adding BSC\PCU .............................................................................................................................4-9
Figure 4-10 Creating BSC32 ............................................................................................................................4-10
Figure 4-11 Creating BSC6000 ........................................................................................................................ 4-11
Figure 4-12 Information dialog box ................................................................................................................. 4-11
Figure 4-13 BSC Upgrade dialog box ..............................................................................................................4-12
Figure 4-14 Confirmation dialog box...............................................................................................................4-13
Figure 4-15 Add BSC\PCU dialog box ............................................................................................................4-14
Figure 4-16 Adding PCU dialog box................................................................................................................4-14
Figure 4-17 Success load message ...................................................................................................................4-15
Figure 4-20 Shortcut menu...............................................................................................................................4-16
Figure 4-22 Operator management dialog box.................................................................................................4-17
Figure 4-23 KPI Configuration Setting dialog box ..........................................................................................4-19
Figure 4-24 Open dialog box............................................................................................................................4-20
Figure 4-26 Swap Cell Configuration Setting dialog box ................................................................................4-23
Figure 4-27 Swap success messages ................................................................................................................4-23
Figure 4-28 BSC information...........................................................................................................................4-24
Figure 4-29 Button in the File Path column .....................................................................................................4-24
Figure 4-31 Successful import of configuration data .......................................................................................4-25
Figure 4-32 PCU information dialog box.........................................................................................................4-26
Figure 4-33 The button in file path...................................................................................................................4-26
Figure 4-34 Browse for Folder .........................................................................................................................4-27
Figure 4-35 Successful import of configuration data .......................................................................................4-27
Figure 4-36 Options dialog box........................................................................................................................4-28
Figure 4-37 Tasks Information dialog box .......................................................................................................4-30
Figure 4-38 Check Task Time dialog box.........................................................................................................4-31
Figure 4-39 Import success information...........................................................................................................4-31
Figure 4-40 Created BSC .................................................................................................................................4-32
xii

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Figures
Figure 4-41 Import Task setting dialog box......................................................................................................4-32

Figure 4-42 Import Task setting dialog box......................................................................................................4-33
Figure 4-43 dynamically import setting dialog box .........................................................................................4-34
Figure 4-46 History Data dialog box................................................................................................................4-36
Figure 4-48 Message displayed during task initialization ................................................................................4-37
Figure 4-49 Message of task backup ................................................................................................................4-38
Figure 4-50 Message of task restore.................................................................................................................4-39
Figure 5-2 Project Setting dialog box.................................................................................................................5-4
Figure 5-3 New Project dialog box ....................................................................................................................5-4
Figure 5-4 New project in the Project Setting dialog box ..................................................................................5-5
Figure 5-6 Project menu .....................................................................................................................................5-7
Figure 5-7 Browse for Folder dialog box .........................................................................................................5-14
Figure 5-8 Information dialog box ...................................................................................................................5-14
Figure 5-9 Progress bar ....................................................................................................................................5-15
Figure 5-10 Total Records information dialog box ..........................................................................................5-15
Figure 5-11 Reloading cell information and Huawei neighbor relations wait progress bar .............................5-15
Figure 5-12 Neb Configuration dialog box ......................................................................................................5-16
Figure 5-15 Please choose Siemens configure file dialog box .........................................................................5-18
Figure 5-17 Synchronization Report dialog box ..............................................................................................5-19
Figure 5-18 Output result window ...................................................................................................................5-20
Figure 5-19 Huawei GPRS Cell Parameter pane..............................................................................................5-21
Figure 5-20 Submenu of exporting configuration parameters..........................................................................5-22
Figure 5-21 Configuration parameter table exported in an .xls file..................................................................5-22
Figure 5-22 Output PCU Config. dialog box ...................................................................................................5-23
Figure 5-23 Configuration parameter exported in an .xls file ..........................................................................5-24
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

xiii
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Figures
Figure 5-24 Open dialog box............................................................................................................................5-25

Figure 5-25 Select Table dialog box.................................................................................................................5-25
Figure 5-26 Import Setting dialog box .............................................................................................................5-26
Figure 5-27 Confirming information dialog box ..............................................................................................5-27
Figure 5-28 Successfully importing the project parameter...............................................................................5-27
Figure 5-29 Output dialog box .........................................................................................................................5-29
Figure 5-30 Compare project parameters menu ...............................................................................................5-30
Figure 5-31 Result of comparing project parameters .......................................................................................5-31
Figure 5-32 Project Parameters sheet ...............................................................................................................5-32
Figure 5-33 Neighbor Record sheet..................................................................................................................5-32
Figure 5-34 Autoplan Neighbor Record sheet ..................................................................................................5-33
Figure 5-35 Backup Project Parameter dialog box...........................................................................................5-34
Figure 5-36 Backup Project Parameter dialog box...........................................................................................5-35
Figure 5-37 Information box after you upload the project parameters .............................................................5-36
Figure 5-38 Information box after you download the project parameters ........................................................5-36
Figure 5-39 Data Backup command.................................................................................................................5-38
Figure 5-41 Progress bar ..................................................................................................................................5-39
Figure 5-42 Data backup complete dialog box.................................................................................................5-40
Figure 5-43 Data Restore submenu ..................................................................................................................5-41
Figure 5-45 Progress bar ..................................................................................................................................5-42
Figure 5-46 Data restore complete dialog box .................................................................................................5-42
Figure 5-47 Frequency & Neighbor Config. Para. Check dialog box ..............................................................5-43
Figure 5-49 BSC-RNP Para Setting tab page ...................................................................................................5-45
Figure 5-50 Parameter Rationality Check report in an .xls file ........................................................................5-47
Figure 5-51 Huawei RNP Check Setting..........................................................................................................5-48
Figure 5-52 Report on the check of Huawei configuration parameters in an .xls file ......................................5-49
Figure 5-53 User Management dialog box .......................................................................................................5-51
Figure 5-54 Set User Access Rights dialog box ...............................................................................................5-52
Figure 5-55 User Log dialog box .....................................................................................................................5-53
Figure 5-56 Site Edit dialog box ......................................................................................................................5-55
xiv

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Figures
Figure 5-57 Cell Information tab page .............................................................................................................5-56

Figure 5-58 Site Edit dialog box ......................................................................................................................5-57
Figure 5-59 Dialog box of confirming drag BTS operation .............................................................................5-58
Figure 5-63 Open Raster Image dialog box......................................................................................................5-62
Figure 5-64 Raster Image dialog box ...............................................................................................................5-63
Figure 5-65 Click Image to add a point dialog box ..........................................................................................5-64
Figure 5-66 Site view toolbar ...........................................................................................................................5-64
Figure 5-67 Layer Control dialog box..............................................................................................................5-66
Figure 5-68 Legend window for network optimization analysis ......................................................................5-67
Figure 5-69 Legend window during adjacent channel checking ......................................................................5-67
Figure 5-70 Browse For Folder ........................................................................................................................5-69
Figure 5-71 Cell Group dialog box ..................................................................................................................5-70
Figure 5-72 New Cell Group dialog box ..........................................................................................................5-71
Figure 5-74 Edit Cell Group dialog box...........................................................................................................5-73
Figure 5-76 Common Period Setting dialog box..............................................................................................5-75
Figure 5-77 Data Synchronization Setting dialog box......................................................................................5-76
Figure 5-78 Synchronization Report dialog box ..............................................................................................5-76
Figure 5-79 BSC Group dialog box..................................................................................................................5-77
Figure 5-80 New BSC Group dialog box .........................................................................................................5-78
Figure 5-82 BSC Group Edit dialog box ..........................................................................................................5-80
Figure 5-84 Delete BSC group .........................................................................................................................5-81
Figure 5-85 Quick Draw Setting dialog box ....................................................................................................5-83
Figure 5-86 Quick drawing ..............................................................................................................................5-84
Figure 5-87 Sum of a selected row...................................................................................................................5-86
Figure 5-88 Result sorting ................................................................................................................................5-87
Figure 5-89 Filtering query results ...................................................................................................................5-88
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

xv
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Figures
Figure 5-90 Stretching window ........................................................................................................................5-89

Figure 5-91 New Cell Group on the shortcut menu .........................................................................................5-90
Figure 5-92 Draw Selected Column on Map option.........................................................................................5-91
Figure 5-93 Telephone Statistic Map Color Setting dialog box........................................................................5-92
Figure 5-94 Geographical display of performance data ...................................................................................5-93
Figure 5-95 Quick drawing ..............................................................................................................................5-94
Figure 5-96 Chart analysis menu......................................................................................................................5-96
Figure 5-97 Legend ..........................................................................................................................................5-97
Figure 6-1 Search Cells dialog box ....................................................................................................................6-3
Figure 6-2 searching a cell .................................................................................................................................6-4
Figure 6-3 Location area displaying setting dialog box .....................................................................................6-5
Figure 6-4 Color Setting dialog box ...................................................................................................................6-6
Figure 6-5 LAC displayed on the map ...............................................................................................................6-7
Figure 6-6 Color setting dialog box....................................................................................................................6-8
Figure 6-7 GPRS cells highlighted on the map ..................................................................................................6-9
Figure 6-8 BSC Display Setting dialog box .....................................................................................................6-10
Figure 6-9 Color Setting dialog box .................................................................................................................6-10
Figure 6-10 BSC Coverage highlighted on the map......................................................................................... 6-11
Figure 6-11 All sites displayed on the map.......................................................................................................6-12
Figure 6-12 Display Network Optimization Theme Setting menu ...................................................................6-13
Figure 6-13 Show Theme dialog box ...............................................................................................................6-14
Figure 6-14 Result of the highlighted theme ....................................................................................................6-15
Figure 6-15 Reference grid...............................................................................................................................6-16
Figure 6-16 900 MHz layer ..............................................................................................................................6-17
Figure 6-17 1800 MHz layer ............................................................................................................................6-18
Figure 6-18 Project Parameter Select dialog box .............................................................................................6-19
Figure 6-19 Color Config dialog box ...............................................................................................................6-20
Figure 6-20 Display on the map .......................................................................................................................6-21
Figure 6-21 Show Items Option dialog box .....................................................................................................6-22
Figure 6-22 Option dialog box .........................................................................................................................6-23
Figure 6-23 Result figure with the cell label ....................................................................................................6-24
Figure 6-24 Grid Setting dialog box.................................................................................................................6-25
Figure 6-25 Config data show setting dialog box.............................................................................................6-26
xvi

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Figures

Figure 7-1 Performance Alarm navigation tree ..................................................................................................7-3
Figure 7-2 Modify alarm task.............................................................................................................................7-4
Figure 7-3 Carrier Frequency Disabled Cell Alarm Parameter Setting dialog box ............................................7-5
Figure 7-4 Alarm condition setting.....................................................................................................................7-6
Figure 7-5 Alarm condition setting modified .....................................................................................................7-7
Figure 7-6 Carrier frequency disabled cell alarm parameter setting dialog box.................................................7-8
Figure 7-7 Alarm condition setting dialog box...................................................................................................7-9
Figure 7-8 Alarm condition setting dialog box.................................................................................................7-10
Figure 7-9 Alarm condition setting dialog box................................................................................................. 7-11
Figure 7-10 Alarm of SDCCH Congestion Cell ...............................................................................................7-12
Figure 7-11 Alarm Condition Setting dialog box .............................................................................................7-13
Figure 7-12 Alarm of SDCCH call drop cell ....................................................................................................7-14
Figure 7-13 Alarm of immediate assignment success cell................................................................................7-15
Figure 7-14 Alarm of radio connected cell.......................................................................................................7-16
Figure 7-15 Alarm of successful handover cell ................................................................................................7-17
Figure 7-16 Starting an alarm task ...................................................................................................................7-18
Figure 7-17 Suspending an Alarm Task............................................................................................................7-19
Figure 7-18 Activating an alarm task ...............................................................................................................7-20
Figure 7-19 Performance Alarm navigation tree ..............................................................................................7-21
Figure 7-20 Alarm Operation dialog box .........................................................................................................7-22
Figure 7-21 Filling in detailed information about the alarm task .....................................................................7-23
Figure 7-22 Creating an alarm task ..................................................................................................................7-24
Figure 7-23 Alarm Template navigation tree....................................................................................................7-24
Figure 7-24 Alarm Parameter Setting dialog box .............................................................................................7-25
Figure 7-26 Deleting an alarm task ..................................................................................................................7-27
Figure 7-27 Confirmation dialog box about deleting an alarm task .................................................................7-27
Figure 7-28 Modifying an alarm task ...............................................................................................................7-28
Figure 7-29 Alarm Parameter Setting dialog box .............................................................................................7-28
Figure 7-31 History Alarm Search dialog box..................................................................................................7-30
Figure 7-32 Alarm window ..............................................................................................................................7-31
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

xvii
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Figures
Figure 7-33 Alarm Filtrate Setting Menu .........................................................................................................7-32

Figure 7-34 Alarm KPI Filter Setting dialog box .............................................................................................7-33
Figure 7-35 Notepad.........................................................................................................................................7-34
Figure 8-1 Report customization template dialog box .......................................................................................8-3
Figure 8-2 KPI Dialog box .................................................................................................................................8-4
Figure 8-3 TopN dialog box ...............................................................................................................................8-6
Figure 8-4 Overthreshold dialog box..................................................................................................................8-7
Figure 8-5 New List dialog box..........................................................................................................................8-8
Figure 8-6 CHART dialog box ...........................................................................................................................8-9
Figure 8-7 Worst Cell dialog box ..................................................................................................................... 8-11
Figure 8-8 Daily report command ....................................................................................................................8-13
Figure 8-9 Setting tab page of the Daily Report dialog box.............................................................................8-14
Figure 8-10 Advanced tab page of the daily report dialog box.........................................................................8-16
Figure 8-11 Cell Group dialog box...................................................................................................................8-17
Figure 8-12 New Cell Group dialog box ..........................................................................................................8-18
Figure 8-13 Daily report...................................................................................................................................8-19
Figure 8-14 Weekly report command ...............................................................................................................8-20
Figure 8-15 Setting tab page of the weekly report dialog box..........................................................................8-21
Figure 8-16 Advanced tab page of the Weekly Report dialog box ...................................................................8-22
Figure 8-17 Weekly report................................................................................................................................8-23
Figure 8-18 Monthly report command .............................................................................................................8-25
Figure 8-19 Setting tab of the Monthly Report dialog box...............................................................................8-26
Figure 8-20 Advance tab of the monthly report dialog box..............................................................................8-28
Figure 8-21 Monthly report ..............................................................................................................................8-29
Figure 8-22 KPI sheet in the daily report .........................................................................................................8-30
Figure 8-23 VIC sheet of Daily Report ............................................................................................................8-31
Figure 8-24 KPI sheet of the weekly report .....................................................................................................8-33
Figure 8-25 VIC sheet of weekly report ...........................................................................................................8-35
Figure 8-26 Network Monitoring Report command.........................................................................................8-40
Figure 8-27 Network Monitoring Report dialog box .......................................................................................8-41
Figure 8-28 Network Monitor Report Advanced tab page ..............................................................................8-43
Figure 8-29 Index .............................................................................................................................................8-44
Figure 8-30 Network Monitoring Report .........................................................................................................8-46
xviii

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Figures
Figure 8-31 Analysis Reports menu .................................................................................................................8-50

Figure 8-32 PCU Network Monitoring Report dialog box...............................................................................8-51
Figure 8-33 Engineer report type of the PCU network monitoring report........................................................8-53
Figure 8-34 The PCU network monitoring report of Team leader report type .................................................8-55
Figure 8-35 The PCU network monitoring report of Compare Report type.....................................................8-56
Figure 8-36 Swap Comparison Report .............................................................................................................8-58
Figure 8-37 Swap Compare..............................................................................................................................8-59
Figure 8-38 Swap Comparison Report .............................................................................................................8-60
Figure 8-39 Report Output dialog box .............................................................................................................8-62
Figure 8-40 Saving a template..........................................................................................................................8-64
Figure 8-41 Report output ................................................................................................................................8-66
Figure 8-42 Generating an .xls report...............................................................................................................8-67
Figure 9-1 Auto Frequency Optimization Report dialog box .............................................................................9-4
Figure 9-2 Auto Frequency Optimization Report (No data there)......................................................................9-5
Figure 9-3 Advance Setting tab page of the Auto Frequency Optimization Report dialog box .........................9-6
Figure 9-4 Auto Frequency Optimization Report...............................................................................................9-8
Figure 9-5 Project Parameter Check dialog box...............................................................................................9-10
Figure 9-6 ProjectPara Check Report in an .xls file ......................................................................................... 9-11
Figure 9-7 Configuration parameter comparison report dialog box .................................................................9-12
Figure 9-8 Configure parameter compare report ..............................................................................................9-13
Figure 9-9 TopN Cell Analysis dialog box .......................................................................................................9-15
Figure 9-10 Trouble Shooting item list.............................................................................................................9-17
Figure 9-11 BSC-level KPI Analysis dialog box..............................................................................................9-18
Figure 9-12 Busy Time Modify dialog box ......................................................................................................9-19
Figure 9-13 Objects tab page............................................................................................................................9-20
Figure 9-14 Trouble Shooting tab page ............................................................................................................9-21
Figure 9-15 One Week Trend of Cell's KPI Stat dialog box.............................................................................9-22
Figure 9-16 Time Range tab of the One Week Trend of Cells KPI Stat dialog box ........................................9-23
Figure 9-17 Queried Objects tab page of the One Week Trend of Cells KPI Stat dialog box .........................9-24
Figure 9-18 User-defined Cell Filter dialog box ..............................................................................................9-25
Figure 9-19 Query Filter Condition dialog box................................................................................................9-26
Figure 9-21 TopN Cell Analysis dialog box .....................................................................................................9-28
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

xix
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Figures

Figure 9-23 Cell KPI Trend Chart & Sheet dialog box ....................................................................................9-30
Figure 9-25 Queried Objects tab page..............................................................................................................9-32
Figure 9-26 Extra Bad Cell Analysis dialog box ..............................................................................................9-33
Figure 9-28 Cell Access Analysis dialog box ...................................................................................................9-36
Figure 9-30 SDCCH /TCH Drops Analysis(BSC32) dialog box .....................................................................9-38
Figure 9-32 Inter-cell handover analysis(BSC32) dialog box ..........................................................................9-40
Figure 9-34 Frequency analysis by cell shortcut menu ....................................................................................9-43
Figure 9-35 Co-Channel and Adjacent Channel Check dialog box..................................................................9-43
Figure 9-36 Channel check dialog box.............................................................................................................9-44
Figure 9-37 Frequency analysis by ARFCN shortcut menu .............................................................................9-44
Figure 9-38 Co-Channel and Adjacent Channel Check dialog box..................................................................9-44
Figure 9-39 ARFCN Check dialog box ............................................................................................................9-45
Figure 9-40 Check result of the adjacent channel ............................................................................................9-46
Figure 9-41 Legend window ............................................................................................................................9-47
Figure 9-42 Co-BCCH Co-BSIC Check menu.................................................................................................9-47
Figure 9-43 Search Co-BCCH BSIC Cells dialog box.....................................................................................9-48
Figure 9-44 Co-channel and Co-BSIC cell check dialog box...........................................................................9-49
Figure 9-45 Idle ARFCNS menu......................................................................................................................9-50
Figure 9-46 Idle ARFCN Check dialog box.....................................................................................................9-50
Figure 9-47 Idle ARFCN Query Results dialog box ........................................................................................9-51
Figure 9-48 Spectrum Utilization menu ...........................................................................................................9-51
Figure 9-49 Spectrum Utilization dialog box ...................................................................................................9-52
Figure 9-50 Result dialog box of ARFCN Utilization Check...........................................................................9-52
Figure 9-51 Co-HSN Co-MA Check menu ......................................................................................................9-53
Figure 9-52 Co-HSN Co-MA Check dialog box ..............................................................................................9-53
Figure 9-53 Channel Check dialog box............................................................................................................9-54
Figure 9-54 ARFCN Display dialog box..........................................................................................................9-55
xx

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Figures
Figure 9-55 Frequency Analysis menu.............................................................................................................9-56

Figure 9-56 Hopping report object setting dialog box......................................................................................9-57
Figure 9-57 Frequency hopping check report in .xls format ............................................................................9-58
Figure 9-58 Browse For Folder ........................................................................................................................9-59
Figure 9-59 Check Unidirectional Neighbors menu.........................................................................................9-60
Figure 9-60 Unidirectional neighbor check result ............................................................................................9-61
Figure 9-61 Neighbor Analysis menu...............................................................................................................9-62
Figure 9-62 Neighbors relation effect ..............................................................................................................9-63
Figure 9-63 Add Bidirectional Neighbors ........................................................................................................9-64
Figure 9-64 Import Neighbor File menu ..........................................................................................................9-66
Figure 9-65 Neighbor Analysis menu...............................................................................................................9-67
Figure 9-66 Please choose level adjacent relation file to import dialog box ....................................................9-68
Figure 9-67 Please choose upright adjacent relation file import dialog box ....................................................9-69
Figure 9-68 Export Neighbors menu ................................................................................................................9-70
Figure 9-69 Export Neighbors dialog box........................................................................................................9-70
Figure 9-70 Table of horizontal neighbor relation in .xls format......................................................................9-71
Figure 9-71 Table of vertical neighbor relation in .xls format..........................................................................9-72
Figure 9-72 Clear Config. Neighbors menu .....................................................................................................9-73
Figure 9-73 Confirmation box..........................................................................................................................9-73
Figure 9-74 Redundant Neighborcell Analysis(BSC32) dialog box.................................................................9-74
Figure 9-75 Measurement Report Analysis command .....................................................................................9-77
Figure 9-76 Measurement Report Analysis dialog box ....................................................................................9-78
Figure 9-77 CarrierAnalyReport ......................................................................................................................9-80
Figure 9-78 Full Rate TRX Level-Qual.-TA-Link Balance Analysis(BSC32) dialog box ...............................9-82
Figure 9-79 Antenna & Feeder Analysis dialog box ........................................................................................9-84
Figure 9-80 Analysis Setting menu ..................................................................................................................9-85
Figure 9-81 Setting dialog box .........................................................................................................................9-86
Figure 9-82 Net Element tab page of the Antenna & Feeder Analysis dialog box ...........................................9-87
Figure 9-83 Analysis Parameters tab page of Antenna & Feeder Analysis dialog box.....................................9-88
Figure 9-84 Trouble Shooting menu.................................................................................................................9-90
Figure 9-85 UL Interference Analysis dialog box ............................................................................................9-91
Figure 9-86 Queried Objects tab page of the UL Interference Analysis dialog box.........................................9-92
Figure 9-87 Uplink interference frequency setting dialog box.........................................................................9-93
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

xxi
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Figures
Figure 9-88 There is no data.............................................................................................................................9-93

Figure 10-1 Network Expansion Report command ..........................................................................................10-3
Figure 10-2 Network Expansion Report dialog box.........................................................................................10-4
Figure 10-3 Query Object tab page of the Network Expansion Report dialog box..........................................10-5
Figure 10-4 Network Expansion Report...........................................................................................................10-6
Figure 10-5 Network Expansion Report in OWC mode...................................................................................10-7
Figure 10-6 LAC Capacity Analysis Report command ....................................................................................10-8
Figure 10-7 LAC Capacity Analysis dialog box...............................................................................................10-9
Figure 10-8 Parameters Setting tab page of the LAC Capacity Analysis dialog box ..................................... 10-11
Figure 10-9 LAC Capacity report...................................................................................................................10-13
Figure 10-10 Daily Cell Capability Analysis dialog box................................................................................10-15
Figure 10-11 Extra Busy Cell Analysis dialog box ........................................................................................10-17
Figure 10-12 Extra Idle Cell Analysis dialog box ..........................................................................................10-18
Figure 10-13 Cell Traffic Rush Hour Stat dialog box.....................................................................................10-19
Figure 11-1 License Error dialog box............................................................................................................... 11-3
Figure 11-2 Open dialog box............................................................................................................................ 11-4
Figure 11-3 License information ...................................................................................................................... 11-5
Figure 11-4 Input performance data error......................................................................................................... 11-8
Figure 11-5 Network information dialog box................................................................................................... 11-9
Figure 11-6 Problem hint dialog box.............................................................................................................. 11-10
Figure 11-7 Co-channel and adjacent channel check ..................................................................................... 11-13
Figure 11-8 Amplified map of co-channel and adjacent channel check ......................................................... 11-14
Figure 11-9 Site View..................................................................................................................................... 11-15
Figure 11-10 Show Items Option dialog box.................................................................................................. 11-20
Figure 11-11 Case of a too large displaying area............................................................................................ 11-21
Figure 11-12 Displaying the area range after being corrected........................................................................ 11-22
Figure 11-13 Export Neighbors command ..................................................................................................... 11-23
Figure 11-14 Export Neighbors dialog box .................................................................................................... 11-23
Figure 11-15 Neighbor Analysis menu........................................................................................................... 11-24
Figure 11-16 Please choose level adjacent relation file to import dialog box ................................................ 11-24
Figure 11-17 Please choose upright adjacent relation file to import dialog box............................................. 11-25
Figure 11-18 Output dialog box ..................................................................................................................... 11-26
Figure 11-19 Open dialog box........................................................................................................................ 11-27
xxii

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Figures
Figure 11-20 Select Table dialog box ............................................................................................................. 11-27

Figure 11-21 Import Setup dialog box............................................................................................................ 11-28
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

xxiii
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Tables
Tables
Table 1-1 Data collection methods for different types of NEs............................................................................1-3
Table 1-2 Networking mode of the Nastar GSM (collecting data from the M2000) ..........................................1-6
Table 1-3 Networking mode of the Nastar GSM (collecting data from the BAM).............................................1-8
Table 1-4 Software configuration of each entity of the Nastar GSM..................................................................1-9
Table 1-5 Software configuration of each entity of the Nastar GSM................................................................ 1-11
Table 1-6 Supported NE versions .....................................................................................................................1-12
Table 2-1 Nastar GSM system configuration in server/client version ................................................................2-3
Table 2-2 Configuration of the stand-alone edition ............................................................................................2-4
Table 2-3 Selecting the edition of the SQL Server .............................................................................................2-9
Table 2-4 Operation in the Instance Name dialog box......................................................................................2-19
Table 2-5 Structure of the directory ..................................................................................................................2-43
Table 3-1 Description of the Nastar GSM GUI ..................................................................................................3-3
Table 3-2 Description of the View menu ............................................................................................................3-8
Table 3-3 Description of the Help menu...........................................................................................................3-10
Table 3-4 Description of the Network Management toolbar ............................................................................3-10
Table 3-5 Description of the Network Optimization toolbar ............................................................................3-11
Table 3-6 Description of the Map Tool toolbar.................................................................................................3-12
Table 3-7 Description of the performance toolbar ............................................................................................3-13
Table 3-8 Description of the GUI of the Transdata...........................................................................................3-22
Table 3-9 Description of the View menu ..........................................................................................................3-24
Table 3-10 Description of the Help menu.........................................................................................................3-26
Table 3-11 Icons on the toolbar.........................................................................................................................3-26
Table 4-1 Description of the Login dialog box...................................................................................................4-4
Table 4-2 Elements in the Network Information dialog box...............................................................................4-7
Table 5-1 Data sources........................................................................................................................................5-9
Table 5-2 Import data supported by the Nastar GSM .......................................................................................5-10
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

xxv
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Tables
Table 5-3 Importing configuration parameter mode ......................................................................................... 5-11

Table 5-4 Related configuration parameter requirement ..................................................................................5-12
Table 5-5 Description of the result of comparing project parameters...............................................................5-31
Table 5-6 Description of the elements in the Frequency & Neighbor Config. Para. Check dialog box ...........5-44
Table 5-7 Description of the BSC-RNP parameter setting tab page .................................................................5-45
Table 5-8 Description of the configuration parameter check report .................................................................5-49
Table 5-9 Options on the shortcut menu ...........................................................................................................5-53
Table 5-10 Description of the site view toolbar................................................................................................5-65
Table 5-11 Icons on the toolbar.........................................................................................................................5-94
Table 5-12 Function of each item in the analysis chart.....................................................................................5-96
Table 6-1 Elements in the show theme dialog box ...........................................................................................6-14
Table 7-1 Alarm condition setting symbol..........................................................................................................7-6
Table 7-2 Checking alarm messages.................................................................................................................7-21
Table 7-3 Description of fields .........................................................................................................................7-34
Table 8-1 Functions of the buttons .....................................................................................................................8-5
Table 8-2 Settings and functions.......................................................................................................................8-10
Table 8-3 Description of the Setting tab page...................................................................................................8-14
Table 8-4 Element on the Setting tab page .......................................................................................................8-26
Table 8-5 TopN .................................................................................................................................................8-44
Table 8-6 Sheets in the engineer monitoring report..........................................................................................8-47
Table 8-7 Sheets in the team leader monitoring report .....................................................................................8-48
Table 8-8 Sheets in the comparison monitoring report .....................................................................................8-49
Table 8-9 Description of the Network Monitor Report dialog box...................................................................8-51
Table 8-10 Functions of each sheet in Engineer Report ...................................................................................8-53
Table 8-11 Function of each sheet in Team Leader Report...............................................................................8-55
Table 8-12 Function of each sheet in Compare Report.....................................................................................8-57
Table 8-13 Sheets in the swap comparison report.............................................................................................8-61
Table 8-14 Output setting of the report.............................................................................................................8-63
Table 9-1 Description of configuration analysis .................................................................................................9-2
Table 9-2 Frequency band and range..................................................................................................................9-7
Table 9-3 Description of the Configuration parameter comparison report dialog box .....................................9-12
Table 9-4 Frequencies supported for the Nastar GSM......................................................................................9-42
Table 9-5 Description of the ARFCN Display dialog box ................................................................................9-55
xxvi

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Tables
Table 9-6 Description of Time and Object Setting tab page .............................................................................9-78
Table 9-7 Description of the Antenna & Feeder Analysis dialog box...............................................................9-84
Table 9-8 Description of Analysis Parameters tab page in Antenna & Feeder Analysis dialog box.................9-89
Table 9-9 Description of the Time Range tab page in UL Interference Analysis dialog box............................9-91
Table 10-1 Settings of the Parameter Setting tab page in the Network Expansion Report dialog box .............10-4
Table 10-2 Description of the LAC Capacity Analysis dialog box...................................................................10-9
Table 10-3 Describes the items in the Parameters Setting tab page of the LAC Capacity Analysis dialog box
.........................................................................................................................................................................10-12
Table 11-1 Process procedure ........................................................................................................................... 11-6
Table 11-2 Calculation formula of non-original ............................................................................................. 11-18
Table 11-3 Handover success rate................................................................................................................... 11-29
Table 12-1 Abbreviations..................................................................................................................................12-1
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

xxvii
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
1 Overview
Overview
About This Chapter

The following table lists the contents of this chapter.
Section
Describes
1.1 Introduction to the Nastar GSM
The software architecture, networking mode,

software configuration, workflow, and NE versions
of the Nastar GSM.
1.2 Applications of the Nastar GSM
The applications of the Nastar GSM.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

1-1
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
1 Overview
1.1 Introduction to the Nastar GSM

1.1.1 Overview
Developed independently by Huawei, the GENEX Nastar GSM is an integrated network
optimization tool that can be applied to the GSM BSS 9000/1800 system. Based on the
OMC-R performance data, configuration data, and project parameters, the Nastar GSM
analyzes the GSM BSS network and exports analysis results in the following formats:
z
Chart
Report
Map
The Nastar GSM provides the following functions:

z
Monitoring the network status
Analyzing the network quality
Locating problematic areas
In this way, the Nastar GSM helps to improve the efficiency of network optimization
engineers and satisfy customer's further demands on quality of service (QoS).
The Nastar GSM consists of two versions:
z
Server/ client mode

For details, see section 1.1.4 "Server/Client Mode."
Stand-alone mode
For details, see section 1.1.5 "Stand-Alone Mode."
The physical architecture and the software configuration for the server / client mode and the
stand-alone mode are different.
1.1.2 Software Structure

The Nastar GSM comprises the following modules:
z
Data collection module
Import data module
Client
Data Collection Module

The data collection module provides the following functions:
z
1-2
Supporting manual and automatic collection of the following data:
Configuration data of the BSC32, BSC6000, and packet control unit (PCU)
Performance data
Call history record (CHR) data
Filtering and compressing all types of data
Uploading the data to the performance Nastar server (PNS)

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
1 Overview
You can use different methods to collect data from different NEs.
Table 1-1 describes the data collection methods and the location from which the data is
obtained.
Table 1-1 Data collection methods for different types of NEs
NE
Data Collection
Tool
Installation
Location
Data
Obtaining
Location
Function
BSC6000
Data collection tool
PNS
M2000
Obtaining the configuration

data and performance data of
the BSC6000 from the
specified directory of the
M2000
BSC32
Dynamic
performance data
convert tool
(NAConvert)
BAM
BAM
Extracting the latest

performance data from the
back administration module
(BAM) at regular intervals
Uploading the converted

data to the performance
server through the file
transfer protocol (FTP)
Extracting partial
performance data from the
original performance files
of the BSC32
Generating specified result

files
Time-segment-based
performance data
extract tool
(StatTrans)
BAM
BAM
The size of the BSC32

performance files is
decreased after being
segmented.
PCU
Data collection tool
PNS
BAM
Obtaining the configuration

and performance data of the
PCU from the appointed
directory of the PCU
Data Import Module

The Transdata is a data import module in the Nastar GSM. The Transdata imports the
following data to the SQL Server:
z
Performance data
Base station controller (BSC) configuration data
Packet control unit (PCU) configuration data
The Transdata also provides the following functions:
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

1-3
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
1 Overview
z
Viewing the result of performance registration
Displaying the information about the current database
Backing up current task information
Client
The client supports the analysis of performance data and consists of the following modules:
z
Platform module
Performance monitoring module
Intelligent report module
Basic analysis module
Senior analysis module
Operation decision module
1.1.3 Networking Mode

The Nastar GSM system comprises data collection servers, PNSs, and Nastar clients. The
entities use the TCP/IP protocol to be connected through a local area network (LAN). Based
on the FTP protocol, the following modules transmit files between each other:
z
Nastar collection server and M2000
Nastar collection server and PNS
The Nastar GSM can collect data from the M2000 or the BAM server. Therefore, the
networking mode is categorized into two types.
Collecting Data from the M2000

If the Huawei BSC6000 and Huawei M2000 are used on a network, the data collection server
collects the network optimization data from the M2000 server. Figure 1-1 shows the
networking mode of the Nastar GSM (collecting data from the M2000).
1-4

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
1 Overview
Figure 1-1 Networking mode of the Nastar GSM (collecting data from the M2000)
Client
Collection server
Client
PNS
LAN
Client
M2000
Intranet
BSC
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)
BAM
BSC
BAM
BSC

BAM
1-5
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
1 Overview
Table 1-2 describes the networking mode of the Nastar GSM (collecting data from the
M2000).
Table 1-2 Networking mode of the Nastar GSM (collecting data from the M2000)
Scenario Description
On commercial GSM networks, the M2000 manages all the NEs in the BSC6000. The
network optimization data is stored in the M2000.
Number of Data Collection

Servers
On the BSS network where the M2000 manages all the NEs, the number of collection
servers is the same as the number of the M2000 servers.
If the M2000 is configured in part of the BSS network, the number of collection servers is
the sum of the number of the M2000 servers and the equipment rooms where the BAM is
located.
Placing the Collection Server
Huawei recommends that you place the collection server and PNS in the same equipment
room. In this way, you can configure, manage, and upgrade the collection server
conveniently.
Security Plan of the PNS
The stationary IP address of the collection server can be added to the access list of the
M2000 firewall. Thus, the collection server can collect the optimization data from the
M2000.
The stationary IP address of the collection server can be added to the access list of the
firewall in the PNS. Thus, the collection server can upload the collected optimization data
to the PNS.
If the PNS and the M2000 are located on different network segments, the collection
server should be configured with double network cards. If the PNS and the M2000 are
located on the same network segment, a network card is configured to the collection
server.
The collection server downloads data from the M2000.
The collection server uploads data to the PNS.
The FTP service should be installed and started in the M2000 and PNS.
For the original network optimization data stored in the M2000, you can set the storage
period to 5-10 days.
If the Nastar data collection server and the PNS are not integrated in one physical entity,
you can set the storage period of the original data on network optimization in one BSC to
3-6 months.
If the Nastar data collection server and the PNS are integrated in one physical entity, you
can set the storage period of the original data on network optimization in one BSC to 1-3
months.
The PNS does not store the original network optimization data.
Interconnection Mode
Storing the Network

Optimization Data
Advantage, Disadvantage, and

Limitation
The planning of the networking mode is clear and distinct. The Nastar collection server and
analysis server are placed together. In this way, you can manage them conveniently. You
can obtain the performance data of the BTS through the M2000.
Collecting Data from the BAM

If the Huawei BSC30 or Huawei PCU is used on a network, the data collection server collects
the network optimization data from the BAM server. Figure 1-2 shows the networking mode
of the Nastar GSM (collecting data from the BAM).
1-6

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
1 Overview
Figure 1-2 Networking mode of the Nastar GSM (collecting data from the BAM)
Area A
BSC
BAM
Collection
Collect Server
server
BSC
BAM
Intranet
BSC
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)
BAM
Collection
Collect
Server
server
PNS
LAN
Area B

1-7
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
1 Overview
Table 1-3 describes the networking mode of the Nastar GSM (collecting data from the BAM).
Table 1-3 Networking mode of the Nastar GSM (collecting data from the BAM)
Scenario Description
If the Huawei BSC32 or Huawei PCU is used on a network, the network

optimization data is stored in each BAM.
Number of Configured
Collection Servers
One collection server is required for the equipment room where the BAM
is placed. If multiple BAMs are placed in one equipment room, only one
collection server is required for the equipment room.
Placing the Collection

Server
The collection server and BAM should be placed in the same equipment
room. If they are not placed in the same equipment room, the rooms where
they are placed should be located on the same network segment.
Security Plan of the

Servers
The stationary IP address of the collection server can be added to the

access list of the BAM firewall. Thus, the collection server can collect
the optimization data from the BAM.
The stationary IP address of the collection server can be added to the

access list of the firewall in the PNS. Thus, the collection server can
upload the collected optimization data to the PNS.
If the PNS and the BAM are located on different network segments, the
collection server should be configured with double network cards. If the
PNS and the BAM are located on the same network segment, a network
card is configured to the collection server.
The collection server downloads data from the BAM.
The collection server uploads data to the PNS.
The FTP service should be installed and started in the BAM and PNS.
If the Nastar data collection server and the PNS are not integrated in one
physical entity, you can set the storage period of the original data on
network optimization in one BSC to three months.
If the Nastar data collection server and the PNS are integrated in one
physical entity, you can set the storage period of the original data on
network optimization in one BSC to one month.
The PNS does not store the original network optimization data.
Interconnection Mode
Storing the Network

Optimization Data
1.1.4 Server/Client Mode

The Nastar GSM server/client mode performs different tasks by using the server and client.
z
The server imports data and performs public functions, such as the client and
management of multiple users.
The client analyzes the performance data and generates analysis reports.
The Nastar GSM server and client use different computers or the same computer. When they
use different computers, the two computers are connected through the TCP/IP protocol in
LAN mode or virtual private network (VPN) mode. The server/client mode in the Nastar
GSM comprises the following physical entities:
1-8
Data collection server
Performance local server (PLS) (optional)

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
1 Overview
PNS
Nastar client
Software Configuration
Table 1-4 lists the functions of the software installed on each entity in server/client mode.
Table 1-4 Software configuration of each entity of the Nastar GSM
Entity
Function
PLS
(optional)
SQL Server
Storing original CHR data
GENEX Nastar PLS
Collecting and preprocessing the CHR data
FTP server
Uploading the pre-processed CHR data to

the PNS
Data
collection
server
The Nastar data collection

tool
Collecting, compressing, and filtering

the network optimization data
Uploading the data to the FTP server
PNS
FTP server
Network optimization data uploaded by

the Nastar data collection server and PLS
Engineering data uploaded through other

means
Nastar GSM Transdata
Importing data from the FTP server to the

SQL Server
SQL Server
Storing the network optimization data for

the PNS
Allowing the Nastar clients to access the

data
Analyzing the network performance
Generating the analysis reports
Nastar client
Nastar client
Acquiring the following data:
Nastar client
Workflow
Figure 1-3 shows the workflow of the Nastar GSM in server/client mode.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

1-9
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
1 Overview
Figure 1-3 Workflow of the Nastar GSM

Data
storage
Data
collection
M2000/
BAM
Data
collection
server
Original
data
Data
1
collection
tool
FTP
server
Nastar
server
Nastar
client
Data
analysis
3
2
Transdata
SQL
Server
Nastar
A
Access
Nastar
B
Access
Nastar
C
Access
The workflow of the Nastar GSM is as follows:

z
Collecting data
You can collect the network optimization data by using the data collection tool, or the
data collection tool automatically collects the network optimization data. Huawei
recommends automatic collection. The PLS collects and preprocesses the CHR data and
imports the data to the PNS.
Storing data
The data collection tool automatically uploads data to the PNS through the FTP. The
Nastar WCDMA Transdata is a data import tool in the PNS. You can start the Transdata
and it automatically imports periodic data to the SQL Server on the PNS.
Analyzing data
The Nastar client analyzes data. The data is displayed on the PNS or Nastar client.
1.1.5 Stand-Alone Mode

The Nastar GSM can perform the following operations in one workstation in stand-alone
mode:
z
Import data
Analyze monitoring reports
Generate reports
The Nastar GSM comprises the following physical entities in stand-alone mode:
1-10

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
1 Overview
PLS (optional)
Nastar stand-alone server (Mini-server)
Comparing with the server/client mode, the stand-alone mode integrates the PNS and Nastar
client. The Nastar server, however, is capable of analyzing the data of only one BSC.
Table 1-5 lists the functions of the software installed on each entity in stand-alone mode.
Table 1-5 Software configuration of each entity of the Nastar GSM
Entity
Function
PLS
(optional)
SQL Server
Storing original CHR data
GENEX Nastar PLS
Collecting and pre-processing the CHR data
FTP server
Uploading the pre-processed CHR data to

the PNS
The Nastar data collection

tool or NAConvert
Collecting, compressing, and filtering the

network optimization data
Uploading the data to the FTP server
Data
collection
server
For the versions earlier than the

G3BSC32V300R008C01, the NAConvert is used
to collect data
Nastar
stand-alone
server
FTP server
Acquiring the following data:

z
Network optimization data uploaded by

the Nastar data collecting server and PLS
Engineering data uploaded through other

means
Nastar GSM Transdata
Importing data from the FTP server to the

SQL Server
Microsoft SQL Server

desktop engine (MSDE)
Storing the data imported from the FTP

server
Permitting data access for the Nastar

client
Nastar client
Workflow
The Nastar GSM workflow in stand-alone mode is similar to the workflow in server/client
mode. For details about the workflow, refer to Figure 1-3. In stand-alone mode, the Nastar
GSM is not configured with a Nastar client. The Nastar GSM stand-alone server functions as
the PNS plus the Nastar client.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

1-11
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
1 Overview
The server/client mode and stand-alone mode use the same Nastar GSM installation packet. You can
choose to install the version you need during installing the Nastar GSM. You can differentiate the server
version from the stand-alone version through the dongle authority.
1.1.6 NE Version
Table 1-6 lists the network element (NE) versions supported by the Nastar GSM V200R005.
Table 1-6 Supported NE versions
Supported Object
Product Version
BSC32
G3BSC32V300R002C10
G3BSC32V300R002C11
G3BSC32V300R002C12
G3BSC32V300R002C13
G3BSC32V300R006C01
G3BSC32V300R006C02
G3BSC32V300R007C01
G3BSC32V300R007C02
BSC6000
BSC6000V900R001C01B066
BSC6000V900R001C02B084
BSC6000V900R001C03B104
BSC6000V900R001C04B032
BSC6000V900R001C04B061
BSC6000V900R003C01B032
BSC6000V900R003C01B061
BSC6000V900R003C01B070
PCU
G3PCUV300R005C05
G3PCUV300R008C01
G3PCUV300R008C02
1-12

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
1 Overview
1.2 Applications of the Nastar GSM

1.2.1 Application Scenarios
The Nastar GSM is intended for network O&M engineers and network optimization engineers
from operators. The Nastar GSM is applied to the following scenarios:
z
Routine network monitoring

The Nastar can automatically generate periodical reports on network monitoring. You
can monitor the performance of networks by analyzing the reports.
Analyzing and problem locating

To locate problems or analyze network performance or trend, you can connect the
desktop or portable PCs that are installed with the Nastar GSM client to the PNS.
1.2.2 Application Modes

The application modes of the Nastar GSM are as follows:
z
Local
In this mode, you need not install the SQL Server. You can use the provided network
planning or optimization-related functions. The performance-related functions, however,
cannot be used.
Online
In this mode, you need to install the SQL Server. You can use all the provided
performance-related analysis functions. All traffic statistic data and analysis data is saved
on the local computer.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

1-13
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
2 Installation of the Nastar GSM
Installation of the Nastar GSM
About This Chapter

Section
Describes
2.1 Introduction to the

Installation
The installation requirements for users and the procedures

for installing the GENEX Nastar GSM.
2.2 Preparing the PNS
The preparations for the installation of the Nastar GSM.
2.3 Installing the Related

Software
The installation and the configuration of the Nastar GSM

and related software.
2.4 Introduction to the

Installation Directory
The structure of the installation directory of the Nastar

GSM.
2.5 Uninstalling the Nastar

GSM
The procedures for uninstalling the Nastar GSM.
2.6 License Management
The introduction of license management.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

2-1
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
2.1 Introduction to the Installation

2.1.1 Requirements for User
The installation personnel must familiarize themselves with the basic operations of a personal
computer (PC), such as the operations on the Windows 2000 or Windows XP, and Office
2003.
2.1.2 Flow Chart

Figure 2-1 shows the flow chart of installing the Nastar GSM.
Figure 2-1 Flow chart of installing the Nastar GSM
Installing
SQL Server/MSDE
Installing GENEX
Shared component
Installing Nastar
GSM
Installing
successfully
The SQL Server is installed on the PNS, and the Microsoft SQL-Serve desktop engine (MSDE) is
installed on the stand-alone server of the Nastar GSM.
2-2

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
2.2 Preparing the PNS

2.2.1 Checking the Hardware of the Server
Configuration of the Server/Client Mode
The configuration of the Nastar GSM system is based on the number of cells. In server/client
mode, when the number of cells is fewer than 2,000, or when the number of carriers is fewer
than 5,000, the recommended configuration of the Nastar GSM is listed in Table 2-1. Every
2,000 cells or 5,000 carriers require a PNS.
Table 2-1 Nastar GSM system configuration in server/client version
Configuration
Object
Configuration
Item
Configuration
Hardware
configuration
PC server
CPU: 2 x Xeon 3.2 GHz or faster
Memory: 1 GB
Hard disk: 2 x 146 GB redundant array of

inexpensive disks (RAID1)
PLS
PNS
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)
Operating
system
Windows 2000 Professional / Windows XP

Professional / Windows 2003
Hardware
configuration
PC server
Memory: 4 GB (4 x 1 GB)
Hard disk: 3 x 146 GB (SCSI, RAID 0)
Operating
system
Windows Server 2003 R2 Standard Edition or

Enterprise Edition
Database
Microsoft SQL Server 2005 Standard Edition

or Enterprise Edition
FTP server
Server-U2.0/ISS 5.0 Edition or later
Hardware
configuration
PC server
Memory: 4 GB (4 x 1 GB)
Hard disk: 4 x 146 GB (SCSI, RAID 0)
Operating
system
Windows 2000 Professional
Windows 2003
Database
Microsoft SQL Server 2000 Enterprise Edition

2-3
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Configuration
Object
Configuration
Item
Configuration
Nastar client
Hardware
configuration
PC
CPU: 2.4 GHz
Memory: 512 MB
Hard disk: 40 GB
Monitor VGA: 1024 x 768, 16-bit color or

higher
Port: one parallel port or USB port to connect

the dongle
Operating
system
Windows 2000 Professional / Windows XP

Professional
Office software
Microsoft Office XP or later
The number of users connected to the operating system of the PNS must be the same as the
number of users connected to the database. When the SQL Server is Enterprise Edition, the
operating system must be the Enterprise Edition.
Configuration of the Stand-Alone Edition

Table 2-2 describes the configuration of the Nastar GSM system with stand-alone.
Table 2-2 Configuration of the stand-alone edition
Configuration
Type
Configuration
Item
Configuration Requirement
Recommended
configuration
Hardware
configuration
CPU: Pentium IV 2 GHz or faster
Memory: 512 MB
Hard disk: 40 GB
Monitor: VGA, 1024 x 768, 16-bit colors or above
Port: at least one parallel port or USB port to

connect the dongle
Windows NT4.0 or higher
Windows XP Professional
Windows 2003
Operating
system
2-4
Database
MSDE
Office software
Microsoft Office XP/Microsoft Office 2003

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Configuration
Type
Configuration
Item
Configuration Requirement
Minimum
configuration
Hardware
configuration
CPU: Pentium III 800 MHz
Memory: 256 MB
Hard disk: 10 GB spare disk space
Display: VGA; 1024x768, 16-bit colors or higher
Port: at least one parallel port or USB port to

connect the dongle
Windows NT4.0 or higher
Windows XP Professional
Windows 2003
Operating
system
Database
MSDE
Office Software
Microsoft Office XP/Microsoft Office 2003
2.2.2 Checking the System Environment

Checking the System Configuration
The Excel component of the Office 2003 must be installed on the PNS or client. Before
installing the Nastar GSM, check whether the Microsoft Office 2003, especially the Microsoft
Excel, is installed on the client. If the Microsoft Office 2003 is not installed on the client,
install the Microsoft Office 2003 before you install the Nastar GSM.
Checking Network Environment

Before installing the Nastar GSM, you need to check the network environment and set the IP
address of the client based on the network segments provided by the operator.
If the network segment and IP address are not available, contact the O&M personnel of the
operator. Ensure that the IP address to be specified is unique on the network segments.
Otherwise, an IP conflict occurs.
To check network environment, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose start > Settings > Control Panel.
Step 2 Double-click Network Connections.
Step 3 Double-click Local Area Connection.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

2-5
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
The Local Area Connection Status dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-2.
Figure 2-2 Local Area Connection Status dialog box
2-6

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Step 4 Click Properties.

The Local Area Connection Properties dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-3.
Figure 2-3 Local Area Connection Properties dialog box
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

2-7
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Step 5 On the General tab page, select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP), and then click Properties.
The Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-4.
Figure 2-4 Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties dialog box
Step 6 Enter an IP address.

The input IP address and the IP addresses of the BSC and the BAM must belong to the same
network segment.
Step 7 Click OK.
----End
2-8

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
2.3 Installing the Related Software

2.3.1 Installing the SQL Server
Installing Description
You can choose to install the SQL Server or install only the MSDE. The MSDE is
recommended for the stand-alone version. If multiple users share the network at the same time,
the SQL Server is recommended.
This document takes the installation of the Microsoft SQL Server 2000 Standard Edition as an
example. This section introduces the installation of the SQL Server. For details, refer to the
online help of the Microsoft SQL Server 2000.
Preparations
Before installing the SQL Server, you need to perform the following operations:
z
Select an installation edition

At present, the database of the PNS is SQL Server 2000 and Microsoft SQL Server 2000
Service Pack 4. The installation edition depends on the operating system.
Table 2-3 lists the operating systems and corresponding SQL Server editions.
Table 2-3 Selecting the edition of the SQL Server

Operating System
SQL Server Edition
Windows XP
SQL Server Personal Edition
Windows 2000
SQL Server Standard Edition
Log in to the system as the user who has administrative rights to the system
Ensure that all services related to the SQL Server and open database connectivity
(ODBC) are closed.
Ensure that the event examiner and register table examiner, that is, regedit.exe or
regedt32.exe, are closed.
Ensure sure that the Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.0 or a later version is installed.
Procedures
To install the SQL Server, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Insert the installation CD of the Microsoft SQL Server 2000 Standard Edition.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

2-9
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
If the installation packet is autorun, the initial installation interface is displayed, as shown in
Figure 2-5. If the installation packet is not autorun, run the installation file.
Figure 2-5 Initial installation interface
2-10

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Step 2 Click SQL Server 2000 Components.

The Installation type selection window is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-6.
Figure 2-6 Installation type selection screen
Step 3 Click Install Database Server.

The Setup progress bar is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-7.
Figure 2-7 Setup progress bar
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

2-11
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
After the InstallShield Wizard is prepared, the Welcome dialog box is displayed, as shown
in Figure 2-8.
Figure 2-8 Welcome dialog box
2-12

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Step 4 Click Next.

The Computer Name dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-9.
Figure 2-9 Computer Name dialog box
Step 5 Based on actual requirements, perform the following settings in the Computer Name dialog
box:
z
Local Computer
Local Computer is selected by default. The name of the local computer is shown in the
text box. Select Local Computer if you plan to install the SQL Server on a local
computer.
Remote Computer
Select Remote Computer for remote installation. Type a computer name, or click
Browse to select a remote computer.
Virtual Server
The Virtual Server is selected when a cluster is detected.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

2-13
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Step 6 Click Next.

The Installation Selection dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-10.
Figure 2-10 Installation Selection dialog box
2-14

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Step 7 In the Installation Selection dialog box, select Create a new instance of the SQL Server,
or install Client Tools, and then click Next.
The User Information dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-11.
Figure 2-11 User Information dialog box
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

2-15
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Step 8 Type the name and company name, and then click Next.
The Software License Agreement dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-12.
Figure 2-12 Software License Agreement dialog box
2-16

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Step 9 Click Yes.

The CD-Key dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-13.
Figure 2-13 CD-Key dialog box
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

2-17
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Step 10 Enter the correct CD key, and then click Next.

The Installation Definition dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-14.
Figure 2-14 Installation Definition dialog box
2-18

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Step 11 Select Server and Client Tools, and then click Next.
The Instance Name dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-15.
Figure 2-15 Instance Name dialog box
Step 12 In the Instance Name dialog box, set the item based on Table 2-4.
Table 2-4 Operation in the Instance Name dialog box
If
You can infer that
Operation
You select
Default
you can install the

default instance or name
an instance.
To install the default instance, select

Default, and then click Next.
To name an instance, clear the Default

checkbox. Type a new name in
Instance name, and then click Next.
the default instance

already exists, and you
can name only the
instance.
Enter a new instance name in the

Instance name field, and then click Next.
You do not select

Default
The Setup Type dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-16.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

2-19
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Figure 2-16 Setup Type dialog box
Step 13 Perform the following operations in the Setup Type dialog box:
2-20
1.
Select Typical, Minimum or Custom.
2.
In the Destination Folder area, click Browse, and then set the target path of Program
Files and Data Files to C:\Program Files\Microsoft SQL Server.
3.
Click Next.

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
The Select Components dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-17.

Figure 2-17 Select Components dialog box
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

2-21
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Step 14 Click Next.

To ensure normal operation of the system, the default configuration is recommended.
Figure 2-18 shows the Services Accounts dialog box.
Figure 2-18 Services Accounts dialog box
Step 15 Set the SQL Server services accounts in the Service Accounts dialog box.
z
If you select Use the same account for each service. Auto start SQL Server Service,
you can log in to the server and client as the same user account.
If you select Customize the setting for each service, you need to set different login
account for the server and client.
You can select Use the Local System account or Use a Domain User account in the Service
Setting area, which is used to bind the SQL Server. Selecting Use the Local System account
is recommended.
Step 16 Click Next.
2-22

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
The Authentication Mode dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-19.

Figure 2-19 Authentication Mode
Step 17 You can select Windows Authentication Mode or Mixed Mode (Windows Authentication
and SQL Server Authentication) in the Authentication Mode dialog box.
z
If you select Windows Authentication Mode, the user name and password of Windows
is required when the client logs in to the server. You can set the users and passwords in
Control Panel of Windows.
If you select Mixed Mode (Windows Authentication and SQL Server

Authentication), you can use the user name and password of the Windows, and the user
name and password set for SQL Server, for example, administrator sa.
The Mixed Mode (Windows Authentication and SQL Server Authentication) is

recommended.
Step 18 Click Next.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

2-23
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
The Collation Settings dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-20.

Figure 2-20 Collation Settings dialog box
Step 19 Select Collation designator, and then select Chinese_PRC from the drop-down list. Under
Sort order, use the default value.
If an English edition is installed, select LATIN1-GENERAL from the drop-down list.
2-24

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Step 20 Click Next.

The Network Libraries dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-21.
Figure 2-21 Network Libraries dialog box
Step 21 Select Name Pipes and TCP/IP Sockets. Set Name Pipes to \\.\pipe\sql\query and set Port
number in TCP/IP Sockets to 1433.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

2-25
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Step 22 Click Next.

The Start Copying Files dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-22.
Figure 2-22 Start Copying Files dialog box
2-26

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Step 23 Ensure that all information is set correctly, and then click Next.
The Choose Licensing Mode dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-23.
Figure 2-23 Choose Licensing Mode dialog box
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

2-27
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Step 24 In the Choose Licensing Mode dialog box, click Per Seat for, and then enter the
corresponding number of devices. Click Continue.
The installation progress dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-24.
Figure 2-24 Standard Edition progress dialog box
2-28

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
After the setup is complete, the Setup Complete dialog box is displayed, as shown in
Figure 2-25.
Figure 2-25 Setup Complete dialog box
Step 25 Click Finish, and then restart the computer.

----End
The installation program of the SQL Server is case insensitive.
2.3.2 Installing the MSDE

To install the MSDE, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Double-click setup.exe.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

2-29
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
The Welcome dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-26.

Step 2 Click Next.

The system starts to install the MSDE, as shown in Figure 2-27.
Figure 2-27 Installation progress bar
Step 3 After the installation is complete, click Finish.

----End
2-30

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
The setup.ini configuration file in the installation directory of the MSDE has an option, that is,
INSTANCENAME. The option refers to the name of an instance and the default value is GENEX.
When reinstalling the MSDE, you can choose not to uninstall the existing MSDE instance. In this case,
you must specify a different instance name, that is, you need to add an SQL application instance. If you
plan to use the existing MSDE instance name, you need to uninstall the service program related to the
instance name.
The MSDE does not delete the instance file in the path of the Microsoft SQL Server. For example, the
MSSQL$GENEX folder in the path C:\Program Files\Microsoft SQL Server is not deleted. You need to
delete the instance file before you reinstall the Nastar. Thus, uninstalling the MSDE is not
recommended.
2.3.3 Installing the GENEX Shared Components

To install the GENEX Shared components, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Open the GENEX Shared. Double-click setup.exe.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

2-31
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Step 2 Click Next.

The License Agreement dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-29.
Figure 2-29 License Agreement dialog box
2-32

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Step 3 Click Yes.

The Setup Status progress dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-30.
Figure 2-30 Setup Status progress dialog box
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

2-33
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
After the installation is complete, the InstallShield Wizard Complete dialog box is displayed,
as shown in Figure 2-31.
Figure 2-31 InstallShield Wizard Complete dialog box
Step 4 Click Finish, and then restart the computer.

----End
2-34

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
2.3.4 Installing the Nastar GSM

To install the Nastar GSM, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Double-click setup.exe in the Nastar GSM installation packet.
The Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for Nastar GSM dialog box is displayed, as
shown in Figure 2-32.
Figure 2-32 Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for Nastar GSM dialog box
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

2-35
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Step 2 Click Next.

The License Agreement dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-33.
Figure 2-33 License Agreement dialog box
2-36

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Step 3 Select I accept the terms of the license agreement, and then click Next.
The Customer Information dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-34.
Figure 2-34 Customer Information dialog box
Step 4 Type the user information in the User Name and Company Name fields.
Step 5 Select the associated options according to your requirements.
z
If you allow anyone to use this software, select Anyone who uses this computer (all
users).
If only you can use this software, select Only for me.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

2-37
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Step 6 Click Next.

The Setup Type dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-35.
Figure 2-35 Setup Type dialog box
Step 7 Choose the setup type in the Setup Type dialog box:
z
Stand-alone Edition
If Stand-alone Edition is selected, the MSDE is required.
Server Edition
If Server Edition is selected, the MSDE is optional.
Step 8 Click Next.
2-38

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
The Choose Destination Location dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-36.
Figure 2-36 Choose Destination Location dialog box
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)
If the network environment is not available, or you can install only the MSDE to save the system
resources, installing the stand-alone edition is recommended.
If a stable network is available, installing the server edition and the SQL Server is recommended.
The SQL Server provides you with better performance services.

2-39
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Step 9 Specify an installation path, and then click Next.

The Select Program Folder dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-37.
Figure 2-37 Select Program Folder dialog box
2-40

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Step 10 Click Next.

The Setup Status dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-38.
Figure 2-38 Setup Status dialog box
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

2-41
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
After the installation is complete, the Maintenance Complete dialog box is displayed, as
Figure 2-39 Maintenance Complete dialog box
Step 11 Click Finish.

----End
If the Microsoft Office, GENEX Shared components, and the MSDE are not installed on a computer, the
system prompts you to install them. The Excel component is mandatory.
When upgrading the system, you need not install the GENEX Shared and MSDE again.
2.4 Introduction to the Installation Directory

A complete installation directory includes the Nastar GSM, GENEX Shared common
installation packet, and the MSDE.
2-42

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Table 2-5 describes the structure of the installation directory.

Table 2-5 Structure of the directory
Directory
Nastar
GSM
Description
bin
Antenna
Antenna file
Autorun
Autorun file
Database
Access database file
CHS
Chinese directory of the task template
Eng
English directory of the task template
License
User authorization file
NEBDLL
Import and export file of neighbor scripts
Project
Storing the project template file
Template
Storing the report template file
Tool
StatTrans
Data incising tool
Transdata
Chs
Chinese script directory
Eng
English script directory
LICENSE
User authentication file
GENEX Shared
GENEX Shared components
MSDE2000
Microsoft desktop engine
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

2-43
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
2.5 Uninstalling the Nastar GSM

2.5.1 Flow Chart
Figure 2-40 shows the flow chart of uninstalling the Nastar GSM.
Figure 2-40 Flow chart of uninstalling the Nastar GSM
2.5.2 Uninstalling the GENEX Shared Components

To uninstall the GENEX Shared component, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Open the Control Panel, and then double-click Add or Remove Programs.
2-44

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
The Add or Remove Programs dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-41.
Figure 2-41 Add or Remove Programs dialog box
Step 2 Select Shared, and then click Change or Remove.

Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

2-45
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Step 3 Select Remove in the Welcome dialog box.

Step 4 Click Next.
The Confirm Uninstall dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-43.
Figure 2-43 Confirm Uninstall dialog box
Step 5 Click OK.

After the shared component is uninstalled, the Uninstall Complete dialog box is displayed, as
2-46

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Figure 2-44 Uninstall Complete dialog box

----End
2.5.3 Uninstalling the Nastar GSM

To Uninstall the GENEX GSM, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Open Control Panel, and then double-click Add or Remove Programs.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

2-47
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
The Add or Remove Programs dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-45.
Figure 2-45 Uninstalling the GENEX GSM dialog box
2-48

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Step 2 Select GENEX Nastar GSM, and then click Remove.

Step 3 Select Remove, and then click Next.

The Confirm Uninstall dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-47.
Figure 2-47 Confirm Uninstall dialog box
Step 4 Click OK.

After the GENEX Nastar GSM is uninstalled, the Uninstall Complete dialog box is displayed,
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

2-49
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Figure 2-48 Uninstall Complete dialog box

----End
2.6 License Management

2.6.1 Installing the Dongle
When the Nastar GSM is installed completely, you need to install the dongle.
To install the dongle, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Insert the attached dongle drive into the CD-ROM, and then install the dongle drive.
Step 2 Insert the dongle into the parallel port.
----End
2.6.2 Updating the License

To update the license, perform the following steps:
2-50

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Step 1 Choose Help > Update License from the menu bar of the Nastar GSM graphical user
interface (GUI).
The Open dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-49.
Figure 2-49 Updating license dialog box
Step 2 Select a valid license file from the dialog box.

Step 3 Click Open.
----End
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

2-51
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
3 GUI
GUI
About This Chapter

Section
Describes
3.1 Nastar GSM GUI
The introduction to the GUI of the GENEX Nastar GSM.
3.2 GUI of the Transdata
The introduction to the GUI of the GENEX Nastar

Transdata.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

3-1
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
3 GUI
3.1 Nastar GSM GUI

3.1.1 Introduction to the GUI
Choose start > All Programs > GENEX Nastar > Nastar GSM. The GENEX Nastar GSM
GUI is displayed. The main interface consists of the title bar, menu bar, toolbar, workspace
window, display window, attribute window, and status bar.
Figure 3-1 shows the GUI of the Nastar GSM.
Figure 3-1 GUI of the Nastar GSM
3-2

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
3 GUI
Table 3-1 describes each item in Nastar GSM GUI.

Table 3-1 Description of the Nastar GSM GUI
Item
Description
Title bar
Workspace window
Menu bar
Toolbar
Display window
Property window
Status bar
3.1.2 Menu Bar

As shown in Figure 3-2, the menu bar comprises Project, Frequency Analysis, Neighbors
Analysis, Analysis Reports, Geographic Display, View, Window, and Help.
Figure 3-2 Menu bar
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

3-3
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
3 GUI
Project Menu
Figure 3-3 shows the submenus of the Project menu.
Figure 3-3 Submenus of the Project menu
3-4

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
3 GUI
Frequency Analysis Menu

Figure 3-4 shows the submenus of the Frequency Analysis menu.
Figure 3-4 Submenus of the Frequency Analysis menu
Neighbors Analysis Menu

Figure 3-5shows the submenus of the Neighbor Analysis menu.
Figure 3-5 Submenus of the Neighbors Analysis menu
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

3-5
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
3 GUI
Analysis Reports Menu

Figure 3-6 shows the submenus of the Analysis Reports menu.
Figure 3-6 Submenus of the Analysis Reports menu
3-6

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
3 GUI
Geographic Display Menu

Figure 3-7 shows the submenus of the Geographic Display menu.
Figure 3-7 Submenus of the Geographic Display menu
View Menu
Figure 3-8 shows the submenus of the View menu.
Figure 3-8 Submenus of the View menu
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

3-7
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
3 GUI
Table 3-2 describes the submenus of the View menu.

Table 3-2 Description of the View menu
Submenu
Description
Toolbar
Displaying or hiding toolbar

If the menu is selected, the toolbar is in the display status and
is under the system menu.
Status bar
Displaying or hiding status bar

The status bar is on the bottom of the main window.
Style
Selecting the window style
Display Legend Window
Displaying or hiding legend window

The legend window lies on the top of the property window.
Display Site Navigator
Displaying or hiding site navigator

The site navigator lies between the workspace and display
window.
Display Workspace
Displaying or hiding workspace

The workspace displays the function structure of the system.
Display Property Sheet
Displaying or hiding property sheet

The property sheet lies on the right of the main window.
3-8

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
3 GUI
Window Menu
The Window menu manages the arrangement style of submenus.
Figure 3-9 shows the submenus of the Window menu.
Figure 3-9 Submenus of the Window menu
Help Menu
The Help menu helps you to learn the software knowledge.
Figure 3-10 shows the submenus of the Help menu.
Figure 3-10 Help menu
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

3-9
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
3 GUI
Table 3-3 describes the submenus of the Help menu.

Table 3-3 Description of the Help menu
Submenu
Description
Content Index
Helping you to search for instructions on how to use the software
About Nastar
Displaying the information such as the version of the GENEX Nastar
Whats New
Displaying the latest information about the GENEX Nastar and after
sales service
ESN Code
Displaying the electronic serial number (ESN) of the license
License Info
Displaying the information about license
Update License
Updating the license when the license is expired
3.1.3 Toolbar
The toolbar comprises the network management, network optimization, map tool and
performance toolbar.
Network Management Toolbar

Figure 3-11 shows the Network Management toolbar.
Figure 3-11 Network Management toolbar
Table 3-4 describes each item of the Network Management toolbar.

Table 3-4 Description of the Network Management toolbar
Item
Description
Creating a site
Editing a site
Deleting a site
Deleting a cell
Searching for a cell
3-10

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
3 GUI
Network Optimization Toolbar

Figure 3-12 shows the Network Optimization toolbar.
Figure 3-12 Network Optimization toolbar
Table 3-5 describes each item in the Network Optimization toolbar.

Table 3-5 Description of the Network Optimization toolbar
Item
Description
Co-frequency and Co-BSIC check
Idle frequency check
Spectrum utilization check
Co-channel and adjacent channel by ARFCN
Co-channel and adjacent channel by cells
Displaying neighbors
Adding bidirectional neighbors
Adding uni-directional neighbors
Deleting neighbors
Saving neighbors
Displaying or hiding reference grid
Switching to layer 900 MHZ or 1800 MHz
Switching to planning neighbors or configuration neighbors
Displaying or hiding workspace
Displaying or hiding navigators
Displaying or hiding the property sheet
Displaying or hiding the legend window
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

3-11
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
3 GUI
Map Tool Toolbar

Figure 3-13 shows the Map Tool toolbar.
Figure 3-13 Map Tool toolbar
Table 3-6 describes each item in the Map Tool toolbar.

Table 3-6 Description of the Map Tool toolbar
Item
Description
Moving the map
Justifying the map
Selecting the map
Selecting the map with rectangle
Selecting the map with radius
Zooming in on the map
Zooming out on the map
Default scale map
Measuring the distance
Measuring the angle
Setting the layer
Scanning the map
Performance Toolbar
Figure 3-14 shows the Performance toolbar.
Figure 3-14 Performance toolbar
3-12

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
3 GUI
Table 3-7 describes each item in the Performance toolbar.

Table 3-7 Description of the performance toolbar
Item
Description
Displaying the network optimization theme
Displaying the performance theme
3.1.4 Function Window

The function window is in the right pane of the main window. The function window
comprises Network Element, Network Monitor, Network Trend, Performance Alarm,
and Trouble Shooting.
NE
Figure 3-15 shows the Network Element pane.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

3-13
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
3 GUI
Figure 3-15 Network Element pane
NEs are displayed in navigation tree format. You can perform the following operations:
z
3-14
Click an NE, the main window shows a map related to the NE in different colors.

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
z
3 GUI
Click
and select searching type (By Cell Name or By Cell CI). Enter a cell name or
cell identity (CI) in the right text box. Figure 3-16 shows the related cell in the NE list.
Figure 3-16 Search menu of NE
Routine Network Monitoring
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

3-15
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
3 GUI
Figure 3-17 shows the navigation tree of routine network monitoring.

Figure 3-17 Network Monitor pane
3-16

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
3 GUI
For details about the network monitoring, see Chapter 8 "Generating a Network Monitoring
Report."
Network Trend
Figure 3-18 shows the functions in the Network Trend pane.
Figure 3-18 Network Trend pane
For details about the network trend, see Chapter 10 "Predicting Network Trend."
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

3-17
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
3 GUI
Performance Alarm
Figure 3-19 shows the functions of performance alarm.
Figure 3-19 Performance Alarm pane
For details about the performance alarm, see Chapter 7 "Network Performance Alarms."
3-18

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
3 GUI
Trouble Shooting
Figure 3-20 shows the functions in the Trouble Shooting pane.
Figure 3-20 Trouble Shooting pane
For details about the trouble shooting, see Chapter 1 "Further Locating Network Problems."
3.1.5 Property Window

The Property window is in the right pane of the main window. It displays the map legend and
NE property.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

3-19
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
3 GUI
Figure 3-21 shows the Property window.

Figure 3-21 Property window
3-20

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
3 GUI
3.1.6 Site View

Figure 3-22 shows the Site View window.
Figure 3-22 Site View window
3.2 GUI of the Transdata

3.2.1 Introduction to the GUI of the Transdata
The GUI of the Transdata consists of the title bar, menu bar, toolbar, project view, main view,
output view, and status bar.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

3-21
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
3 GUI
Figure 3-23 shows the GUI of the Nastar GSM Transdata.

Figure 3-23 GUI of the Nastar GSM Transdata
Table 3-8 describes the GUI of the Transdata.

Table 3-8 Description of the GUI of the Transdata
Item
Description
Title bar
Menu bar
Toolbar
Main view
Output view
Status bar
Site view
3.2.2 Menu Bar

The menu bar comprises File, View, Tools, and Help.
Figure 3-24 shows the menu bar.
3-22

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
3 GUI
Figure 3-24 Menu bar
File Menu
Figure 3-25 shows the File menu.
Figure 3-25 File menu
Choose File > Exit to quit the system.
View Menu
Figure 3-26 shows the View menu.
Figure 3-26 View menu
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

3-23
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
3 GUI
Table 3-9 describes each item in the View menu of the Transdata.
Table 3-9 Description of the View menu
Item
Description
Toolbar
The toolbar is displayed when Toolbar is selected.
Status bar
The status bar is displayed when Status Bar is selected.
Workspace bar
The workspace bar is displayed when Workspace Bar is

selected.
Open ASSERT file
The open ASSRT file is displayed when Open ASSRT File is

selected.
Open log file
The open log file is displayed when Open Log File is displayed.
Refresh
Refresh the interface display
Tools Menu
Figure 3-27 shows the Tools menu.
Figure 3-27 Tools menu
3-24

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
3 GUI
Choose Tools > Options. The Options dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-28.
Figure 3-28 Options dialog box
For details about the Options dialog box, see section 4.3.3 "Statically Importing Performance
Data."
Help Menu
Figure 3-29 shows Help menu.
Figure 3-29 Help menu
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

3-25
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
3 GUI
Table 3-10 describes each item in Help menu.

Table 3-10 Description of the Help menu
Item
Description
About Transdata
Shows the information about the Transdata.
ESN code
Shows the ESN code.
Update license
Updates the system license.
Show license info
Shows the information of license.
3.2.3 Toolbar
Figure 3-30 shows the toolbar.
Figure 3-30 Toolbar
Table 3-11 describes the icons on the toolbar.

Table 3-11 Icons on the toolbar
Icon
Description
Click the icon to enable the ADD NET function.
Click the icon to enable the DELETE NET function.
Click the icon to enable the ADD BSC or PCU function.
Click the icon to enable the DELETE BSC function.
Click the icon to enable the DELETE PCU function.
Click the icon to enable the option function.
3-26

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
3 GUI
3.2.4 Project View

Figure 3-31 shows the project view.
Figure 3-31 Project view
The information about the network, BSC, and PCU is displayed in the project view. You can
operate the data directly.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

3-27
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
3 GUI
3.2.5 Main View

Figure 3-32 shows the main view.
Figure 3-32 Main view
The main view displays the task information, such as the task name, BSC name, file path, data
type, task type, operator, and version. You can use the shortcut menu to operate the task.
3.2.6 Output Window

Figure 3-33 shows the output window.
Figure 3-33 Output window
The output window displays the procedures for the task operation. You can double-click the
window and choose Put in File to save the message in the output window or choose Clear
msg list to clear the message.
3-28

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Using the Transdata
About This Chapter

Section
Describes
4.1 Basic Operation
The basic operations of the Transdata.
4.2 NE Operations
The creating, deletion, and upgrade of NEs.
4.3 Data Management
The data management of the Transdata.
4.4 Task Management
The initialization, backup, and deletion of a task.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

4-1
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
4.1 Basic Operation

4.1.1 Starting the SQL Server
Before using the Nastar GSM, you need to install the SQL Server 2000 on the server. The
server can be either a PC or a laptop. Run Service Manager and start SQL Server Service
Manager. Huawei recommends that you select Auto-start service when OS starts in the
SQL Server Service Manager dialog box. When you use the MSDE, you need to perform
the previous operations.
z
If SQL Server Service Manager starts successfully, the database status prompt icon is
displayed in the Windows task bar. If the SQL Server runs as a system service in the
background, check the status of the SQL Server Service Manager.
If you do not use the service manager, the database status prompt icon is not displayed in
task bar.
Figure 4-1 shows the SQL Server Service Manager dialog box.
Figure 4-1 SQL Server Service Manager dialog box
The system does not support the import from a remote server. The remote import indicates
that the Transdata accesses the SQL Server through the LAN and imports data.
4.1.2 Starting the Transdata

Background
The Transdata is a data import module, which imports the performance data, BSC
configuration data, and PCU configuration data to the SQL Server database. The Transdata
also provides the following functions:
4-2
Enabling you to view the result of the registration of performance data
Displaying the information about the current database

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
z
Backing up the current task information
Procedures
To start the Transdata, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Run the Transdata.exe file.
The Login dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-2.
Figure 4-2 Login dialog box
Step 2 Click Option.

The following dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-3
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

4-3
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Table 4-1 describes the elements in the Login dialog box.

Table 4-1 Description of the Login dialog box
Element
Description
User Name
Enter the user name.
Password
Enter the password.
Remember Password
If you select Remember Password, you need not enter the

user name and password next time.
Nastar Server
Enter the name of the SQL Server and service name.

The server name can be the computer name or the IP address
of the server.
Delete&Clear Database
In stand-alone mode, you can enter the server name

as .\service name.
In server mode, you need to enter the server name or IP

address\service name.
If you select Delete&Clear Database, the Transdata

deletes all the local networks and BSCs.
If you plan to create a new Nastar database, select

Delete&Clear Database.
Unexpected errors may happen if you select Delete&Clear

Database. Huawei recommends that you should not select
this option.
Step 3 Enter the user name and password in the User Name and Password fields respectively.
Step 4 Enter the server name and service name in the Nastar Server field.
Step 5 Click OK.
4-4

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
The main interface of the Transdata is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-4.

Figure 4-4 Main interface of the Transdata
----End
4.1.3 Closing the Transdata

Background
If the Transdata is started, it can be minimized to the task bar. You can close the Transdata
through
on the task bar.
Procedures
To close the Transdata, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Use either of the following methods to close the Transdata:
z
Choose File > Exit to close the Transdata.
Click
in the upper right window to minimize the Transdata, and then right-click
on the task bar.
The Quit menu is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-5.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

4-5
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Figure 4-5 Quit menu
Choose Quit from the shortcut menu.

The Quit dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-6.
Figure 4-6 Quit dialog box
Step 2 Enter the password in the Password field.

Step 3 Click OK.
----End
4.2 NE Operations
4.2.1 Creating a Network
To create a network, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Click
on the toolbar. You can also right-click GSM, and then choose Add Net from the
shortcut menu.
The Network Information dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-7.
4-6

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Figure 4-7 Network Information dialog box
Table 4-2 describes the elements in the Network Information dialog box.
Table 4-2 Elements in the Network Information dialog box
Element
Description
Radio Network Info
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)
Network Name
Enter the name of the local network.
Operator
Select an operator from the Operator

drop-down list.

4-7
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Element
Description
Database Info
Database Name
Enter a name for the database.
Driver
Select a disk letter from the Driver

drop-down list.
Driver indicates the disk letter on the server
instead of on the local disk.
If you do not select the disk letter, the
default driver is used.
Before importing database to the database server,
check whether the selected disk on the server is
available.
File Name
Radio Network Description
The File Name field shows the directory of

the database after Database Name and
Driver are set.
Enter the description of the local network.
The Radio Network Description field is
optional.
Step 2 Type the name of the local network in the Network Name field.
Step 3 Select an operator from the Operator drop-down list.
Step 4 Click OK.
A local network is created.
----End
4.2.2 Creating a BSC

To create a BSC, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Click
on the toolbar. You can also right-click a network, and then choose Add
BSC\PCU from the shortcut menu.
4-8

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
The Add BSC\PCU dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-8.

Figure 4-8 Add BSC\PCU dialog box
Step 2 Click Add.

The following dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-9.
Figure 4-9 Adding BSC\PCU
You can create a maximum of four BSCs simultaneously.

You can click Add to create one BSC, and then click Delete to delete a BSC.
Step 3 Enter a BSC name in the BSC\PCU Name field.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

4-9
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Step 4 Select the vendor HUAWEIBSC32 from the Vendor drop-down list.
If you select HUAWEIBSC6000 from the Vendor drop-down list, the BSC6000 is created.
Step 5 Select a BSC32 or BSC6000 version from the BSC\PCU Version drop-down list.
Step 6 Click OK to create a BSC32 or BSC6000.
The created result is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-10.
Figure 4-10 Creating BSC32
----End
4-10

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Figure 4-11 shows the result of creating the BSC6000.

Figure 4-11 Creating BSC6000
If the BSC name is not unique, an information dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure
4-12.
Figure 4-12 Information dialog box
Step 7 Click OK, and then add a BSC again.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

4-11
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
As shown in Figure 4-10 and Figure 4-11, you can infer that vendor BSC6000 has three more tasks than
BSC32, that is, the Import CHR Data, Delete CHR Data, and Import BSC6000 Freq Data.
4.2.3 Upgrading a BSC

This task is performed to upgrade the BSC32, BSC6000, and other vendor versions. The PCU
is excluded.
To upgrade a BSC, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose a BSC in the project view window.
Step 2 Right-click the BSC and choose Upgrade BSC from the displayed shortcut menu.
The BSC Upgrade dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-13.
Figure 4-13 BSC Upgrade dialog box
Step 3 Select the version to be upgraded from the Version drop-down list. Click OK to upgrade the
BSC version selected.
----End
4.2.4 Deleting a BSC

To delete a BSC, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Right-click a BSC, and then choose Delete BSC from the shortcut menu. You can also choose
a BSC, and then click
on the toolbar.
The confirmation dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-14.
4-12

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Figure 4-14 Confirmation dialog box
Step 2 Click OK.

The selected BSC is deleted.
----End
4.2.5 Adding a PCU

To add a PCU in the network, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Select a network from the project view window. Right-click the selected network, and then
choose Add BSC\PCU from the shortcut menu. You can also click
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

on the toolbar.
4-13
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
The Add BSC\PCU dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-15.

Figure 4-15 Add BSC\PCU dialog box
Step 2 Click Add.

The following dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-16.
Figure 4-16 Adding PCU dialog box
Step 3 Enter the PCU name in the BSC\PCU Name field.

Step 4 Select HuaweiPCU from the Vendor drop-down list.
Step 5 Select a PCU version from the BSC\PCU Version drop-down list.
Step 6 Click OK.
4-14

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
z
If the PCU is created successfully, the system displays the following message, as shown
in Figure 4-17.
Figure 4-17 Success load message
If the PCU name already exists, a dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-18.
Step 7 Click OK, and then create a PCU again.

----End
4.2.6 Deleting a PCU

The procedures for deleting a PCU are similar to the procedures for deleting a BSC. To delete
a PCU, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Right-click a PCU from the NE list in the project view window, and then choose Delete PCU.
You can also choose a PCU, and then click
on the toolbar.

Step 2 Click OK.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

4-15
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
The PCU is deleted.

----End
4.2.7 Deleting a Network

To delete a network, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Right-click an NE from the NE list in project view window, and then choose Del Net from the
shortcut menu
Figure 4-20 shows the shortcut menu.
Figure 4-20 Shortcut menu
You can also choose the NET, and then click
on the toolbar.
4-16

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Step 2 Click OK.

----End
4.2.8 Operator Management

Procedures
To mange the operator, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Right-click the NET, and then choose Operator Management from the shortcut menu.
The Operator management dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-22.
Figure 4-22 Operator management dialog box
Step 2 In the Operator management dialog box, you can perform the following operations:
z
Click New to create an operator.
Choose an operator from the Operator List area, and then click Modify to modify the
attributes of the operator.
Choose an operator from the Operator List area, and then click Delete to delete the
operator.
Step 3 Click OK after you complete the editing.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

4-17
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
The operator management is applied in only the BSC32.
----End
Modifying the Attributes of an Operator

To modify the attributes of an operator, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose an operator, and then click Modify.
4-18

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
The KPI Configuration Setting dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-23.
Figure 4-23 KPI Configuration Setting dialog box
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

4-19
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Step 2 Click Input File.

Figure 4-24 Open dialog box
Step 3 Choose the .sql file to be modified, and then click Open.
Step 4 Select files to be modified from the Mes Index drop-down list and Stat Index drop-down list,
Step 5 Select Modify in the Modification Panel area and enter the modified message in displayed
text box. Click Apply.
Step 6 Click OK.
----End
4-20

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
You can click Output File to back up the information about the existed operators. The information is
exported as the Create_Operator_BSC_Procedure.sql and Create_Operator_Cell_Procedure.sql
files.
If you export the information about operator HUAWEI, the generated files are
Create_HUAWEI_BSC_Procedure.sql and Create_HUAWEI_Cell_Procedure.sql.
4.2.9 Network Swap

The network swap refers to swapping the network of other vendors for the network of
Huawei.
If you need to analyze the information about other vendors, the information must be swapped
in the Transdata and then is analyzed in the Nastar GSM.
To swap cells for Huawei networks, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Create an OTHERS network. For details about how to create an OTHERS network, see
section 4.2.1 "Creating a Network." Select OTHERS from the Operator drop-down list.
Step 2 Create an OTHERS node. For details about how to create an OTHERS node, see section
4.2.2 "Creating a BSC." Select OTHERS from the Vendor drop-down list.
Step 3 Choose the data to be swapped under the OTHERS node, and then import the swap data. For
details, see section 4.3.1 "Importing BSC Configuration Data."
Step 4 Right-click the NE to be swapped for Huawei in the project view window, and then choose
Swap Cells to This Net from the shortcut menu, as shown in Figure 4-25.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

4-21
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
4-22

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
The Swap Cell Configuration Setting dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-26.
Figure 4-26 Swap Cell Configuration Setting dialog box
Step 5 Set parameters in the Swap Cell Configuration setting dialog box.
1.
Select an operator to be swapped;
2.
Set Cell map file path, Data Setting, and the Cell Match Option;
3.
Click OK to complete the data swap from others to Huawei vendor. Figure 4-27 shows
the swap success messages.
You can click CellMap Setting to set the cell map.
Figure 4-27 Swap success messages
----End
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

4-23
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
When the system prompts you to match fields, you need to match the fields during network swap. For
other fields, choose ItemIndex.
to select a data mapping table. The table refers to the .xls file that
In the Cell map file field, click
comprises the following information:
z
Cell name of the original vendor
The mapping between the LAC and CI of the original vendor and the LAC and CI of Huawei
The BSC to which the cell belongs after the network swap
4.3 Data Management

4.3.1 Importing BSC Configuration Data
To import BSC configuration data, perform the following steps:
Step 1 In the project view window, select a BSC whose vendor is not the BSC6000.
The BSC information on the main view window is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-28.
Figure 4-28 BSC information
Step 2 Click the cell in the File Path column of the Import OMC Data row.
The
button is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-29.
Figure 4-29 Button in the File Path column
4-24

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Step 3 Click
The Browse for Folder dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-30.
Figure 4-30 Browse for Folder dialog box
Step 4 Select the directory of BSC configuration data.

The default file of the BSC32 is .\dbf. Click OK.
Step 5 Right-click Import OMC Data and choose Update OMC Data from the shortcut menu.
After the data is imported, the following information is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-31.
Figure 4-31 Successful import of configuration data
----End
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

4-25
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
The procedures for importing the configuration data of vendor BSC6000 are similar.
4.3.2 Importing PCU Configuration Data

To import PCU configuration data, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Select a PCU from the project view window.
The PCU information is displayed in the main view window, as shown in Figure 4-32.
Figure 4-32 PCU information dialog box
Step 2 Click the cell in the File Path column of the Import OMC Data row.
The
button is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-33.
Figure 4-33 The button in file path
4-26

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Step 3 Click
, as shown in Figure 4-33.
Figure 4-34 Browse for Folder
Step 4 Specify a directory for storing the PCU configuration data from the Browse for Folder dialog
box, and then click OK.
The default file is ".\config.ini".
Step 5 Right-click Import OMC Data and choose Import PCU Config Data from the shortcut
menu.
After the data is imported, the following information is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-35.
Figure 4-35 Successful import of configuration data
----End
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

4-27
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
You should import the configuration data first. The Import Stat Data function is invalid after
you create the PCU. Only when configuration data is imported, you can import the
performance data.
4.3.3 Statically Importing Performance Data

Configuring the Import of Performance Data
To configure the import of performance data, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Tools > Options.
The Options dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-36.
Figure 4-36 Options dialog box
Step 2 Type the data cycle time in the Data Cycle field.
4-28

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
The unit of time is minute.

Step 3 If you plan to choose the data that has the same data cycle, select Only Import the same
cycle data.
Step 4 If you plan to validate the correctness of performance data, select Verify Statistic Data.
Step 5 If you plan to set the system to import all data by default and hide the time configuration
dialog box, select Do not show time config and import all data.
Step 6 If you plan to set the system to delete statistic data automatically, select Delete statistic data
automatically.
Step 7 In the Delete all special items days ago field, enter the value that indicates the interval you
plan to delete special items.
Step 8 Set the system to enter the days to delete all common items once in the Delete all common
item days ago field.
Step 9 In the Delete CHR Records day(s) ago field, enter the value that indicates how many days
you plan to delete CHR records.
Step 10 If you plan to backup OMC configuration data, select Backup OMC As Plan.
Step 11 If the Backup OMC As Plan is selected, you need to set the backup cycle and the begin time.
Step 12 Click OK.
----End
You need to back up and delete the runtime file timely.

You need to back up the log files under the Bin\Runtime directory. A large amount of log files occupies
too much disk space and decrease system performance.
For the data segmented by the Stattrans or dynamically segmented by the NAConvert, do not select
Verify Statistic Data. Otherwise, the data cannot be imported.
Statically Importing Performance Data

To statically import the performance data, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Select a BSC from the project view window shown in Figure 4-28.
Step 2 Click the cell in the File Path column of the Import Stat Data row.
The
Step 3 Click
button is displayed.
.
The Browse for Folder dialog box displayed.

Step 4 Choose the path of BSC performance data from the Browse for Folder dialog box, and then
click OK.
Step 5 Right-click Import Stat Data task on the main view window.
The Statistic Data Import menu item is added to the shortcut menu.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

4-29
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Step 6 Choose Statistic Data Import from the shortcut menu.

The Tasks Information dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-37.
Figure 4-37 Tasks Information dialog box
Step 7 Select Import all statistic data.

Step 8 Set the start date and end date in the Input Date field.
Step 9 Set the start time and end time in the Input Time field.
4-30

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Step 10 Click Check Task Time.

The Check Task Time dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-38.
Figure 4-38 Check Task Time dialog box
Step 11 All the tasks are selected by default. Choose the analysis task to be imported, and then click
OK to return to the Tasks Information dialog box.
Step 12 Click OK.
After the performance data is successfully imported, the following information is displayed,
Figure 4-39 Import success information
----End
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

4-31
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Before you statically import the statistic traffic data, ensure that the configuration data of the current
BSC is imported, and the path for the traffic statistic data in the statistic data directory is valid.
4.3.4 Dynamically Importing Performance Data

To import performance data dynamically, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Select a created BSC from the main view window, as shown in Figure 4-40.
Figure 4-40 Created BSC
Step 2 Choose the performance data file to be dynamically imported from the File Path in the main
view window. For details, see section 4.3.1 "Importing BSC Configuration Data."
Step 3 Right-click a task name in the main view window, and then choose Task Setting from the
shortcut menu.
The Import Task setting dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-41.
Figure 4-41 Import Task setting dialog box
Step 4 Click Advance.

The Import Task Setting dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-42.
4-32

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Figure 4-42 Import Task setting dialog box
Step 5 Select Execute As Plan, and the dynamically import setting is finished, as shown in Figure
4-43.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

4-33
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Figure 4-43 dynamically import setting dialog box
The system imports data dynamically and the Transdata checks whether new performance
data is uploaded in real time. If the new data is uploaded, import the data.
----End
Trigger Time in Execute As Plan refers to the interval during which the dynamical import is performed.
You can choose Every 5 Minutes, Every 30 Minutes, Every 1 Hour, or Every 24 Hours.
Enable Time refers to the first time to perform the task. If you log in to the Transdata again, the
dynamic trigger time count from the Transdata program starting running time rather than Enable Time.
Do not process refers to that you need not process the imported data, and Delete all data file import
refers to that you can delete the imported data.
4.3.5 Deleting History Data

You can delete the expired data from the current NET to spare more space for the database.
To delete the history data of the NET, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Right-click a NET node from the project view window, and then choose Del History Data
from the shortcut menu, as shown in Figure 4-44.
4-34

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
If no history data exists in the NET, a dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-45
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)
If history data exists in the NET, the History Data dialog box is displayed, as shown in
Figure 4-46.

4-35
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Figure 4-46 History Data dialog box
Step 2 Specify the date range within which the data to be deleted, or select Delete all history data to
delete all history data.
Step 3 If you plan to compress the database, select Shrink Database.
Step 4 If you plan to delete the common data, select Delete common data.
Step 5 Click OK.
----End
4.4 Task Management

4.4.1 Initializing a Task
If you initialize a task, all the created and modified tasks are missing and the task is restored
to the initial status. This task is performed only when a large amount of tasks are damaged or
unavailable on a local network.
To initialize a task, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Right-click a NET node in the project view window.
4-36

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
A shortcut menu is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-47.

Step 2 Choose Initial Task from the shortcut menu to initialize a task.
A message is displayed, indicating the initialization of a task, as shown in Figure 4-48.
Figure 4-48 Message displayed during task initialization
----End
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

4-37
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
4.4.2 Backing Up a Task

Backing up a task refers to backing up the information about new or modified tasks to
\TASK\Backup\. After you modify a great number of tasks or perform important operations,
Huawei recommends that the server administrator or the user backs up the task periodically.
To back up a task, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Right-click a NET from the project view window.
A shortcut menu displayed, as shown in Figure 4-47.
Step 2 Choose Backup Task from the shortcut menu to back up the task.
A message is displayed, prompting you that backing up a task successfully, as shown in
Figure 4-49.
Figure 4-49 Message of task backup
----End
4-38

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
The system saves only the information about the latest backup task. If you want to save the task backup
information in different periods, you can manually copy the following BCP files to \TASK\Backup\.
z
CommItemDict.bcp
CommStatTableDesc.bcp
CommTableIdx.bcp
Erl_b.bcp
GRAPHDRAWITEMS.bcp
PRESQL.bcp
ITEDRAWITEMS.bcp
TASKEXP.bcp
TASKS.bcp
If you want to restore the task information, you can copy the nine files that you have saved to the
directory \TASK\Backup\.
4.4.3 Restoring a Task

You can restore a task by using the relevant backup file. If you plan to restore the task, copy
the nine backup files to the \TASK\Backup\ directory.
To restore a task, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Right-click a NET from the project view window.
A shortcut menu is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-47.
Step 2 Choose Resume Task from the shortcut menu to restore a task.
A message is displayed, prompting you to restore the task.
Figure 4-50 shows the displayed message.
Figure 4-50 Message of task restore
----End
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

4-39
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
5 Common Operations
Common Operations
About This Chapter

Section
Describes
5.1 Project Management
The management of projects, including the creation of a

project, starting of a project, modification of a project,
deletion of a project, and switch of a project.
5.2 Data Management
The management of data, including the configuration

parameter import, management of project parameter,
management of performance data, and parameter check.
5.3 User Management
The management of user access rights and user log.
5.4 Managing NEs
How to manage NEs, including the creation, edition,

movement, and deletion of a site.
5.5 Managing Map
How to import or operate a map and how to manage a

map or map layers.
5.6 Setting the Analysis

Conditions
The common settings.
5.7 Processing the Analysis

Result
How to process analysis results.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

5-1
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
5 Common Operations
5.1 Project Management

5.1.1 Introduction to the Project Management
The Nastar GSM client organizes and manages data through a project. The project defines the
available operations and operable data, and saves the operation results.
The common operations are as follows:
z
A project has two connection modes, namely, online mode and local mode. The Nastar
GSM provides different functions for different connection modes. For details, see section
1.1.5 "Stand-Alone Mode."
A project defines the overall configurations, which include the connection mode, server
address, local network analysis, start time, end time, and busy time for traffic statistic
analysis. The project also comprises the project information and configuration used to
support network optimization analysis.
A project saves the network analysis results. Each time you open the project, you can
continue the network optimization analysis based on the previous network optimization
analysis.
The SQL Server stores the information about one or multiple local networks, such as traffic
statistic data and configuration data. The online mode project analyzes the associated local
network and a local network on the server and contains several projects. The projects are
independent from each other.
The client program provides the project management function, such as creating, configuring,
and deleting a project.
5-2

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
5 Common Operations
5.1.2 Creating a Project

To create a project, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Start the Nastar GSM client.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

5-3
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
5 Common Operations
Step 2 Click Setting.

The Project Setting dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-2.
Figure 5-2 Project Setting dialog box
The Project list area in the left pane lists all the current available projects. The right panel
shows the configuration of the selected project. You can modify the configuration.
Step 3 Click Add.
The New Project dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-3.
Figure 5-3 New Project dialog box
5-4

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
5 Common Operations
Step 4 Enter a name for the new project, and then click OK.
The new project is displayed in the Project list area, as shown in Figure 5-4.
Figure 5-4 New project in the Project Setting dialog box
Step 5 Set the configuration in the right pane.

z
Select Online or Local from the Mode drop-down list.
Select the server settings.
Select a map file.

You can select Online from the Mode drop-down list and select the data server to analyze traffic
statistics. The import of a map file is optional. To import a map file, click
to select the map file.
Step 6 Click OK.

----End
5.1.3 Opening a Project

If engineers need to analyze the performance data, ensure that the performance data is
available.
Opening a Project for the First Time

To open a new project, perform the following steps:
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

5-5
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
5 Common Operations

Step 2 Select a project from the Project name drop-down list.

Step 3 Type the user name and password in the User and Password fields.
If you select Remember Password, you need not type the user name and password next time.
Step 4 Click OK.

The project is opened and the relevant information is displayed on the main program screen.
----End
The default path of each project on the local host is Nastar folder path\project\project name. You can
copy a local project to the corresponding path, for example, Nastar folder path\project\project name on
another host with the Nastar GSM client.
Switching to Another Project

To switch to another project, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Project > Open Project.
5-6

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
5 Common Operations
Figure 5-6 shows the Project menu.

Figure 5-6 Project menu
Step 2 Select another project from the Project Name drop-down list.
Step 3 Click OK.
----End
5.1.4 Modifying and Deleting a Project

Modifying a Project
To modify a project, perform the following steps:
Step 2 Click Setting
Step 3 Select a project in Project list.
The right pane shows the configurations of the selected project.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

5-7
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
5 Common Operations
Step 4 Set the configuration in the right pane of the new project.
z
Select Online or Local from the Mode drop-down list.

If you select Online Mode, you need to set the server name, the database name, the login
user name, and other configuration.
Set the server settings.

You can type the database name directly, or click
to select the database.
Select a map file.

Importing a map file is optional. To import a map file, click
to select the map file.
Step 5 Click OK.

You can save the configuration.
----End
Deleting a Project
To delete a project, perform the following steps:
Step 2 Click Setting
Step 3 Select a project in Project list.
Step 4 Click Delete.
The project is removed from Project list.
----End
5.2 Data Management

5.2.1 Introduction to Data Management
The Nastar GSM supports the network optimization data, Huawei BSC optimization data, and
Huawei PCU optimization data. The GENEX GSM Transdata supports the task management
of data. For example, the GENEX GSM Transdata allows you to import data, export data, and
delete data. You can also set the task performance time, data path, and data process method.
The GENEX Nastar performs automatic data management.
The following sections describe the data type, data source, general operations, and operation
location in the Nastar GSM.
Data Type
The Nastar GSM supports engineering data, configuration data, and performance data. The
supported data is as follows:
5-8

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
5 Common Operations
Engineering data
BSC32
Configuration data
Performance data
BSC6000
Configuration data
Performance data
CHR data
Uplink frequency point scan log
PCU
Configuration data
Performance data
Data Sources
When importing data, you need to choose proper data sources.
Table 5-1 lists data sources.
Table 5-1 Data sources
Data Type
Data Source
Engineering data
.xls file
Configuration data
BSC32
.dbf file
BSC6000
.dat file
PCU
Config.ini file
BSC32
DATA file
BSC6000
MRF file
PCU
Key performance index (KPI) file
CHR data
BSC6000
.dat file
Uplink frequency
point scan data
BSC6000
.FRQLOG file
Performance data
Common Operations
The common operations include data import and data export.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

5-9
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
5 Common Operations
Table 5-2 describes the import data supported by the Nastar GSM.
Table 5-2 Import data supported by the Nastar GSM
Data
Data Description
Project
parameter
The project parameters supports the details about the BTS, whose key
information is as follows:
Neighbor
information
BTS name
BTS longitude
BTS latitude
Cell name
Location area code (LAC)
Cell identity (CI)
Antenna azimuth
Antenna declination angle
The neighbor information is as follows:
Configuration
data
Digital map
Supporting the horizontal and vertical import of neighbor relations
Supporting the neighboring files of a third vendor
The configuration data includes the configuration parameter for cell and
neighbor relations. You can import BTS configuration parameters of more
than one vendor, which is as follows:
z
Huawei G3BSC32.20100.06.1120A, BSC6000, PCU, and later versions.
Alcatel BSC72 version
Siemens BSS BR60
Ericsson BSS R10
Motorola BSS R6, BSS R7
Supporting the import of the digital map in Mapinfo format

The data is in .tab or .gst format.
Performance
data
Supporting the import of the performance data of the following released

versions:
z
Huawei BSC32
Huawei BSC6000
PCU
The Nastar GSM can export the following types of data:

z
Project parameter
Configuration parameter
Neighboring cells in horizontal and vertical format
Huawei project parameters

The parameters are exported in .xls format.
The Nastar GSM can export the following optimization reports:
5-10

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
5 Common Operations
Daily report
Weekly report
Monthly report
Network monitoring report
Configuration check reports
Measurement report
Comprehensive analysis report

The query result is exported in .xls format.
The results that are displayed in chart are stored in the following formats:
z
TeeChart Pro files: .tee
Enhanced Metafiles: .emf
Metafiles: .wmf
BMP
JPG
GIF
PCX
PDF
PostScript
The Nastar GSM supports the export of the local maintenance terminal (LMT) support script
of the BSC32 or BSC6000. The script is in .txt format.
Operation Location
Different data is configured by different programs.
z
The operation of engineering data, neighbor cell information, and data map performed in
the GENEX Nastar GSM
The operation of configuration data, performance data, CHR data and uplink frequency
data performed in the GENEX Nastar Transdata
5.2.2 Management of Configuration Data

According to the different models of NEs, the import mode of configuration parameter is
different. Table 5-3 describes the import mode of configuration parameters of each NE.
Table 5-3 Importing configuration parameter mode
NEs Model
Importing Configuration Parameter Mode
HUAWEI BSC32
Alcatel
Siemens
Ericsson
Motorola
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)
Imports the configuration parameters in the Nastar GSM

directly.

5-11
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
5 Common Operations
NEs Model
Importing Configuration Parameter Mode
HUAWEI PCU
HUAWEI BSC6000
After the data is imported in the Transdata, the

configuration parameters are imported through the
function of download configuration parameters in the
Nastar GSM.
On a local PC, you can directly import the configuration parameters in the Nastar GSM.
Table 5-4 describes the following requirements:
z
Requirement of configuration parameter data
Requirement of configuration parameter version
Requirement files for configuration parameters
Import procedure
Table 5-4 Related configuration parameter requirement

Configuration Parameter
Description
Requirement of configuration parameter

data
Before importing configuration

parameter, ensure that the project
parameter is imported. The configuration
parameters can be imported provided that
the cell information of the project exists.
Otherwise, all the configuration
parameters fail to be imported.
The LAC and CI of a cell in the

configuration parameters must be the
same as those imported in the project
parameters. Only when the cells in the
configuration data match those in the
opened project, the cell configuration data
can be imported successfully.
G3BSC32V300R002C10
G3BSC32V300R002C11
G3BSC32V300R002C12
G3BSC32V300R002C13
G3BSC32V300R006C01
G3BSC32V300R006C02
G3BSC32V300R007C01
G3BSC32V300R007C02
Alcatel configuration
data
BSC72
Siemens configuration
data
BR6.0
Requirement of
configuration
parameter version
5-12
Huawei configuration
data

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
5 Common Operations
Configuration Parameter
Description
Requirement files
for configuration
parameters
Celldesc.dbf
Symgdatl.dbf
Rccfg.dbf
Cellattr.dbf
Bsccell.dbf
Callctrl.dbf
Cellcfg.dbf
Swctrl.dbf
Nebcell.dbf
Nordata.dbf
Clsdata.dbf
Urgedat.dbf
Pwrctls.dbf
Freechpr.dbf
Btspwrc.dbf
Mspwrc.dbf
Hw2pwrct.dbf
Celcalmp.dbf
Huawei configuration
data
The configuration parameters can also be

imported if one of the previous files does not
exist, but you cannot guarantee the integrality of
the Huawei configuration data.
Alcatel configuration
data
Siemens configuration
data
Cell.csv
rnlPowerControl.csv
HoControl.csv
.asv file
Importing Huawei Configuration Parameters

To import Huawei configuration parameters, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Project > Import Config Parameters > Huawei.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

5-13
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
5 Common Operations
Step 2 Select the directory of Huawei configuration parameters (.dbf), and then click OK to start the
import.
The information dialog box is displayed, as shown Figure 5-8.
You can choose whether to export the Huawei configuration data initial table.
5-14
Click Yes to generate a report.
Click No not to generate a report.

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
5 Common Operations
Step 3 Click Yes to save Huawei configuration data.

The progress bar is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-9.
Figure 5-9 Progress bar
The system automatically saves Huawei configuration parameters and displays the number of
all imported records and the number of updated records.
The total records information dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-10.
Figure 5-10 Total Records information dialog box
Step 4 Click OK.

The reloading cell information is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-11.
Figure 5-11 Reloading cell information and Huawei neighbor relations wait progress bar
The Neb Configuration dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-12.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

5-15
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
5 Common Operations
Figure 5-12 Neb Configuration dialog box
----End
Importing Alcatel Configuration Parameters

To import Alcatel configuration parameters, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Project > Import Config Parameters > Alcatel.
5-16

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
5 Common Operations
Step 2 Select the folder of Alcatel configuration parameters (.csv), and then click OK to start the
import.
The information dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-14.
Click Yes to generate the report.
Click No not to generate the report.
----End
Importing Siemens Configuration Parameters

To import Siemens configuration parameters, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Project > Import Config Parameters > Siemens.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

5-17
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
5 Common Operations
The Choose Siemens configuration file dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-15.
Figure 5-15 Please choose Siemens configure file dialog box
Step 2 Select the directory for Siemens configuration parameters (.ASC), and then click Open to
start the import.
An information dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-16.
Click Yes to generate the report.
Click No not to generate the report.
----End
5-18

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
5 Common Operations
Downloading Configuration Data

The function of downloading configuration data is applied in online mode. When the
configuration parameters are downloaded from the server, the vendor parameters in cell
property are updated and some project parameters are updated.
To download configuration data, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Import the configuration parameter data in Transdata.
Step 2 Download the configuration parameter data in the Nastar GSM to import configuration
parameters.
----End
The configuration data consists of the following project parameters:
z
BSC Name
BISC
Traffic channel (TCH)
FH Mode
HSN
MA
Equ Type
Vendor
TRXs
To download the configuration parameters and update the project parameters, perform the
following steps:
Step 1 Choose Project > Download Config Parameters.
Step 2 Download the configuration parameters from the server.
The Synchronization Report dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-17.
Figure 5-17 Synchronization Report dialog box
Step 3 Click OK.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

5-19
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
5 Common Operations
Step 4 Close the Synchronization Report dialog box. You can also click Output to export the
match result in an .xls file.
The output result is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-18.
Figure 5-18 Output result window
----End
Displaying Configuration Parameters

After the configuration parameters are downloaded successfully, they are displayed on the
Huawei GPRS Cell Parameter tab page in the Property pane.
5-20

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
5 Common Operations
Figure 5-19 shows the Huawei GRPS cell parameter pane.

Figure 5-19 Huawei GPRS Cell Parameter pane
Exporting the Configuration Parameters of Huawei (Alcatel, Siemens)

To export the configuration parameters, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Project > Export Config Parameters.
Step 2 Choose a submenu of Export Config Parameters (Huawei, Alcatel, Siemens or Motorola).
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

5-21
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
5 Common Operations
The Export Configuration Parameters submenu is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-20.

Figure 5-20 Submenu of exporting configuration parameters
Figure 5-21 shows the configuration parameter table.

Figure 5-21 Configuration parameter table exported in an .xls file
----End
5-22

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
5 Common Operations
Exporting Huawei PCU Configuration Parameters

To export Huawei PCU configuration parameters, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Project > Export Config Parameters > Huawei (PCU).
The Output PCU Config dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-22.
Figure 5-22 Output PCU Config. dialog box
Step 2 Select the configuration parameters of the PCU.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

5-23
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
5 Common Operations
Step 3 Click OK.

The configuration parameters exported in an .xls file is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-23.
Figure 5-23 Configuration parameter exported in an .xls file
----End
5.2.3 Managing Project Parameters

This section describes how to manage project parameters in the Nastar GSM.
Importing Project Parameters

To import project parameters, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Project > Import Project Parameters.
5-24

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
5 Common Operations

Step 2 Select the .xls file that contains project parameters, and then click Open.
The Select Table dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-25.
Figure 5-25 Select Table dialog box
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

5-25
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
5 Common Operations
Step 3 Select the project parameter table to be imported, and then click OK.
The Import Setting dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-26.
Figure 5-26 Import Setting dialog box
Step 4 Set the imported data.

The system automatically identifies and matches some fields based on the project parameter
table. For the unmatched or wrongly matched items, click the first column in the dialog box,
and select the associated field from the shortcut menu.
Click OK.
5-26

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
5 Common Operations

Figure 5-27 Confirming information dialog box
Step 5 If the confirm information dialog box lists some unmatched fields, click OK to proceed with
the task. Otherwise, click Cancel to rematch the fields.
Step 6 Click OK.
The project parameters are successfully imported, as shown in Figure 5-28.
Figure 5-28 Successfully importing the project parameter
The previous dialog box displays the number of imported and non-imported records. Click
OK. The .xls file to show the non-imported records and show the wrongly imported field in
red is displayed.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

5-27
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
5 Common Operations
If you want to replace the configuration database in the previous site with the project parameter table
to be imported, ensure that you have selected Clear Database in the dialog box.
When the data setting is imported, the units of longitude and latitude are degree, minute, second, or
decimalization based on the data type of the project parameters.
The description of latitude and longitude is as follows:

Latitude: 0 to 90 degree refers to the northern hemisphere and 90 to 0 degree refers to the
southern hemisphere.
Longitude: 0 to 180 degree refers to the eastern hemisphere and 180 to 0 degree refers to the
western hemisphere.
----End
Exporting Project Parameters

To export the project parameters, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Project > Export Project Parameters.
5-28

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
5 Common Operations
The Output dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-29.

Figure 5-29 Output dialog box
Step 2 In the Output dialog box, select the project parameters to be exported.
Step 3 Click OK to export the project parameters of the current project.
----End
Comparing Project Parameters

To compare the project parameters, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Project > Compare Project Parameters.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

5-29
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
5 Common Operations
The menu of Compare Project Parameters is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-30.

Figure 5-30 Compare project parameters menu
Step 2 Select a submenu of Compare Project Parameters from the shortcut displayed.
5-30
Select Last Closed from the shortcut displayed, which proceeds to compare the project
parameters with the last closed project parameters.
Select Last Imported from the shortcut displayed, which proceeds to compare the
project parameter with the last imported project parameters.

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
5 Common Operations
The result of comparing project parameters in an .xls file is displayed, as shown in Figure
5-31.
Figure 5-31 Result of comparing project parameters
Table 5-5 describes the result of comparing project parameters

Table 5-5 Description of the result of comparing project parameters
Sheet
Description
Project Parameters
The system compares the current project parameters with the last
closed or last imported parameters
Figure 5-32 shows the Project Parameters sheet, consists of the
record of adding, deleting, and modifying the project parameters.
Neighbor Record
The system compares the current configuration neighboring cell

relation with the last closed or the last imported one.
Figure 5-3 shows the Neighbor Record sheet, consists of the
records of adding, deleting, and modifying the configuration
neighboring cell relation.
Autoplan Neighbor
Record
The system compares the current configuration neighboring cell

relation with the last generated planned neighboring cell relation.
Figure 5-34 shows the Autoplan Neighbor sheet, consists of the
records of adding, deleting, and modifying the configuration
neighboring cell relation.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

5-31
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
5 Common Operations
Figure 5-32 Project Parameters sheet
Figure 5-33 Neighbor Record sheet
5-32

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
5 Common Operations
Figure 5-34 Autoplan Neighbor Record sheet
----End
Backing Up Project Parameters

After the latest project parameters are imported, the system backs up the project parameter
table automatically, and backs up the project parameters in the database.
Backing Up Project Parameters-Uploading the Project Parameters

To upload the project parameters, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Project > Backup Project Parameters.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

5-33
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
5 Common Operations
The Backup Project Parameter dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-35 and Figure
5-36.
Figure 5-35 Backup Project Parameter dialog box
5-34

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
5 Common Operations
Figure 5-36 Backup Project Parameter dialog box
Step 2 Select Upload, and select an item to back up.

z
If Upload and to Last Item are selected, the existing backup item is selected
automatically.
Select Upload, and clear to Last Item, and select a backup item.
The backup item named unused refers to the backup that is unused. When you upload
the used backup, the used backup is automatically replaced with the previous backup.
Step 3 Enter a backup name in the Name field and the description for the backup in the Description
field.
The Name field is required and the Description field is optional.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

5-35
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
5 Common Operations
Step 4 Click OK.

An information box telling you that the uploading the project parameters successfully is
displayed, as shown in Figure 5-37.
Figure 5-37 Information box after you upload the project parameters
When other users upload or download the project parameters, you are not allowed to continue this
operation, and then the system gives a prompt, which indicates that other users have locked the database.
Wait a moment and try again. You can backup 10 different project parameters by server. The progress is
the same as the synchronization of engineering data.
----End
Backing Up Project Parameters-Downloading the Project Parameters

To download the project parameters, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Project > Backup Project Parameters.
The Backup Project Parameter dialog box displayed, as shown in Figure 5-35.
Step 2 Select Download and a used backup item.
Step 3 Click OK.
After you succeed in downloading the project parameters, an information box is displayed, as
Figure 5-38 Information box after you download the project parameters
Step 4 Click OK.

The site map is updated.
5-36

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
5 Common Operations
When other users download the project parameters, you cannot continue this operation. The system
prompts that the database has been locked by other user. Wait a moment and try again.
----End
Restoring Project Parameters

You can cancel all changes in the project parameters, configuration neighboring cell relation,
and planned neighboring cell relation to resume the parameters to the status of last imported.
z
Choose Project > Undo Project Parameter Modification > Last Closed to restore all
of the project parameters, configuration neighboring cell relation, and plan neighboring
cell relation to the status of last closed.
Choose Project > Undo Project Parameter Modification > Last Imported to restore
all of the project parameters, configuration neighboring cell relation, and plan
neighboring cell relation to the status of last imported.
You should use the function of Undo Project Parameter Modification with care. If you use
this function, all the added, deleted, and modified records imported the last time are missing.
Huawei recommends that you export and back up the latest engineering parameters and
neighboring relation.
5.2.4 Management of Performance Data

Importing the Performance Data
You can import the network performance data through the Transdata. The import mode
consists of static import and dynamical import.
z
The static import is also termed as manual import. You can import data based on the files
you choose.
You can dynamically import the data by triggering time point. This mode is applied on
site.
Backing Up the Data

To back up data, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose System > Data Backup.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

5-37
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
5 Common Operations
The Data Backup menu is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-39.

Figure 5-39 Data Backup command
5-38

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
5 Common Operations
Step 2 Set a path for saving the file, and then click OK.
Step 3 Specify a path for storing the backup data, and then click OK.
The progress bar of data backup is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-41.
Step 4 After the backup, the following message dialog box is displayed, indicating that the data
backup is complete.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

5-39
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
5 Common Operations
Figure 5-42 shows the message dialog box.

Figure 5-42 Data backup complete dialog box
Step 5 Click OK.

----End
Restoring the Data

To restore the data, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Project > Data Restore.
The data restore menu is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-43.
5-40

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
5 Common Operations
Figure 5-43 Data Restore submenu
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

5-41
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
5 Common Operations
Step 2 Specify a path for saving files, and then click OK.
The browse for folder dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-44.
The progress bar is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-45.

The data restore complete dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-46.
Figure 5-46 Data restore complete dialog box
5-42

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
5 Common Operations
----End
5.2.5 Checking Parameters

Checking the BSC Parameters
The parameter check is detailed as follows:
z
Check whether the network parameters consist with the recommended configurations
Check uni-directional neighbor
Check co-BCCH and co-BSIC cells
Check co-frequency neighbors in the site
Check the health status of the network planning data.
Import .dbf files to perform the parameter check.
To check parameters rationality for the BSC, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Analysis Reports > Frequency & Neighbor Config. Para. Check.
The Frequency & Neighbor Config. Para. Check dialog box is displayed, as shown in
Figure 5-47.
Figure 5-47 Frequency & Neighbor Config. Para. Check dialog box
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

5-43
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
5 Common Operations
Table 5-6 describes the elements in the Frequency & Neighbor Config. Para. Check dialog
box.
Table 5-6 Description of the elements in the Frequency & Neighbor Config. Para. Check dialog
box
Item
Description
Path
to select a path for saving the radio network

Click
planning (RNP) report, or use the default directory.
BSC
Select or clear the BSC in BSC.

Clearing all selected PCUs is recommended. In this way, only the
BSC check report is generated.
Step 2 Click
to choose a path for saving the RNP check report.
Step 3 Specify a path, and then click OK.

Step 4 Select one or more BSCs to be checked.
Step 5 Click the BSC-RNP Para Setting tab.
5-44

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
5 Common Operations
The BSC-RNP Para Setting tab page is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-49.
Figure 5-49 BSC-RNP Para Setting tab page
Table 5-7 describes the elements on the BSC-RNP Para Setting tab page.
Table 5-7 Description of the BSC-RNP parameter setting tab page
Element
Sheet setting
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)
Description
ARFCN utilization
check
For details, see section 9.5.5 "Checking Spectrum

Utilization Rate"
Co-BCCH Co-BSIC
(neighbors)
For details, see section.9.5.3 "Checking Co-Channel

and Co-BSIC"
Single neighbors
(network)
Check all the unidirectional neighboring cells based

on the neighboring relation
Channel check
Check whether the co-frequency exists in the

neighboring cells frequency, based on the
neighboring relation
Cells with fewer

neighbor check
Check the cells with neighbors less than the number

set in the Neighbor number field
Far neighbor check
Check the cells of which the distance between the

neighboring cells are longer than the number set in
the Neighbor distance field

5-45
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
5 Common Operations
Element
Description
NebCell
count setting
Neighbor number
Enter the number of neighbors for check
Neighbor
distance
setting
Neighbor distance
Enter the distance between the neighbors for check
Step 6 Set the parameters on the BSC-RNP Para Setting tab page.
Step 7 Click OK.
The parameter rationality check report of the BSC is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-50.
5-46

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
5 Common Operations
Figure 5-50 Parameter Rationality Check report in an .xls file
----End
Huawei Configuration Parameter Check

The check report on Huawei configuration parameters is generated in the .xls. To generate a
report, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Analysis Reports > Huawei Configuration Parameter Check.
The Huawei Configuration Parameter Check dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure
5-51.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

5-47
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
5 Common Operations
Figure 5-51 Huawei RNP Check Setting
Step 2 Specify a path, and select one or more Objects to be checked in the Huawei Configuration
Parameter Check dialog box.
5-48

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
5 Common Operations
Step 3 Click OK.

The report on the check of Huawei configuration parameters is created, as shown in Figure
5-52.
Figure 5-52 Report on the check of Huawei configuration parameters in an .xls file
Table 5-8 describes the four sheets of the configuration parameter check report.
Table 5-8 Description of the configuration parameter check report
Sheet
Description
Cover
Displays the name of the network and the table heading of the
reports
Problem-Cell list
Displays the problem of BSC configuration parameters
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

5-49
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
5 Common Operations
Sheet
Description
Configuration data check
Performs the following functions:
PCU parameters check
Checking and testing the configuration parameters based on

recommended values
Providing feasible suggestions
Highlighting the values that are within or exceed the

recommended values in different colors
Displays the results of PCU configuration parameters check
----End
The check of Huawei configuration parameters is based on the Huawei GSM BSS&PCU&GT800
Network Planning Data Configuration Regulations. The recommended value and ranges are set in
common conditions. Owing to the actual condition of the DBF data of a cell, unhealthy conditions occur
despite the recommended value. Network optimization engineers should check the value based on the
checklist listed in the Huawei GSM BSS&PCU&GT800 Network Planning Data Configuration
Regulations.
5.3 User Management

This section consists of the following two parts:
z
Management of User Access Rights
Management of User Log
The management of user access rights refers to setting the rights for users for the Nastar and
the Transdata, while the user log management refers to users' operation on Nastar log files.
5.3.1 Management of User Access Rights

To set the user access rights, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Project > User Management.
5-50

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
5 Common Operations
The User Management dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-53.

Figure 5-53 User Management dialog box
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

5-51
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
5 Common Operations
Step 2 In User List, right-click a user and choose Set User Access Rights from the shortcut menu.
The Set User Access Rights dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-54.
Figure 5-54 Set User Access Rights dialog box
Step 3 Set the rights for users, and then click OK.
----End
5.3.2 Management of User Log

To manage user logs, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Project > User Log.
5-52

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
5 Common Operations
The User Log dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-55.

Figure 5-55 User Log dialog box
Step 2 In the Log Information area, right-click a log file.

Three options are available on the shortcut menu.
Table 5-9 lists the functions of these options.
Table 5-9 Options on the shortcut menu
Option
Used to
Update
Obtain the latest operation records of all login users.
Export log files
Save all the log information about the files.
Clear all log files
Clear the current log information.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

5-53
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
5 Common Operations
----End
5.4 Managing NEs

This function manages the geographic location of the site station, information about a cell,
and a BTS in a project.
5.4.1 Creating a Site

To create a site, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Project > NE Maintenance > New Site.
The pointer turns into a cross.
Step 2 Place the pointer on the BTS to be added in the Site View window. Click the BTS.
5-54

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
5 Common Operations
The Site Edit dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-56.

Figure 5-56 Site Edit dialog box
Step 3 Enter a site name for the BTS and other BTS information on the Site Information tab page.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

5-55
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
5 Common Operations
Step 4 Click the Cell Information tab.

The Cell Information tab page is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-57.
Figure 5-57 Cell Information tab page
The Cells text box displays all cells of the current BS. For a new BS, the Cells list of a new
BS is initialized to be null.
Step 5 Click Add to add a new cell or click Delete to delete the selected cell.
Ensure that the TCH values are separated by commas.
Step 6 Click OK.
The BTS and its cells are created in the corresponding place of the site view window based on
the latitude and longitude.
5-56

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
5 Common Operations
----End
5.4.2 Editing a Site

To edit a site, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Project > NE Maintenance > Edit Site.
Step 2 Place the pointer on the BTS to be edited in the Site View window. Click the BTS.
The Site Edit dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-58.
Figure 5-58 Site Edit dialog box
Step 3 Edit the site and cell information. You can change the attribute of the site and cell.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

5-57
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
5 Common Operations
You can also click Add to add a new cell or click Delete to delete the selected cell.
Step 4 Click OK to save the changes of the site and close the Site Edit dialog box, or click Apply to
save the changes. Do not close the Site Edit dialog box.
----End
If you delete all the cells in a site, the site is deleted.
5.4.3 Moving a Site

To move a site, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Click
on the toolbar and the mouse pointer becomes a hollow arrowhead.
Step 2 Drag the BTS to a desired new place.

The confirmation of drag BTS operation dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-59.
Figure 5-59 Dialog box of confirming drag BTS operation
Step 3 Click Yes to confirm or No to cancel the operation.

----End
5.4.4 Deleting a Site

To delete a site, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Click
on the toolbar and the mouse pointer changes to hollow arrowhead.
Step 2 Select a site, or press Ctrl key to select multiple sites.

The selected sites displayed as red oblique grid.
Step 3 Choose Project > NE Maintenance > Delete Site.
5-58

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
5 Common Operations
The confirmation of deletion operation dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-60.
Step 4 Click Yes to delete the selected sites, or click No to cancel the operation.
After the site is deleted, the neighbors are recalculated.
----End
5.4.5 Deleting a Cell

The procedure for deleting a cell is similar to that for deleting a site.
To delete a cell, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Click
on the toolbar, the pointer changes to hollow arrowhead.
Step 2 Select a cell, or press the Ctrl key to select multiple cells.
The selected cells perform in red oblique grid.
Step 3 Choose Project > NE Maintenance > Delete Cell.
The confirmation of the deletion operation dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-61
shows t.
Step 4 Click Yes to delete the selected cells. Or click No to cancel the operation.
----End
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

5-59
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
5 Common Operations
The BTSs and cells in this manual indicate only the operation process for the Nastar GSM. They do not
represent the actual situation in the current network.
5.4.6 Querying NE Property

Choose the NE from the net element list in the workspace.
The property of chosen NE in the right pane in the Property window is displayed, as shown
in Figure 5-62.
Querying NE property function comprises the following:

z
5-60
Query cell information

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
5 Common Operations
Query BTS information
Query Huawei configuration parameter setting
Query Huawei GPRS cell parameter
5.5 Managing Map

5.5.1 Overview
GENEX Nastar GSM comprises the following maps:
z
Digital map
Reference grid map
Scan map
Map management works on different maps.
5.5.2 Importing a Map

A map can be imported in the following two formats:
z
For details about how to import a .gst map, see 5.1.2 "Creating a Project".
To import a .dat map, perform the following steps:
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

5-61
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
5 Common Operations
Step 1 Choose Geographic Display > Import Image Layer.

The Open Raster Image dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-63.
Figure 5-63 Open Raster Image dialog box
5-62

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
5 Common Operations
Step 2 Select an image, and then click Open.

The Raster Image dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-64.
Figure 5-64 Raster Image dialog box
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

5-63
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
5 Common Operations
Step 3 Click the map browser area to select the coordination location (longitude and latitude).
The Click Image to add a point dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-65.
Figure 5-65 Click Image to add a point dialog box
Step 4 Type a label name in Label, and type longitude and latitude values in the Longitude and
Latitude fields.
The Pixel X and Pixel Y are calculated by the system based on the map location. You need not
type the values manually.
Step 5 Repeat Step 2 and Step 3 to edit at least three points that are not located in a line.
If you edit more points, the precision is much higher.
Step 6 Click OK to close the Raster Image dialog box.
The raster image layer is displayed on the map window.
----End
5.5.3 General Operation of a Map

The map is displayed in the site view window. You can use the toolbar button or right-click
menu to perform with map.
Figure 5-66 shows the site view toolbar.
Figure 5-66 Site view toolbar
Table 5-10 describes each item on the site view toolbar.
5-64

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
5 Common Operations
Table 5-10 Description of the site view toolbar

Item
Description
Click the button, and the pointer changes to icon shape.
Click the view and you can move the map by moving the mouse.
Click the button, and the mouse cursor change its shape to
Click the view and place the selected map in the middle.
Click the button, and the pointer becomes a common cursor. When you
choose an NE, there is a color indicated in the map and related information
displayed in the property window.
Click the button to select a range in rectangle from the map.
Click the button to select a range in circle from the map.
Click the button and the mouse cursor changes to an icon shape. Click the
view to zoom in the map.
Click the button and the mouse cursor changes to an icon shape. Click the
view to zoom out the map.
Click the button and the map returns to the original state.
Click the button, and then click the map. The distance between two points
and the total distance will be counted automatically.
Click the button, and then click the map. The angle will be measured
automatically.
Click the button and start the map layer control function.
Click the button and start the import image layer function.
5.5.4 Managing Map Layers

This function is performed to set layers. Click
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

5-65
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
5 Common Operations
The Layer Control dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-67.

Figure 5-67 Layer Control dialog box
The map layer management includes the following operations:

z
Choose a map layer, for example, User Draw, and then use Up or Down to adjust the
location.
Use Add to add existing layers.
Set Visible, Selectable, Automatic Labels, and Editable items for the chose layer.
Set the Display and Labels.
5.5.5 Managing the Legend

Based on the information about the current map window and operation status, the Legend
window displays relevant prompt messages.
Choose View > Display Legend Window, or click
Legend window.
on the toolbar to display or hide the
The Legend window shows different functions.
5-66

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
5 Common Operations
When a location area is displayed on the system for network optimization analysis, the
Legend window is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-68.
Figure 5-68 Legend window for network optimization analysis
The Legend window during adjacent channel checking is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-69.
Figure 5-69 Legend window during adjacent channel checking
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

5-67
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
5 Common Operations
In most situations, choose View > Display Legend Window, or click

on the toolbar to display or
hide the Legend window. The content of the Legend window changes based on the operation status.
You can also view or hide the reference grid, task window, navigator window, or cell content by
choosing relevant menus or clicking relevant buttons on the toolbar.
5.6 Setting the Analysis Conditions

5.6.1 Setting the Time Range
Before the generation of an analysis report, you need to set the time range. The setting of the
time range is detailed as follows:
z
Set data range

The data range usually comprises the Begin Time, End Time, and Statistic Cycle. The
default value is the time of the current system. You can select the analysis time range.
Set busy time

Busy time comprises All day, Busy time, and Other.
If you choose All day, the system exports an analysis report of the whole day.
Choose the Busy time option, and the system exports an analysis report of the busy
time. You can modify the time, and set three busy time intervals.
Choose Other option, and the system exports analysis report of the other time. The
other time can be set by the user.
5.6.2 Setting the Save Path

You should set the save path for the generation report function.
To set the save path, perform the following steps:
5-68

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Step 1 Click
5 Common Operations
in the prompt dialog box to choose the save path.
The Browse For Folder dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-70.
Figure 5-70 Browse For Folder
Step 2 Select the save path in the dialog box.

Step 3 Click OK.
----End
5.6.3 Setting Cell Groups

The cell group setting helps you to query the data in a more convenient way. You can define a
cell group by selecting a set of very important cells (VICs), or by selecting cells in an area as
the statistic objects. You can select all of the cells or some of the cells to be queried, or select
cells from different groups to be queried.
Creating a Cell Group

To create a cell group, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Double-click Cell Group Setting of the Analysis Setting node on the Trouble Shooting
page.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

5-69
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
5 Common Operations
The Cell Group dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-71.

Figure 5-71 Cell Group dialog box
Step 2 Click New.

The New Cell Group dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-72.
5-70

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
5 Common Operations
Figure 5-72 New Cell Group dialog box
Step 3 Type a name in the Cell Group Name in the New Cell Group dialog box.
Step 4 Select the cells from the Cell Group Name list.
Step 5 Give descriptions in the area of Cell group Comments.
This step is optional.
Step 6 Click OK.
----End
You can perform fuzzy search to find the added cell by using key word.
Modifying a Cell Group

To modify a cell group, perform the following steps:
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

5-71
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
5 Common Operations
page.
Step 2 Select a cell group from the Defined Cell Group list.
5-72

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
5 Common Operations
Step 3 Click Modify.

The Edit Cell Group dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-74.
Figure 5-74 Edit Cell Group dialog box
Step 4 Select or deselect the cells in the Cell Group Name list.
Step 5 Give descriptions in the area of Cell group Comments.
Step 6 Click OK.
----End
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

5-73
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
5 Common Operations
Deleting a Cell Group

To delete a cell group, perform the following steps:
page.
Step 2 Select a cell group in the Defined Cell Group list.

The system prompts you to confirm the deletion operation.
Step 4 Click OK.
The selected cell group is deleted from the Defined Cell Group list.
----End
5.6.4 Setting the Common Period

When you execute a performance measurement task and try to obtain the daily report, you do
not need to set the query time that can be directly retrieved from the common period setting
after the common period is set. Click Get from Database to retrieve the begin date and end
date of all the performance statistics in the database.
5-74

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
5 Common Operations
To set common period, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Double-click Common Period Setting of the Analysis Setting node on the Trouble
Shooting page.
The Common Period Setting dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-76.
Figure 5-76 Common Period Setting dialog box
Step 2 Set Begin date and End date.

Step 3 Click OK.
----End
5.6.5 Setting Up the Synchronization Mode

If a project is in online mode, you can import data from local cells and create a mapping
relationship between local cells and server cells.
Creating a mapping relationship means mapping the cell data of a project to the cells on the
server side. The server synchronization mode also creates a mapping between the engineering
parameters imported into a project and the configuration data and performance data imported
in the database.
With the result of the traffic analysis shown on the map and engineering parameters, the result
of the traffic analysis is displayed on the site view.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

5-75
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
5 Common Operations
To create a mapping relationship between local cells and server cells, perform the following
steps:
Step 1 Double-click Synch Mode Setting of the Analysis Setting node on the Trouble Shooting
page.
The Data Synchronization Mode dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-77.
Figure 5-77 Data Synchronization Setting dialog box
Step 2 Select a mapping criterion in the field of Mapping criteria. The mapping criteria is as
follows:
z
Cell name
LAC+CI
Step 3 Click OK.

After the mapping, a Synchronization Report dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure
5-78.
Figure 5-78 Synchronization Report dialog box
Step 4 Click Ok.

The system prompts you to check the mapping result.
Step 5 Click Output result to export the synchronization report in an .xls file.
----End
5-76

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
5 Common Operations
If the engineering parameters in a project are not changed, you only need to implement the
synchronization once. If the engineering parameters are changed or re-imported, you need to
synchronize server data.
Whether the engineering parameters are not imported and the synchronization is not
implemented, does not affect the traffic result analysis.
5.6.6 Setting BSC Groups

The BSC group setting helps you to query the data in a more convenient way. You can define
a BSC group by selecting a set of BSCs. You can select all of the BSCs or some of the BSCs
to be queried, or select BSCs from different groups to be queried.
Creating a BSC Group

To create a BSC group, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Double-click BSC Group Setting of the Analysis Setting node in the Trouble Shooting
pane.
Figure 5-79 shows the BSC group dialog box.
Figure 5-79 BSC Group dialog box
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

5-77
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
5 Common Operations
Step 2 Click New.

Figure 5-80 shows the New BSC Group dialog box.
Figure 5-80 New BSC Group dialog box
Step 3 Type a name in the BSC group name in the New BSC Group dialog box.
Step 4 Select the BSCs from the BSC group name list.
Step 5 Give descriptions in the area of BSC group Description.
This step is optional.
Step 6 Click OK.
----End
5-78

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
5 Common Operations
Modifying a BSC Group

To modify a BSC group, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Double-click BSC Group Setting of the Analysis Setting node on the Trouble Shooting
page.
Figure 5-81 shows the BSC Group dialog box.
Step 2 Select a BSC group from the Defined BSC Group list.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

5-79
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
5 Common Operations
Step 3 Click Modify.

Figure 5-82 shows the BSC Group Edit dialog box.
Figure 5-82 BSC Group Edit dialog box
Step 4 Select or deselect the BSCs in the BSC group name list.
Step 5 Give descriptions in the area of BSC Group Description.
Step 6 Click OK.
----End
5-80

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
5 Common Operations
Deleting a BSC Group

To delete a BSC group, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Double-click BSC Group Setting of the Analysis Setting node on the Trouble Shooting
page.
Figure 5-83 shows the BSC Group dialog box.
Step 2 Select a BSC group in the Defined BSC group list.

The system prompts you to confirm the deletion operation, as shown in Figure 5-84.
Figure 5-84 Delete BSC group
Step 4 Click OK.

The selected BSC group is deleted from the Defined BSC Group list.
----End
5.7 Processing the Analysis Result

After the task is executed, you can query, collect, and calculate the statistics according to the
indicators that are customized previously. The query result is displayed in the table window.
Generally, the query result consists of the following parts:
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

5-81
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
5 Common Operations
z
The first part lists common information, such as time, BSC, regions, area attributes, and
cell names.
The second part lists key indicators, such as values of various indicators collected after
the query, statistics, or computation.
The last part lists the cell identity (ID). The cell ID is only an internal indicator for each
cell in the system. That is, the cell ID is not important for users. The cell ID, however,
plays an important role in the system. For example, the cell ID is required for functions,
such as automatic related display of site views and quick query of performance data.
After traffic statistic query, the following operations are available:

z
Instant drawing
Exporting the query result in an .xls file
Quick query of traffic statistic
Printing query result
Controlling query result data (copy, paste and cut)
Summing up the selected area
Sorting result
Filtering data
You should set the display control based on the result except exporting to an .xls file, hiding
columns, and showing columns. The contents will be described in the following sections.
5.7.1 Operating the Analysis Table

Quick Drawing
Besides defining the draw setting during the pre-setting of a task, you can also use the quick
drawing function after the query of the result, and display the legend for the query result.
5-82

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
5 Common Operations
To set the quick drawing, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Select Quick Draw Setting from the shortcut menu.
The Quick Draw Setting dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-85.
Figure 5-85 Quick Draw Setting dialog box
Step 2 Select X-axis, Y1 axis, and Y2 axis columns on the Quick Draw Setting dialog box.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

5-83
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
5 Common Operations
Step 3 Click Draw to start the quick drawing.

The quick drawing result is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-86.
Figure 5-86 Quick drawing
During the quick drawing, Huawei recommends that you select multiple indicators of a cell in a
distributed period. This method is effective. If the Y-axis values of different indicators are of great
discrepancy, Huawei recommends that you select both Y1 axis and Y2 axis.
----End
Exporting the Query Results to an .xls File

Click
5-84
on the toolbar to export the query result in an .xls file.

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
5 Common Operations
Printing the Query Results

If there is a printer available, you can print all of the query results.
To print the query results, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Click
to export data to an .xls file.
Step 2 Open the .xls file to print the results.

----End
Controlling the Query Result Data

Controlling query result data involves the following operations:
z
Coping data
Pasting data
Cutting data
You can copy, paste, and cut data in the result sheet. These operations are similar to those in
the Microsoft Windows.
Summing Up the Selected Area

We can sum up the result of a row or a column. Firstly, select an area to be summed up, and
then click
. The system automatically sums up values of the selected area. For example,
the sum of the counter for TCH overflow (including switching) can be found in line 262, as
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

5-85
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
5 Common Operations
Figure 5-87 Sum of a selected row
Sorting the Results

By default, the task query result is ranged by the column header of the common information.
The common information includes the following fields:
z
Vendor
BSC
Regions
Terrain attributes
Cell names
Time
To sort the query results, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Select an area that requires the sum.
Step 2 Click
or
to re-sort the query result.
Step 3 Click common information, for example, TCH Call Drop Rates.
The query result is resorted by TCH Call Drop Rates, as shown in Figure 5-88.
5-86

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
5 Common Operations
Figure 5-88 Result sorting
----End
Filtering the Query Results

You can filter the query results to display the data that you are concerned with. This function
is helpful when there are huge amounts of query data.
To filter the query results, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Click
The shortcut menu is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-89.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

5-87
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
5 Common Operations
Figure 5-89 Filtering query results
Step 2 Click the arrow of the drop-down list to select or deselect the items from the drop-down list.
Step 3 Click
again to exit the filter.
The system shows all of the data.

----End
Tiling the Window

You can tile the window in a horizontal style or in a vertical style to facilitate your viewing
and comparison.
5-88

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
5 Common Operations
Select Tile Horizontal on the shortcut menu to tile the current window horizontally, as
Select Tile Vertical on the shortcut menu to tile the current window vertically.
Figure 5-90 Stretching window
Creating a Cell Group

To create a cell group, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Select a row or multiple rows in the table and right-click on the selected area.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

5-89
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
5 Common Operations
Step 2 Choose New Cell Group from the shortcut menu of the selected rows, as shown in Figure
5-91.
Figure 5-91 New Cell Group on the shortcut menu
A cell group is displayed. The selected rows are added to the new cell group.
----End
Setting the Geographical Display for Performance Data

This task is performed to set display intervals and related colors to be displayed on the map.
For example, if the data is at an interval, the related cell on the map is colorized when this
function is implemented.
This template lists the specified indicators of a specified cell in a period in an ascending or
descending order. This template facilitates your review of the TopN cells with a specified
indicator.
5-90

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
5 Common Operations
Take the cell KPI weekly trend task as an example. To set the geographical display for traffic
statistic, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Right-click Draw Selected Column on Map on a column heading in the result report, as
Figure 5-92 Draw Selected Column on Map option
The Telephone Statistic Map Color Setting dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure
5-93.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

5-91
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
5 Common Operations
Figure 5-93 Telephone Statistic Map Color Setting dialog box
Step 2 In the area of Color Setting, select Automatically or Manually.

z
If you select Automatically, set Start color and End color.
If you select Manually, set color for each interval by double-clicking the color unit in
the grid.
Step 3 Click Add or Delete to add or remove ranges in the Range setting list. Alternatively select a
value in the Set range number to set the range number.
You can give description of each range in the description area of the grid. If you leave it blank,
the system automatically gives descriptions according to the value of each range.
Step 4 In the Set Min and Max group, select the options according to your requirements.
z
If you select Manually, set minimum and maximum values for each grid.
If you select Obtain automatically, the system gets the minimum and maximum values
from the OWC report sheet.
If you select customize, you need to enter only the minimum and maximum values.
Step 5 Select the range type in the area of Range type and select the sort type in the area of Sort
type.
Step 6 Click OK.
The result on the map is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-94.
5-92

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
5 Common Operations
Figure 5-94 Geographical display of performance data
----End
When executing this operation in the query result, you may find that the data of a cell is more than
previous one. The Having same cell data row message box is also displayed.
5.7.2 Operating the Analysis Chart

Draw an analysis chart quickly. For details about the quick chart, see section 5.7.1 "Operating
the Analysis Table."
The quick chart is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-95.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

5-93
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
5 Common Operations
Figure 5-95 Quick drawing
You can process the chart with some basic or three-dimensional operation, through the toolbar
or by right-clicking the chart.
z
The toolbar can perform the rotate, move, zoom out, display the chart in-depth, display
three-dimensional chart and so on, each function as shown in Table 5-11.
Figure 5-11 describes the items on the toolbar.

Table 5-11 Icons on the toolbar
Icon
Description
Move the curve in the chart
5-94

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
5 Common Operations
Rotate the chart

Move the chart
Zoom in or out the chart
Display the chart in-depth
Display three-dimensional (3D) chart
Edit the chart
Print the chart
Copy the chart
Save the chart
To zoom in or out the chart, first select

, then move up the mouse to zoom out the chart or move
down the mouse to zoom in the chart by pressing the mouse.
The default format of saving a chart is to save the chart is TeeChart Pro files (.tee), you can save chart
in multiple formats.
z
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)
The shortcut menu can realize the function of printing, displaying, and background color
setting. Right-click menu in the site view, the menu is shown in Figure 5-96.

5-95
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
5 Common Operations
Figure 5-96 Chart analysis menu
Table 5-12 describes the function of each item in the analysis chart.
Table 5-12 Function of each item in the analysis chart
5-96
Item
Description
Show index item
Show all the query index items by default. The tick in front of the
item means the curve is displayed, you can choose the curve list or
not
Undo zoom
Undo zooming in or out
Preview
Show preview

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
5 Common Operations
Item
Description
Print
Print the chart, the same as
on the toolbar
Active Display
Display the dynamic chart
Show mark
The mark is not displayed by default. The tick in front of the item
means the mark is displayed, you can choose the mark list or not
Show legend
Show the legend by default. The tick in front of the item means the
legend is displayed Default showing the legend, you can choose
the legend list or not
Gradient color
Set the background color.
Gradient direction
Set the different background direction
Legend position
Legend position is on the bottom of the chart by default. You can

set the legend position on the top, bottom, left or right of the chart.
Gradient direction comprises seven different gradient modes, click Gradient Direction, and it will show
different gradient direction.
The legend selects all the index items (user can define the index item) by default, as shown in Figure
5-97.You can select the legend by right-click menu or legend dialog box.
Figure 5-97 Legend
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

5-97
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Optimizing the Network
About This Chapter

Section
Describes
6.1 Introduction
Introduction to network optimization
6.2 Geographic Display
Introduction to the various geographic display
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

6-1
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
6.1 Introduction
To enable you to perform further analysis on the current site view, the system provides the
function of network optimization.
Geographic display realizes the analysis and query for current network system.
6.2 Geographic Display

6.2.1 Background
The geographic display function of the Nastar GSM system facilitates further analysis and
query to a great extent.
z
Search current cell through different methods.
Display the related information of network.
Modify the display setting.
6.2.2 Searching a Cell

You can search a cell through the following two methods:
z
searching a cell through the menu of the system
searching a cell through NE list
Searching a Cell through the Menu of the System

To search a cell through the menu of the system, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Geographic Display > Search Cells.
6-2

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
The Search Cells dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-1.

Figure 6-1 Search Cells dialog box
Step 2 Select the search mode.

z
Select Search by Name to search a cell with the keyword of the cell name. You need to
type only a keyword of the cell name in Keyword to start fuzzy search.
Select Search by CI to search the cell by cell identity. You need to type only the cell
identity of the cell to start exact search.
Step 3 Enter the keyword of a cell or the cell identity in Keyword.

The Search Result list shows the information of the search result, Cell name, CI, Site and
Site Type.
Step 4 Click an item in the Search Result list.
The relevant cell is displayed in the center of the Site View window and all the properties of
the cell are shown in the Property pane on the right side.
The system supports real-time co-activated display of the cell lists, Site View window, and
Property pane.
----End
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

6-3
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Searching a Cell through NE List

Search a cell through the NE list, perform the following steps:
Step 1 In the NE list window on the workspace, click
The search a cell dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-2.

Figure 6-2 searching a cell
Step 2 Select the search mode, the default mode is By Cell Name, that is, to search a cell by key
word. You can also search a cell by Cell CI. The Cell Identity (CI) is 16-bit cell identity.
z
Select By Cell Name, you need only to enter a key word of cell name, to perform fuzzy
search.
Select By Cell CI, you need to enter CI to perform precise search.
The search result displays all cells searched in NE list box.

Step 3 Click an item from the NE list box.
The related cell of the item displayed in the center of the map, and the property of the cell
displayed in property window as well.
The system supports linkage of the cell list, site view and the property page.
----End
6-4

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
6.2.3 Displaying a Location Area or a Site

Displaying a Location Area
This function is to display the location area division of the current network. For a network,
dividing the location area incorrectly, for example, the boundary of the location area located
in the place with many users, or the location area divided along heavy traffic road, may cause
many problems. Such as signal traffic increasing, network resource over-occupied, frequent
switch, and switchover failure.
To display the location area, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Geographic Display > Display LAC.
The Location Area Displaying Setting dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-3.
Figure 6-3 Location area displaying setting dialog box
Step 2 Select Range Setting.

z
Select All Network Location Area to show all location areas.
Select Specified Location Area to show a specified location area.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

6-5
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Step 3 Click Color Setting.

The Color Setting dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-4.
Figure 6-4 Color Setting dialog box
Step 4 Double-click a grid in the Color column to change the color of the location area, and then
click OK.
6-6

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Step 5 Click OK in the Location Area Displaying Setting dialog box.

It is necessary to check and adjust the partition of the location area, especially view the
partition situation of the current location area with the map information, as shown in Figure
6-5.
Figure 6-5 LAC displayed on the map
In the Legend pane, different colors indicate different location areas. The value before the
bracket is the LAC ID, and the value in the bracket is the number of cells in the LAC area.
From the map, you can infer that three LAC areas of EASTWOOD are embedded in LAC
11012 area. The division is not proper as regarding the network optimization. The three LAC
areas may cause the increase of signal traffic, over-frequent location altering, and handover
problems. Therefore, modifying the location area property of EASTWOOD is a must.
----End
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

6-7
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
The edge of the location area is based on cell blocks. Therefore, the display of cell blocks is required in
this operation. If this operation does not work, choose Geographic Display > Display Option > Cell
Setting and select Display cell blocks.
Displaying the GPRS Cells

This function is to view the distribution of the GPRS cells in service on the network.
To display the GPRS cells, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Geographic Display > Display GPRS Cells.
Figure 6-6 Color setting dialog box
Step 2 Select the color on the Color Setting dialog box.
6-8

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Step 3 Click OK.

The distribution of the GPRS cells in service on the current network is displayed, as shown in
Figure 6-7.
Figure 6-7 GPRS cells highlighted on the map
The GPRS cells are highlighted in the selected color to distinguish from the non-GPRS cells.
----End
Displaying the BSC Coverage

This function is to view the coverage of the BSC in the current network. This function
provides references for locating the problems of network failure, and provides information for
network optimization, such as solving the problem of handover.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

6-9
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
To display the BSC coverage, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Choose Geographic Display > Display BSC Coverage.
The BSC Display Setting dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-8.
Figure 6-8 BSC Display Setting dialog box
Step 2 Set Range Setting.

z
Select Whole network to show all the BSCs in the network.
Select Specified BSC to show the selected BSC in BSC list.

BSC list is available only when Specified BSC is selected.
Step 3 Click Color Setting.

Figure 6-9 Color Setting dialog box
Step 4 Double-click a grid in the Color column to change the color of the location area, and then
click OK.
6-10

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Step 5 Click OK in the BSC Display Setting dialog box

The coverage situation of the selected BSC is highlighted in the selected color, as shown in
Figure 6-10.
Figure 6-10 BSC Coverage highlighted on the map
----End
Displaying All Sites

Choose Geographic Display > Display All Sites to display all sites of 900 MHz and 1800
MHz on the map.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

6-11
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
The sites of 900 MHz and 1800 MHz are displayed on the map in different colors and sizes,
Figure 6-11 All sites displayed on the map
The function of cell block and the other functions based on the cell block are applied to a single layer.
The cell blocks are displayed inaccurately when all sites are displayed.
6.2.4 Displaying the Network Optimization Theme

Customized indexes of the project parameters are defined by users with a value. All
user-defined items of cells are classified and displayed in different colors in the site view.
6-12

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
To display the network optimization theme, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Choose Geographic Display > Display Network Optimization Theme Setting, as shown in
Figure 6-12.
Figure 6-12 Display Network Optimization Theme Setting menu
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

6-13
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
The Show Theme dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-13.

Figure 6-13 Show Theme dialog box
Table 6-1 describes the elements in the Show Theme dialog box.
Table 6-1 Elements in the show theme dialog box
Element
Description
Color Setting
Indicator Setting
Start Color
Select the start color.
End Color
Select the end color.
Indicator
Select an indicator
(USERDEF1USERDEF 10) to be colored.
Description
Enter the description of the indicator.
Range Setting
Button
Add legend description and set the lower

limit and upper limit.
Add
Click the button to add a range.
Delete
Click the button to delete the selected

range.
Step 2 Edit the elements based on the description in Table 6-1.
6-14

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Step 3 Click OK to highlight the map of the network optimization theme.

The result of the highlighted theme is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-14.
Figure 6-14 Result of the highlighted theme
The legend window displays the different ranges set by users. The first digit of the number in
a bracket refers to the number of cells at the 900 MHz layer, and the last digit means the
number of cells in the 1800 MHz layer.
----End
6.2.5 Displaying a Reference Grid

Displaying the reference grid helps to judge the distance between BTSs. The reference
distance of the reference grid is 500 meters by default.
Choose Geographic Display >Display Reference Grid, or click
display or hide the reference grid.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

on the toolbar to
6-15
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
When the reference grid is displayed, the Site View window is shown in Figure 6-15.
Figure 6-15 Reference grid
6.2.6 Switching 900/1800 Layer

For a dual-frequency network, generally, you need to switch 900/1800 MHz layer during
network optimization analysis or traffic statistic analysis.
6-16

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
The 900 MHz layer is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-16.

Figure 6-16 900 MHz layer
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

6-17
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
The 1800 MHz layer is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-17.

Figure 6-17 1800 MHz layer
Click the relevant cell to display the cell in the center of the map. If the cell does not exist in
the current layer, the system program automatically switches to another level. You can also
manually switch layers by choosing Geographic Display > Switch to layer 900/1800, or
on the toolbar of the map. When the map window is selected, you can also press
clicking
Ctrl+W to switch between layers quickly.
In most cases, you can switch between layers of a dual band network by choosing Geographic Display
> Switch to layer 900/1800, or clicking
preceding operations.
on the toolbar of the toolbar. Then you can perform the
6.2.7 Configuring the Neighbors Switching

The function of configuring the neighbors switching can perform the switching between
configuration neighbors and plan neighbors.
6-18

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Choose Geographic Display > Switch to Config. Neighbors to switch to configuration

neighbors;
Choose Geographic Display > Switch to Plan Neighbors to switch to simulated

neighbors, that is, the automatic planned neighbors.
6.2.8 Displaying Project Parameters on a Map

To render project parameters on the map, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Geographic Display > Render Project's Parameters.
The Project Parameter Select dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-18.
Figure 6-18 Project Parameter Select dialog box
Step 2 Select a project parameter in Param List.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

6-19
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Step 3 Click Next.

The Color Config dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-19.
Figure 6-19 Color Config dialog box
Step 4 Double-click a grid in the Color column to set the colors for the selected parameter.
Step 5 Select Effect on antenna or Effect on section in Display Option.
The Effect on section option is selected by default.
6-20

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Step 6 Click OK to render the map.

The result is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-20.
Figure 6-20 Display on the map
----End
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

6-21
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
6.2.9 Modifying Display Setting

Setting Cell Display
To set the cell show setting, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Geographic Display > Display Option > Cell Display Setting.
The Show Items Option dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-21.
Figure 6-21 Show Items Option dialog box
Step 2 Select or clear the following items in the Item field.

z
Site
Site Label
Antenna
Cell Label
Sector
Step 3 Set the minimum and maximum map zooming range in the Display Area field.
If the zoom value is within the setting range, the system displays the BTS antenna. If the
zoom value exceeds the range, the BTS antenna is not displayed. You can set the range based
on the antenna density on the map.
Step 4 Set the showing color of various types of antennas in the Color Setting field.
Step 5 Click OK.
----End
Setting Cell Label

To set a cell label, perform the following steps:
6-22

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Step 1 Choose Geographic Display > Display Option > Cell Label Setting.
The Option dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-22.
Figure 6-22 Option dialog box
Step 2 Set the cell label content in Cell Label.

Step 3 Select Detail Label to display the detailed label.
Step 4 Click Fonts to set the label in Label Option.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

6-23
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Step 5 Click OK to display the cell label on the map.

The result is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-23.
Figure 6-23 Result figure with the cell label
----End
Setting Reference Grid

To set a reference grid, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Geographic Display >Display Option > Reference Grid Setting.
6-24

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
The Grid Setting dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-24.

Figure 6-24 Grid Setting dialog box
Step 2 Enter the grid length and select the color.

Step 3 Click OK.
----End
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

6-25
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Setting Configuration Parameters Display

To set configuration parameters display, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Geographic Display > Display Option > Config Parameter Display Setting.
The Config data show setting dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 6-25.
Figure 6-25 Config data show setting dialog box
Step 2 Select Huawei in the Vendor area.

Step 3 Choose a data type required in the Type drop-down list.
Step 4 Add or remove the data items in the Selected Config Data list by using items in the All
Config Data list.
6-26

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Step 5 Click OK.

The Huawei configuration parameters on the Huawei config Parameter Setting tab page of
the Property window is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-26.
----End
When the selected cells use Huawei devices, the configuration parameters of the cells are Huawei
configuration parameters. The Property window displays the Huawei config Parameter Setting tab.
If the selected cell uses equipment of other vendors, the configuration parameters of the cell must be the
configuration parameters of the corresponding manufacture. The Property window displays the
corresponding tab. A cell can be configured with only one manufacturers configuration parameters.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

6-27
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
7 Network Performance Alarms
Network Performance Alarms
About This Chapter

Title
Description
7.1 Introduction
Introduction to the network performance alarms.
7.2 Types of Performance

Alarm
Introduction to the type of the performance alarm.
7.3 Operations About Network

Performance Alarms
How to start, suspend, activate, query, handle, create,

delete, modify, filter the alarm tasks, and the query of the
history alarm tasks.
7.4 Setting the Performance

Alarms
How to set the performance alarms.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

7-1
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
7.1 Introduction
The network performance alarms provide the reports of performance alarms of the entire
network devices in quasi real time. You can set and filter the conditions for performance alarm
report as required of engineers.
According to the alarms, the network maintenance personnel can import maintenance
information and handle advice. The related information can be saved and queried. By
querying the history performance alarms, you can obtain the details about the history
performance alarms.
7-2

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Figure 7-1 shows the network performance alarms.

Figure 7-1 Performance Alarm navigation tree
7.2 Types of Performance Alarm

The performance alarms can be categorized into the following types:
z
Standard Alarm
Optional Alarm
Customizing an Alarm
7.2.1 Standard Alarm

Alarm Caused by Carrier Disabled Cell
To set the condition of the carrier disabled cell, perform as following steps:
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

7-3
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Step 1 Right-click the TRX Cell Alarm under the Standard Alarm node on the Performance
Alarm pane, as shown in Figure 7-2.
Figure 7-2 Modify alarm task
Step 2 Choose Modify Alarm Task(M) from the shortcut menu displayed.
A dialog box of Carrier Frequency Disabled Cell Alarm Parameter Setting is displayed,
7-4

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Figure 7-3 Carrier Frequency Disabled Cell Alarm Parameter Setting dialog box
Step 3 Click Alarm Condition Setting(K), a dialog box of Alarm Condition Setting is displayed,
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

7-5
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Figure 7-4 Alarm condition setting
Step 4 Select a KPI name from the KPI Name drop-down list, take the TCH Usability as example,
the default value is less then 100 percents.
For details about the Compare Operation Symbol, Alarm Value and Logic Operation
Symbol setting, see Table 7-1.
Table 7-1 Alarm condition setting symbol
Condition
symbol
Compare operation symbol
>, >=, =, <, <=, <>
Alarm value
Input the float value
Logic operation symbol
AND, OR
Step 5 Click Modify(M), and then the modified alarm condition setting displayed in the Alarm
Condition group box of the Alarm Condition Setting dialog box, as shown in Figure 7-5.
7-6

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Figure 7-5 Alarm condition setting modified
----End
Dormancy Cell Alarm

When the TCH traffic volume per channel is 0 (Erl), the dormancy cell alarm is generated.
Figure 7-6 shows the Carrier Frequency Disabled Cell Alarm Parameter Setting dialog
box.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

7-7
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Figure 7-6 Carrier frequency disabled cell alarm parameter setting dialog box
In this dialog box, you can modify the conditions according to actual requirements.
7.2.2 Optional Alarm

High Call Traffic Volume Cell Alarm
When the TCH traffic volume per channel is equal to or greater than 0.6 (Erl), the alarm of
high-volume traffic cell is generated. You can modify the conditions according to the actual
requirements, as shown in Figure 7-7.
7-8

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Figure 7-7 Alarm condition setting dialog box
Low Call Traffic Volume Cell Alarm

When the TCH traffic volume per channel is less than 0.01 (Erl), the alarm of low-volume
traffic cell is generated. You can modify the conditions according to the actual requirements,
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

7-9
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
TCH Congestion Cell Alarm

When the TCH congestion rate (including handovers) is greater than or equal to 10%, the
alarm of TCH congestion cell is generated. You can modify the conditions according to the
actual requirements, as shown in Figure 7-9.
7-10

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
SDCCH Congestion Cell Alarm

When the stand-alone dedicated control channel (SDCCH) congestion rate is equal to or
greater than 10%, the alarm of SDCCH congestion cell is generated. You can modify the
conditions according to the actual requirements, as shown in Figure 7-10.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

7-11
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Figure 7-10 Alarm of SDCCH Congestion Cell
TCH Call Drop Cell Alarm

When the TCH call drop rate (including handovers) is equal to or greater than 8%, the alarm
of TCH call drop cell is generated. You can modify the conditions according to the actual
7-12

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Figure 7-11 Alarm Condition Setting dialog box
SDCCH Call Drop Cell Alarm

When SDCCH call drop rate is equal to or greater than 10%, the alarm of the SDCCH call
drop cell is generated. You can modify the conditions according to the actual requirements, as
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

7-13
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Figure 7-12 Alarm of SDCCH call drop cell
Successful Call Setup Rate Over Threshold Cell Alarm

When the immediate assignment success rate is less than 90%, the alarm of immediate
assignment success cell is generated. You can modify the conditions according to the actual
7-14

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Figure 7-13 Alarm of immediate assignment success cell
Radio Connected Rate Over Threshold Cell Alarm

When the radio connected rate (including handovers) is equal to or less than 90%, the alarm
of radio connected cell is generated. You can modify the conditions according to actual
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

7-15
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Figure 7-14 Alarm of radio connected cell
Successful Handover Rate Over Threshold Cell Alarm

When the successful handovers is equal to or less than 90%, the alarm of successful handover
cell is generated. You can modify the conditions according to actual requirements, as shown in
Figure 7-15.
7-16

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Figure 7-15 Alarm of successful handover cell
7.2.3 Customizing an Alarm

You can also customize alarm tasks.
For details about how to customize an alarm, see section 7.3.4 "Creating an Alarm Task."
7.3 Operations About Network Performance Alarms

7.3.1 Starting, Suspending, or Activating Alarm Tasks
Starting an Alarm Task
When the system is started, the default status of performance alarms is enabled. You can
manually enable or disable alarms.
To execute an alarm task, choose Analysis Report > Performance Alarm Setting > Alarm
Filtering Setting. The icon
before the menu describes the success of starting the alarm
task, as shown in Figure 7-16.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

7-17
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Figure 7-16 Starting an alarm task
Suspending an Alarm Task

Suspending a running alarm task refers to stopping the progress of this alarm task.
To suspend an alarm task, perform the following steps:
Step 1 In the Performance Alarm navigation tree, right-click Dormancy Cell Alarm.
Step 2 Choose Disabled from the shortcut menu, the Performance Alarm navigation tree is
7-18

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Figure 7-17 Suspending an Alarm Task
----End
Activating an Alarm Task

Activating an alarm task refers to executing this alarm task.
To activate an alarm task, perform the following steps:
Step 1 In the Performance Alarm navigation tree, right-click Dormancy Cell Alarm.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

7-19
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Step 2 Choose Enabled from the shortcut menu, as shown in Figure 7-18.
Figure 7-18 Activating an alarm task
----End
7-20

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
7.3.2 Checking Alarm Tasks

To check an alarm task, double-click the alarm task in the Performance Alarm navigation
tree to view the detailed information about this task, as shown in Figure 7-19.
Figure 7-19 Performance Alarm navigation tree
Table 7-2 lists the checking methods, status, and results of each alarm message.
Table 7-2 Checking alarm messages
To
You can
Result
Check
whether an
alarm
message is
generated,
Check the color of the cell

icon in front of the alarm
name.
Green: indicates that there is no alarm.
Red: indicates the alarms are generated

and are followed by the number of the
alarms.
Check the
location of
the
problematic
cell,
Click the alarm cell row in

the lower right corner of
the Alarm Message dialog
box.
On the map, the located area turns red.
Check the
detailed
information
about an
alarm task,
Double-click the alarm cell

row in the Alarm Message
dialog box of the lower
right corner.
The Warn Operation dialog box that

contains the detailed information about an
alarm task is displayed, as shown in Figure
7-20.
7.3.3 Alarm Task Process

To perform the alarm task process, perform the following steps:
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

7-21
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Step 1 Double-click the row where the alarm is generated in the Alarm Message dialog box.
Figure 7-20 Alarm Operation dialog box
7-22

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Step 2 Select an alarm task.

You can enter the information in the Operation Person, Operation Procedure, Operation,
and Demo fields, as shown in Figure 7-21.
Figure 7-21 Filling in detailed information about the alarm task
----End
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

7-23
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
7.3.4 Creating an Alarm Task

To create an alarm task, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Right-click in the Performance Alarm navigation tree, the shortcut menu is displayed, as
Figure 7-22 Creating an alarm task
Step 2 Choose New Alarm Task from the shortcut menu, the Alarm Template is displayed, as
Figure 7-23 Alarm Template navigation tree
Step 3 In the Alarm Template navigation tree, select an alarm template, and then click Select.
7-24

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
You can also double-click the selected alarm template, the Alarm Parameter Setting dialog
box is displayed, as shown in Figure 7-24.
Figure 7-24 Alarm Parameter Setting dialog box
In this dialog box, you can set the following parameters:

z
Task name
Time period
Alarm circle
Task state
Start time
Alarm cells
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

7-25
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Step 4 In the Alarm Parameter Setting dialog box, click Alarm Condition Setting (K).
The Alarm Condition Setting dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 7-25.
In the Alarm Condition Setting group box, you can add a maximum of three alarm
conditions.
Step 5 After setting the parameters for an alarm, click OK.
An alarm task is created and it is added to the Custom Alarm node in the Performance
Alarm navigation tree.
----End
7.3.5 Deleting an Alarm Task

To delete an alarm task, perform the following steps:
Step 1 In the Performance Alarm navigation tree, select an alarm to be deleted.
7-26

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Step 2 Right-click the Performance Alarm navigation tree, and select Delete Alarm Task from the
shortcut menu, as shown in Figure 7-26.
Figure 7-26 Deleting an alarm task
The confirmation dialog box about deleting an alarm task is displayed, as shown in Figure
7-27.
Figure 7-27 Confirmation dialog box about deleting an alarm task
Step 3 Click OK.

----End
Custom alarms can be deleted. Standard and optional alarms, however, cannot be deleted.
7.3.6 Modifying an Alarm Task

To modify an alarm task, perform the following steps:
Step 1 In the Performance Alarm navigation pane, select an alarm to be modified.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

7-27
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Step 2 Right-click the Performance Alarm navigation tree, and choose Modify Alarm Task from
the shortcut menu, as shown in Figure 7-28.
Figure 7-28 Modifying an alarm task
The Alarm Parameter Setting dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 7-29.
Figure 7-29 Alarm Parameter Setting dialog box
In the Alarm Parameter Setting dialog box, you can modify the parameters for the alarm
task.
7-28

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Step 3 Click Alarm Condition Setting.

The Alarm Condition Setting dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 7-30.
You can modify the alarm conditions in the Alarm Condition Setting dialog box.
----End
7.3.7 Searching for a History Alarm Task

To search for a history alarm task, perform the following steps:
Step 1 In the Performance Alarm navigation tree, select an alarm to be searched.
Step 2 Right-click the Performance Alarm navigation tree, and choose History Alarm Query from
the shortcut menu, as shown in Figure 7-28.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

7-29
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
The History Alarm Search dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 7-31.
Figure 7-31 History Alarm Search dialog box
Step 3 In the History Alarm Search dialog box, set the start time and end time in the Start Time
and End Time fields.
Step 4 Search the alarm task based on the key words, such as the task name, the task operator, the
task procedure, the result, and the memo.
The checking results can be displayed in an .xls file.
7-30

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
The Alarm window is displayed, as shown in Figure 7-32.

Figure 7-32 Alarm window
----End
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

7-31
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
7.3.8 Setting Filtering Conditions for Alarms

To set filtering conditions for an alarm, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Analysis Report > Performance Alarm Setting > Alarm Filtrate Setting, as shown
in Figure 7-33.
Figure 7-33 Alarm Filtrate Setting Menu
7-32

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
The Alarm KPI Filter Setting dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 7-34.
Figure 7-34 Alarm KPI Filter Setting dialog box
Step 2 Select a cell to be filtered, and then select the KPI to be filtered.
Step 3 Select the KPI items (multiple options) from the KPI group box, and then click Add or
Delete.
Step 4 Click Save.
Step 5 Click OK.
The setting of the KPI filtering is complete.
----End
7.4 Setting the Performance Alarms

The TaskWatcher scans performance alarms. To configure the TaskWatcher, perform the
following steps:
Step 1 Double-click the Bin folder in the \Huawei GENEX\Nastar GSM directory.
Step 2 Double-click the TaskWatch.ini file.
The Notepad is displayed, as shown in Figure 7-35.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

7-33
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Figure 7-35 Notepad
Step 3 Modify the configuration parameters in the notepad.

Pay special attention when you modify the parameters under [transdata] and [nastar].The
information proceeded by Database= should be in accordance with the information created in
the Transdata.
Table 7-3 describes fields in the notepad..
Table 7-3 Description of fields
7-34
Field
Description
AlarmDormancyTimeOne
Indicates the start time of the alarm dormancy,

that is, from this time on, the alarm function is
shielded. For example, 0 indicates 00:00:00.
AlarmDormancyTimeTwo
Indicates the end time of the alarm dormancy,

that is, from this time on, the alarm function is
restored. For example, 6 indicates 06:00:00.
DayReportTemplate
Indicates the path of the template of daily

reports.

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Field
Description
DelayExecTime_minute
Indicates the time delay of the alarm, that is,

the delay of the time when the performance data
of the BAM is exported. The unit is minute. For
example, the performance data imported at 9:00
may be exported to the BAM at 9:25. Thus, the
time of the performance alarm is bound to be
delayed. Set the time delay based on the specific
situation of the actual office. The time delay is
around 30 minutes. The recommended setting
for the time delay is between 1 to 60 minutes.
MonthReportTemplate
Indicates the path of the template of monthly

reports.
TaskScanCycle_minute
Indicates the scanning period for the

performance alarms. The default period is 1
minute. If you set the scanning period longer,
the impact on the performance of the Nastar
server is less. If the performance of the server
becomes worse, you can set the period to a
longer value. The recommended time period is
between 1 to 25 minutes.
WarnDispCycle_minute
Indicates the period for the refreshing the

alarms. The default period is 1 minute. The
longer the period is, the more system resources
are occupied. The recommended time period is 1
to 10 minutes.
WarnThreadPRI_number
Indicates the priority for the warn thread, and

the default value is 16.The bigger the value is,
the higher priority the alarm has, that is, the
smaller the value is , the lower priority the alarm
has. The recommended value is 0 to 31.
WeekReportTemplate
Indicates the path of the template of weekly

reports.
Circle
Indicates the time for testing the Transdata .

Avoid closing the Transdata due to your
disoperation. Test the Transdata at regular
intervals. If the Transdata is closed,
automatically start it. The default time is 10
minutes.
Scanmiddata
Indicates the scanning intervals. The default

time is 60 minutes.
Step 4 Add the shortcut of the TaskWatcher.exe file to the Startup folder.
----End
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

7-35
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
When the Nastar is installed, set all information about the TaskWatch.ini file based on the actual
situation. Incorrect settings for [config] may cause the failure of displaying the performance alarms.
Incorrect settings for [transdata] may cause faults in the Transdata program. Thus, the Transdata cannot
be started again. Incorrect settings for [nastar] may cause the failure of automatically generating the
daily, weekly, and monthly reports. When faults occur to the Nastar, and the Nastar is stopped, the
Nastar cannot be normally started.
7-36

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
8 Generating a Network Monitoring Report
Generating a Network Monitoring Report
About This Chapter

Section
Describes
8.1 Introduction
Introduction to the generation of network monitoring

report
8.2 Daily, Weekly and

Monthly Report
Introduction to the template setting, the generated report

and the description of results
8.3 Network Monitoring

Report
The statistics on the BSC KPIs. The BSC KPIs include

call access, call drop, handover, and performance
8.4 PCU Performance

Monitoring Report
The statistics on the PCU KPIs. The PCU KPIs include

call access, call drop, handover, and performance
8.5 Swap Comparison Report
Mainly for operators to swap the data that does not belong
to Huawei. You can use the performance import tool, that
is, Transdata, to perform the swap of the performance
data, the Nastar GSM to query the database, before swap
and after swap, and perform the common guide line
statistic of cell grade
8.6 Enhanced Traffic Statistics
The enhanced traffic statistics that can be customized

according to users' requirements
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

8-1
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
8.1 Introduction
The generation of the network monitoring report is to supply the information for monitoring
reports and warnings. The monitoring report includes the KPIs of voice service, data service,
and wireless environment. The monitoring report suggests the communication quality
completely, and makes operators serve to high-end clients.
The Nastar GSM monitoring report includes following functions:
z
Daily, weekly, and monthly report
Network monitoring report
PCU performance monitoring report
Swap comparison report
Enhanced traffic statistics
You can export daily, weekly, and monthly reports or the system automatically exports the
reports. You can customize a template and set the exporting time. According to the template,
the Nastar GSM can generate report periodically.
8.2 Daily, Weekly and Monthly Report

8.2.1 Background
The daily report is mainly for local maintenance personnel to monitor the network
performance. In initial stages, the local maintenance personnel need to learn the running status.
They can also locate network problems through the daily report. The daily, weekly and
monthly report is intended for network operators.
The weekly and monthly report provides the following functions:
z
Mastering the change trend of the network performance
Analyzing the guidance line which contains worsen trend
Making optimization and running policy scientifically.
The daily and weekly reports place particular emphasis on the change trend of KPIs.
8.2.2 Customizing a Report Template

To customize the report template, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Analysis Reports > Report Wizard.
The Dialog dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 8-1.
8-2

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Figure 8-1 Report customization template dialog box
Step 2 Click Open to select the template (dayreport.xml, weekreport.xml, or monthreport.xml) to be

customized from the directory: \Program Files\Huawei GENEX\Nastar GSM\bin.
You can also select the template that already exists in the drop-down list.
Step 3 Click New and set the path for the generated report.
Step 4 Select Day, Week, or Month from the Report Type group box.
Step 5 Set the corresponding properties for Color of Text, Color of Background, Color of Frame,
Report Format, and Font Type.
Step 6 Select KPI, Over threshold, Worst Cell, TopN, and Chart from the Report Content group
box.
Step 7 Click Next.
The KPI Dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 8-2.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

8-3
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Figure 8-2 KPI Dialog box
Step 8 Select the time ranges for statistics from the Choose Time group box.
8-4

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Step 9 Choose statistic objects from Capability Index of KPI.

For details about the buttons of this dialog box, see Table 8-1.
Table 8-1 Functions of the buttons
Button
Used to
Add the objects to the statistics field on the right.
Cancel the previous options by selecting the objects to be canceled on the
right.
Select all objects.
Delete all objects that are selected.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

8-5
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Step 10 Select the statistic methods for the KPI by selecting the items from the drop-down list in the
Method field, and then click Next.
The TopN dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 8-3.
Figure 8-3 TopN dialog box
Step 11 Type the number for the KPI in the Number field.
Step 12 Select the index to be sorted from Capability Index of TopN based on the way taken in step
10.
Step 13 Set the statistic method of the previous index, and select the index order from the drop-down
list.
8-6

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Step 14 Click Next.

The Over threshold dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 8-4.
Figure 8-4 Overthreshold dialog box
The Overthreshold dialog box lists the following operations for the overthreshold list:
z
Creating a list
Editing a list
Deleting a list
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

8-7
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
To create a list, do as follows:

z
Click Create List.

The New List dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 8-5.
Figure 8-5 New List dialog box
In the New List dialog box, enter the list name in the List Name field.
2.
Select KPIs from the KPI drop-down list.
3.
Set the value for the Compare Symbol drop-down list.
4.
Click Add to add searching conditions in the field on the left.
5.
You can also select the record in the Search Condition field, and then click Delete to
execute such an operation.
6.
Click Save, and go back to Figure 8-4.

Now a new record is added to the Overthreshold dialog box.
7.
Select the statistics objects to be viewed according to the operation described in step 10.
8.
Click Save.
A new list is created.

To edit a list, do as follows:
1.
Select the list name that is to be modified in the Overthreshold dialog box, and then
click Edit List.
The New List dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 8-5.
2.
In the New List dialog box, modify the information on the list in this figure, and then
click Save.
3.
Then, go back to the Overthreshold dialog box and select the statistics objects on the
right. Then, click Save.
Now the list editing is complete.
8-8

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
To delete a list, do as follows:

1.
In the Over threshold dialog box, select the list name to be modified.
2.
Click Delete List.
3.
Click Next.
The CHART dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 8-6.

Figure 8-6 CHART dialog box
Step 15 Select Cell Group, BSC, and NET from the Statistic Object group box.
Step 16 In the CHART dialog box, select the index whose charts require to be displayed.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

8-9
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Step 17 Set the items on the right of the dialog box.

For details about the setting of the items and their functions, see Table 8-2.
Table 8-2 Settings and functions
8-10
Setting Items
Functions
Method
Setting the method for collecting statistics on the desired objects
Chart
Setting the type of a chart
View3d
Setting the open status of table marks
Showlegend
Setting the color description of the table
Colorindex
Selecting the color of the table

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Step 18 Click Next.

The Worst Cell dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 8-7.
Figure 8-7 Worst Cell dialog box
Step 19 In the Capability Index drop-down list, select the index.

Step 20 In the Logic Symbol field drop-down list, determine the logic relation between this index and
the last condition.
Step 21 In the Operator drop-down list, select the operator, and type the value in the Result field.
Step 22 Click Add to execute such an operation to add a search condtion.
Step 23 In the Search Condition group box, select a condition.
Step 25 In the Search Index field, select the statistics index of the worst cell.
Step 26 In the Method drop-down list, select the method for collecting statistics on objects.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

8-11
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual

The daily, weekly, and monthly report templates are generated.
----End
8-12

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
8.2.3 Generating a Daily Report

Procedures
To generate the daily report, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Analysis Reports > Daily Report, as shown in Figure 8-8. Alternatively, you can
click
in the Network Monitor pane in the workspace.
Figure 8-8 Daily report command
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

8-13
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
The Daily Report dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 8-9.

Figure 8-9 Setting tab page of the Daily Report dialog box
Table 8-3 describes the elements in the Setting tab page of the Daily Report dialog box.
Table 8-3 Description of the Setting tab page
Element
Description
Report Saved Path Setting
Query Object
8-14
BSC
Clicking
report
to select a path for saving the daily
Selecting the BSC to be queried

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Element
Time Set
Description
Date
Setting the date to be queried
All Day
Time
Selecting All Day Time to generate the report of

the whole day
Busy Time
Selecting Busy Time to generate the report during

busy hours
NOTE
Click Modify Busy Time to open the Busy Time Set
dialog box. Set the begin time and the end time in the
Busy Time Set dialog box.
Step 2 On the Setting tab page, specify a path for saving the daily report, select a BSC to be queried,
and set the time to be queried.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

8-15
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Step 3 Click the Advanced tab in the Daily Report dialog box.
The Advanced tab page is displayed, as shown in Figure 8-10.
Figure 8-10 Advanced tab page of the daily report dialog box
Step 4 Type a natural number in the TopN text box. Set the decision condition for the extra busy or
idle cell and set the properties for the worst cell.
8-16

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Step 5 Select one or multiple cell groups in the VIC group box.
To add more cell groups, do as follows:
1.
Click Cell Group Manage to open the Cell Group dialog box, as shown in Figure 8-11.
In the Cell Group dialog box, you can add, delete, or modify cell groups listed in the
Cell Group box.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

8-17
2.
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Click New to create a cell group.

The New Cell Group dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 8-12.
Figure 8-12 New Cell Group dialog box
8-18
3.
In the New Cell Group dialog box, type a cell group name, and select the cells to be
added to the group.
4.
Click OK in the New Cell Group dialog box.

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Step 6 After setting the report, click OK in the Daily Report dialog box.
The generated daily report is displayed, as shown in Figure 8-13.
Figure 8-13 Daily report
----End
Introduction to the Daily Report

The daily report involves information abput cover, KPI, BSC TopN, VIC, Hot Cell, Ectra
Busy_Idle, Worst Cell, All_Day Traffic Trend.
For details about each list, see section "Introduction to the Daily Report" of 8.2.6
Introduction to the Reports."
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

8-19
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
8.2.4 Generating a Weekly Report

Procedures
To generate a weekly report, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Analysis Reports > Weekly Report, as shown in Figure 8-14. Alternatively, you can
click
Figure 8-14 Weekly report command
8-20

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
The Weekly Report dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 8-15.

Figure 8-15 Setting tab page of the weekly report dialog box
Step 2 On the Setting tab page, specify a path for saving the weekly report, select the BSC to be
queried, and set the time range to be queried.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

8-21
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Step 3 Click the Advanced tab in the Weekly Report dialog box.
Figure 8-16 Advanced tab page of the Weekly Report dialog box
Step 4 Type a natural number in the TopN text box. Set the decision condition for the extra busy or
idle cell and set the properties for the worst cell.
8-22

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Step 5 Select one or multiple cell groups as VIC cell groups in the VIC area.
For details about how to set the cell groups, see section 5.6.3 "Setting Cell Groups."
Step 6 After you complete the settings, click OK in the Weekly Report dialog box.
The generated weekly report is displayed, as shown in Figure 8-17.
Figure 8-17 Weekly report
----End
Introduction to the Weekly Report

The weekly report comprises the following sheets:
z
Cover
KPI
TopN BSC
VIC
Radio completion rate trend
Call drop rate trend
TCH congestion rate trend
SDCCH congestion rate trend
TCH availability rate trend
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

8-23
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual

z
SDCCH availability rate trend
CPU load trend
For details about each sheet, see section "Introduction to the Weekly Report" of 8.2.6
"Introduction to the Reports."
8.2.5 Generating a Monthly Report

Procedures
To generate the monthly report, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Analysis Reports > Monthly Report, as shown in Figure 8-18. Alternatively, you
can also click
8-24

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Figure 8-18 Monthly report command
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

8-25
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
The Monthly Report dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 8-19.

Figure 8-19 Setting tab of the Monthly Report dialog box
Table 8-4 describes the elements on the Setting tab page of the Monthly Report dialog box.
Table 8-4 Element on the Setting tab page
Element
Description
Report Saved Path Setting
8-26
Clicking
to specify a path for saving the
monthly report.

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Element
Description
Query Object
BSC
Selecting the BSC to be queried
Time Set
Date
Setting the date to be queried.
All Day
Time
Selecting All Day Time to generate the report for

each day in a month
Busy
Time
Selecting Busy Time to generate the report for busy

hours in a month
NOTE
Click Modify Busy Time to view the Busy Time Set dialog
box. Set the begin time and end time in the displayed Busy
Time Set dialog box.
Step 2 On the Setting tab page, specify a path for saving the monthly report, select the BSC to be
queried, and set the time to be queried.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

8-27
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Step 3 Click the Advanced tab in the Monthly Report dialog box.
Figure 8-20 Advance tab of the monthly report dialog box
Step 4 Type a natural number in the TopN text box to display the first N records.
8-28

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Step 5 Click OK in the Monthly Report dialog box.

The generated monthly report is displayed, as shown in Figure 8-21.
Figure 8-21 Monthly report
----End
Introduction to the Monthly Report

The weekly report comprises the following sheets:
z
Cover
KPI
BSC TopN
Worst cell
All day traffic trend, radio completion rate trend
Call drop rate trend
TCH congestion rate trend
SDCCH congestion rate trend
TCH availability rate trend
SDCCH availability rate trend
CPU overload trend
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

8-29
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
For details about each sheet, see section "Introduction to the Monthly Report" of 8.2.6
Introduction to the Reports."
8.2.6 Introduction to the Reports

Introduction to the Daily Report
The daily report comprises the following sheets:
z
Cover
The title consists of the name of the report and the date, for example, performance daily
report 24 August 2005. The date indicates the date when the daily report indicators are
recorded, not the date when the daily report is generated. The vendor name is also on the
cover. In this case, the vendor name is Huawei.
KPI
The Nastar GSM analyzes KPIs and resource utilization to evaluate the whole network
performance, as shown in Figure 8-22. The font color of the indicators turns red if any
exception occurs.
Figure 8-22 KPI sheet in the daily report
Exceptions may occur in the following scenarios:
8-30
Successful immediate assignments rate < 95%
TCH Assignment Success Rate < 95%
Call Setup Success Rate Due to BSS < 94%
Intra-BSC Handover Success Rate < 95%

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Intra BSC Handover Success Rate Due to Radio Reasons < 95.5%
Outgoing BSC Handover Success Rate < 90%
Outgoing BSC Handover Success Rate Due to Radio Reasons < 92%
Incoming BSC Handover Success Rate < 90%
Incoming BSC Handover Success Rate Due to Radio Reasons < 90%
Dual-band Handover Success Rate (900-1800) < 90%
Dual-band Handover Success Rate (1800-900) < 92.5%
TCH Call Drop Rate (including handover) > 1%
SDCCH Call Drop Rate > 1%
TCH Loss Rate Due to Radio Reasons >2%
Call Drop Rate < 80%
SDCCH Availability Rate < 98%
TCH Congestion Rate (in busy time) > 1%
SDCCH Congestion Rate (in busy time) > 0.8%
TCH Traffic Per Line > 0.5 (Erl)
BSC TopN
For each KPI (whole day or busy hours), the Nastar GSM finds the TopN worst cells,
and sort them in an ascending order. The default value for N is 10. You can also specify a
new value to N (1<= N <=20).
VIC
The font color of the indicators for the VIC cells turns red or orange if any exception
occurs, as shown in Figure 8-23.
Figure 8-23 VIC sheet of Daily Report
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

8-31
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
The scenarios and the associated font color are listed as follows:
Red: the Successful immediate assignments rate < 92% is true. Orange: the 92% <=
Successful immediate assignments rate < 95% is true.
Red: the 0 <= TCH Assignment Success Rate < 92% is true. Orange: the 92% <=
TCH Assignment Success Rate < 95% is true
Red: the 0 <= Call Setup Success Rate Due to BSS >= 6% is true. Orange: the 88%
<= Call Setup Success Rate Due to BSS < 92% is true.
Red: the 0 <= Intra BSC Handover Success Rate >= 90%". Orange: the 90% <
Intra BSC Handover Success Rate < 95%" is true.
Red: the 0 <= Intra BSC Handover Success Rate Due to Radio Reasons < 92% is
true. Orange: the 92% <= Intra BSC Handover Success Rate Due to Radio
Reasons < 95.5% is true.
Red: the 0 <= Outgoing BSC Handover Success Rate = 85% is true. Orange: the
85% <= Outgoing BSC Handover Success Rate < 90% is true.
Red: the 0 <= Outgoing BSC Handover Success Rate Due to Radio Reasons =
88% is true. Orange: the 88% <= Outgoing BSC Handover Success Rate < 92% is
true.
Red: the 0 <= Incoming BSC Handover Success Rate = 85% is true. Orange: the
Red: the 0 <= Incoming BSC Handover Success Rate Due to Radio Reasons =
85% is true. Orange: the 85% <= Incoming BSC Handover Success Rate Due to
Radio Reasons < 90% is true.
Red: the 0 <= Dual-band Handover Success Rate (900-1800) = 88% is true. Orange:
the 88% <= Dual-band Handover Success Rate (900-1800) < 93% is true.
the 88% <= Dual-band Handover Success Rate (1800-900) < 92.5% is true.
Red: the 2% <= TCH Call Drop Rate (including handover) is true. Orange: the 1%
<= TCH Call Drop Rate (including handover) < 2% is true.
Red: the 2% <= SDCCH Call Drop Rate = 88% is true. Orange: the 1% <= SDCCH
Call Drop Rate < 2% is true.
Red: the 1.5% <= TCH Loss Rate Due to Radio Reasons is true. Orange: the 0.8%
<= TCH Loss Rate Due to Radio Reasons < 1.5% is true.
Red: the 3% <= TCH Loss Rate Due to Handover is true. Orange: the 2% <= TCH
Loss Rate Due to Handover < 3% is true.
Red: the 0 <= TCH Availability Rate = 95% is true. Orange: the 95% <= TCH Loss
Rate Due to Radio Reasons < 98% is true.
Red: the 0 <= SDCCH Availability Rate = 95% is true. Orange: the 95% <=
SDCCH Availability Rate < 98% is true.
Red: the 2% <= TCH Congestion Rate (in busy time) = 95% is true. Orange: the
1% <= TCH Congestion Rate (in busy time) < 2% is true.
Red: the 1.5% <= SDCCH Congestion Rate (in busy time) = 95% is true. Orange:
the 0.8% <= SDCCH Congestion Rate (in busy time) < 1.5% is true.
Red: the 0.8% <= TCH Traffic Per Line (Erl) is true. Orange: the 0.5% <= TCH
Traffic Per Line (Erl) < 0.8% is true.
Hot Cell
According to the whole traffic of the cell in busy hour, the Nastar GSM finds the Top 10
busiest cells for each BSC, and displays the related KPIs. If a cell is a VIC cell, the
background of the cell is highlighted in yellow.
8-32

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
z
Extra-busy and extra-idle cells

The Nastar GSM lists all extra-busy and extra-idle cells, and displays the related KPIs.
Worst Cell
The Nastar GSM lists the worst cell for each BSC, and displays the related KPIs.
All-Day Traffic Trend

For the whole network and each BSC, the Nastar GSM collects the statistics of the
whole-day traffic by hour.
Introduction to the Weekly Report

The weekly report includes the following sheets:
z
KPI
The Nastar GSM analyzes KPIs and resource utilization ratio to evaluate the whole
network performance, as shown in Figure 8-24. The values of the associated indicators
are the whole statistical result of the seven days. The font color of the indicators turns
red if any exception occurs.
Figure 8-24 KPI sheet of the weekly report
Exception may occur in the following scenarios:
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

8-33
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Intra-BSC Handover Success Rate < 95%
Intra-BSC Handover Success Rate Due to Radio Reasons < 95.5%
BSC TopN
For each KPI (whole-week statistics), the Nastar GSM finds the TopN worst cells, and
sorts them in an ascending order. The default value for N is 10. You can also assign a
new value to N (1<= N <=20).
8-34

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
z
VIC
The font color of the indicators for the VIC cells turns red or orange if any exceptions
occur, as shown in Figure 8-25.
Figure 8-25 VIC sheet of weekly report
The scenarios and the associated font color are listed as follows:
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)
Red: the Successful immediate assignments rate < 92% is true. Orange: the 92% <=
Successful immediate assignments rate < 95% is true.
Red: the 0 <= TCH Assignment Success Rate < 92% is true. Orange: the 92% <=
TCH Assignment Success Rate < 95% is true
Red: the the 0 <= Call Setup Success Rate Due to BSS >= 6% is true. Orange: the
88% <= Call Setup Success Rate Due to BSS < 92% is true.
Red: the 0 <= Intra BSC Handover Success Rate >= 90%". Orange: the 90% <
Intra BSC Handover Success Rate < 95%" is true.
Red: the 0 <= Intra BSC Handover Success Rate Due to Radio Reasons < 92% is
true. Orange: the 92% <= Intra BSC Handover Success Rate Due to Radio
Reasons < 95.5% is true.
Red: the 0 <= Outgoing BSC Handover Success Rate = 85% is true. Orange: the
Red: the 0 <= Outgoing BSC Handover Success Rate Due to Radio Reasons =
88% is true. Orange: the 88% <= Outgoing BSC Handover Success Rate < 92% is
true.
Red: the 0 <= Incoming BSC Handover Success Rate = 85% is true. Orange: the

8-35
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Red: the 0 <= Incoming BSC Handover Success Rate Due to Radio Reasons =
85% is true. Orange: the 85% <= Incoming BSC Handover Success Rate Due to
Radio Reasons < 90% is true.
the 88% <= Dual-band Handover Success Rate (900-1800) < 93% is true.
the 88% <= Dual-band Handover Success Rate (1800-900)< 92.5% is true.
Red: the 2% <= TCH Call Drop Rate (including handover) is true. Orange: the 1%
<= TCH Call Drop Rate (including handover) < 2% is true.
Red: the 2% <= SDCCH Call Drop Rate = 88% is true. Orange: the 1% <= SDCCH
Call Drop Rate < 2% is true.
Red: the 1.5% <= TCH Loss Rate Due to Radio Reasons is true. Orange: the 0.8%
<= TCH Loss Rate Due to Radio Reasons < 1.5% is true.
Red: the 3% <= TCH Loss Rate Due to Handover is true. Orange: the 2% <= TCH
Loss Rate Due to Handover < 3% is true.
Red: the 0 <= TCH Availability Rate = 95% is true. Orange: the 95% <= TCH Loss
Rate Due to Radio Reasons < 98% is true.
Red: the 0 <= SDCCH Availability Rate = 95% is true. Orange: the 95% <=
SDCCH Availability Rate < 98% is true.
Red: the 2% <= TCH Congestion Rate (in busy time) = 95% is true. Orange: the
1% <= TCH Congestion Rate (in busy time) < 2% is true.
Red: the 1.5% <= SDCCH Congestion Rate (in busy time) = 95% is true. Orange:
the 0.8% <= SDCCH Congestion Rate (in busy time) < 1.5% is true.
Red: the 0.8% <= TCH Traffic Per Line (Erl) is true. Orange: the 0.5% <= TCH
Traffic Per Line (Erl) < 0.8% is true.
All-Week Traffic Trend

This sheet consists of the weekly traffic trend of the whole network and of each BSC.
All-Week Radio Completion Rate Trend

This sheet is about the radio completion rate of the whole network and of each BSC in
busy hour.
All-Week Call-Drop Rate Trend

This sheet is about the call-drop rate of the whole network and of each BSC in busy hour.
All-Week TCH Congestion Rate Trend

This sheet is about the TCH congestion rate of the whole network and of each BSC in
busy hour.
All-Week SDCCH Congestion Rate Trend

This sheet is about the SDCCH congestion rate of the whole network and of each BSC in
busy hour.
All-Week TCH Availability Rate Trend

This sheet is about the TCH availability rate of the whole network and of each BSC in
busy hour.
All-Week SDCCH Availability Rate Trend

This sheet is about the SDCCH availability rate of the whole network and of each BSC
in busy hour.
All-Week CPU Overload Trend

This sheet is about the CPU overload trend of each BSC in busy hour.
8-36

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Introduction to the Monthly Report

The monthly report comprises the following sheets:
z
KPI
The Nastar GSM analyzes KPIs and resource utilization ratio to evaluate the whole
network performance. The indicators suggest the performance in one month. The font of
the associated indicators turns red if any exceptions occur.
Exceptions may occur in the following scenarios:
Intra BSC Handover Success Rate < 95%
Intra BSC Handover Success Rate Due to Radio Reasons < 95.5%
BSC TopN
For each KPI (whole-month statistics), the Nastar GSM finds the worst N cells, and sorts
them in an ascending order. The default value for N is 10. You can also assign a new
value to N (1<= N <=20).
Worst Cell
This sheet lists worst cells in the last day of a month, and the frequency of a cell that
turns into the worst cell.
All-Day Traffic Trend

This sheet is about the all-day traffic of the whole network and of each BSC.
Radio Completion Rate Trend

This sheet is about the radio completion rate in busy hour of the whole network and of
each BSC.
Call-Drop Rate Trend

This sheet is about the call-drop rate in busy hour of the whole network and of the each
BSC.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)
TCH Congestion Rate Trend

8-37
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
This sheet is about the TCH congestion rate in busy hour of the whole network and of
each BSC.
z
SDCCH Congestion Rate Trend

This sheet is about the SDCCH congestion rate in busy hour of the whole network and of
each BSC.
TCH Availability Rate Trend

This sheet is about the TCH availability rate in busy hour of the whole network and of
each BSC.
SDCCH Availability Rate Trend

This sheet is about the SDCCH availability rate in busy hour of the whole network and
of each BSC.
CPU Overload Trend

This sheet is about the CPU overload rate in busy hour of each BSC.
8.2.7 Configuring the Daily, Weekly and Monthly Report

The daily, weekly and monthly timing report is finished automatically through TaskWatcher.
The procedure for configuring the TaskWatcher, see section 7.4 "Setting the Performance
Alarms."
8.3 Network Monitoring Report

According to statistical analysis on KPIs of the BSC traffic statistics, the Nastar GSM
generates a monitoring report to help engineers in different regions and in the headquarter to
familiarize themselves with the performance of each sub-network in the global network.
8.3.1 Background
The network monitoring report specially used for local engineers, the local engineers and
managers can learn the network status and network performance with efficiency from the
report.
The monitoring report can be categorized into the following types:
z
Engineer (BSC/CELL) monitoring report

Engineer monitoring report supplies details about network performance items, including
KPI sorting and graph analysis from BSC to cell. It is convenient for engineers to master
the whole performance status, learn the trend of network performance, and locate any
possible problem.
Team leader (network/BSC )monitoring report

Team leader monitoring report reflects the whole performance status of network. The
team leader monitoring report includes KPI sorting and trend analysis of the whole
network and BSC. It is convenient for team leaders to master the whole performance
status and to perform the trend of network performance task.
Comparison monitoring report

Comparison monitoring report supports the network-level KPI analysis, compares the
improved status with the former one, and validates the optimized configuration.
8-38

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
8.3.2 Generating the Network Monitoring Report

The setting interface of generating the network monitoring report contains the following parts:
z
You can choose a BSC or a cell group to be monitored or choose several BSCs or several
cell groups to generate the network monitoring reports orderly. The number of the BSCs
and cell groups are not limited.
You can enter the statistic begin and end date.
You can choose busy time, all-day, or other user-defined time.
You can generate the engineer monitoring report, team leader monitoring report, and
comparison monitoring report.
To generate an engineer report, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Choose Analysis Reports > Network Monitor Report, as shown in Figure 8-26. Or click
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

8-39
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Figure 8-26 Network Monitoring Report command
8-40

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
The Network Monitoring Report dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 8-27.
Figure 8-27 Network Monitoring Report dialog box
Step 2 Click
to select a save path for the network monitoring report. Or you can use the
default directory.
Step 3 Select a BSC to be queried from the BSC list.
z
You can add, edit, or delete the cell group through Group Management. Click Cell
Group Management to view the Cell Group dialog box.
In the Cell Group dialog box, you can add a cell group by clicking New. You can also
delete or modify cell groups listed in the Cell Group box.
Step 4 Select the associated option based on your requirement.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

8-41
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual

z
Select Engineer Report to generate an engineer report.
Select Team Leader Report to generate a team leader report.
Select Compare Report to generate a compared report.
Step 5 Select the begin date and end date in Begin Date and End Date fields.
Step 6 Select All-Day to generate a report of whole day.
Select Busy Hour to generate a report for busy-hour traffic.
Click Change Busy Hour to view the Busy Hour Setting dialog box, and set the busy hour.
Select Other Time to generate a report for traffic in other time periods.
8-42

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Step 7 Select the Advanced tab page, as shown in Figure 8-28.

Figure 8-28 Network Monitor Report Advanced tab page
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

8-43
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Step 8 Set the TopN.

Table 8-5 shows the setting options of the TopN.
Table 8-5 TopN
Options
Description
Value N
The default value N is 10. You can set the value N from 1 to 50.
Filtration setting
Index
The drop-down list shows all the indexes, as

shown in Figure 8-29
Condition 1
The first drop-down list is index, as shown in

Figure 8-29.
The second drop-down list is the relationship.
The relationship contains >, < >=, <= == and !=.
The third drop-down list is the value control box.
The initial value is NULL, you should input the
float value.
Condition 2
See condition 1. The relationship between

condition 1 and condition 2 is AND.
Clear all
Set all the chosen index condition as the status of

not choose, but user selecting or entering data is
not cleared. User select or input data is saved by
the program and defines the initial data when you
use the function the next time.
Select all
Select all the conditions.
Figure 8-29 Index
8-44

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Step 9 Set the VIC.

You can add, edit, or delete the cell group through Group Management.
z
If you select the VIC cell, the VIC page shows the selected cell content in the report.
If you have never selected a cell as a VIC cell, two conditions are described as follows:
Searching object is BSC, all the cells of the BSC are defined as the VIC cells.
Searching object is cell group, all the cells of the cell group are defined as the VIC
cells.
Step 10 Set the KPI baseline.

1.
Select an index. Set two thresholds for the index, the two thresholds are colored for the
index.
2.
Click Default, the Huawei KPI baseline initializes the threshold.
The lower limit of excellent network is not always larger than the lower limit of normal
network.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

8-45
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Step 11 Click OK in the Network Monitor Report dialog box.

The Network Monitor Report result is displayed, as shown in Figure 8-30.
Figure 8-30 Network Monitoring Report
----End
8-46

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Select Team Leader Report in the Report Type group box in the Network Monitor Report dialog box
to generate a team leader report. The other settings are similar to those in the engineer report.
Select Compare Report in the Report Type group box in the Network Monitor Report dialog box to
generate a comparison report. The other settings are similar to those in the engineer report.
8.3.3 Report Description

Engineer Monitoring Report
The engineer monitoring report is used to monitor the BSC KPIs and cell KPIs. The default
statistical period is seven days. You can set the period for collecting statistics. A report is
generated based on each selected BSC. If you plan to select several BSCs, several engineer
monitoring reports are generated at the same time.
Table 8-6 Sheets in the engineer monitoring report
Sheet
Description
Cover
Lists information of the selected BSC:

z
Project name
BSC ID
BSC IP address
Numbers of BSCs and cells
BSC version
Network project stage
Time and period for the statistical data
Performance data
Value of each KPI during the statistic period
Detailed analysis of the related KPIs
BSC KPI
Displays the overview of the KPI statistics for each day and shows the
trend of each KPI in a chart.
TopN cells with

exceptional KPIs
Lists TopN cells. If a TopN cell is a VIC cell, the VIC cell should be
labeled. The TopN cells are sorted based on the first indictor. Detailed
analysis is also provided in the associated links.
TopN cells with

exceptional
indicators
Provides detailed analysis on the TopN cells with exceptional

indicators. These indicators include accessibility, handover, traffic,
resource utilization rate, and call drop.
If a TopN cell is a VIC cell, the VIC cell should be labeled. The
analysis should cover failure analysis, service analysis, and process
analysis.
VIC KPI
Lists the value of each indicator in the period of statistics collection.
Readme
Defines the excellent and passing thresholds for each KPI and the
display modes for actual KPI values.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

8-47
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Team Leader Monitoring Report

The team leader monitoring report is used to monitor the BSC KPIs in the entire network. The
default statistical period is seven days. You can set a period for the statistics collection.
A team leader monitoring report is generated based on the selected BSC.
Table 8-7 Sheets in the team leader monitoring report
Sheet
Description
Cover
Lists information of the selected BSC. The information includes the following
items:
z
Project name
BSC ID
BSC IP address
Numbers of BTSs and cells
BSC version
Project period of the network
Statistic time and period
Performance data
Network
KPI
Analyze the trend of all the BSC or cell group KPI index. Display the KPI
index of each day data in the statistic time period and the related trend chart,
you can link the KPI index of each day data to the related trend chart.
BSC KPI
Displays the overview of the KPI statistics for each day and shows the trend
of each KPI in a chart.
Readme
Defines the excellent and passing thresholds for each KPI and the display
modes for actual KPI values.
Comparison Monitoring Report

The comparison monitoring report is used to give the changes of the BSC KPI of different
statistical periods. You need to set the start date and measurement period for both the
comparison and the statistics collection. The default statistical period is seven days. You can
set a period for the statistics collection.
A comparison monitoring report is generated based on the selected BSC.
8-48

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Table 8-8 Sheets in the comparison monitoring report

Sheet
Description
Cover
Lists information of the selected BSC. The information includes the

following items:
z
Project name
BSC ID
BSC IP address
BSC version
KPI trend
Exceptional KPIs
BSC KPI
Displays the overview of the KPI statistics for each day and shows the trend
of each KPI in a chart.
Readme
Defines the excellent and passing thresholds for each KPI and the display
modes for actual KPI values.
8.4 PCU Performance Monitoring Report

8.4.1 Background
The PCU performance monitoring report is the statistic on the PCU KPIs. The PCU KPIs
includes call access, call drop, handover, and the performance. The PCU performance
monitoring report monitors the data operating completely and in time.
For details about the background of PCU performance monitoring report, see section 8.3.1
"Background."
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

8-49
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
8.4.2 Generating the PCU Performance Monitoring Report

To generate the PCU network monitor report, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Analysis Reports > PCU Network Monitor Report, as shown in Figure 8-31.
Figure 8-31 Analysis Reports menu
8-50

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Or click
button from the workspace on the left pane.
The PCU Network Monitoring Report dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 8-32.
Figure 8-32 PCU Network Monitoring Report dialog box
Table 8-9 describes the elements in the Network Monitor Report dialog box.
Table 8-9 Description of the Network Monitor Report dialog box
Element
Description
File Output
Click
to select a save path for the network monitor report. Or
you can use the default directory.
PCU
Select PCU from the PCU list.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

8-51
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Element
Description
Report Type
Select the associated option based on your requirement.

Select Engineer Report to generate an engineer report.
Select Team Leader Report to generate a team leader report.
Select Compare Report to generate a compare report.
Statistic Date
Select the begin date and end date in Begin Date and End Date fields.
Type a value in the Compare Cycle (days) field. The value must be an
integer within the range from 1 to 31.
NOTE
If the integer is beyond the range listed previously, the system prompts you to
enter a valid value.
Statistic Time
Set the statistic time.
Step 2 Set the settings of the Network Monitor Report dialog box, as described in Table 8-9.
Step 3 Click OK in the Network Monitor Report dialog box.
The Network Monitor Report is generated, according to the settings in the Network
Monitor Report dialog box.
----End

The PCU network monitor report is categorized into the following types:
z
Engineer Report
Team Leader Report
Compare Report
The PCU network monitor report aims at monitoring the KPIs of a cell. The default statistical
period is one day. You can modify the default period according to your requirements. The
PCU network monitor report is generated according to the selected PCU. Each PCU generates
one report. You can select multiple PCUs at a time and generate multiple team leader reports.
8-52

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Introduction to the Engineer Report

The Engineer Report of PCU network monitor is generated according to selected PCU. The
engineer report type of the PCU network monitoring report is displayed, as shown in Figure
8-33.
Figure 8-33 Engineer report type of the PCU network monitoring report
Table 8-10 describes the functions of each sheet in the Engineer Report.
Table 8-10 Functions of each sheet in Engineer Report
Sheet
Description
Cover
Lists information about the statistic PCU:
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)
Project name
PCU ID
PCU IP
PCU version
Performance statistics

8-53
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
8-54
Sheet
Description
PCU KPI
trend of each KPI in a chart.
TopN
Lists Top 10 cells and their related indicators.
Accessibility
Lists the cell name and time of the Top 10 cells and their related
indicators.
Retainability
indicators.
Throughput
( Um )
indicators.
Throughput
( GB )
indicators.
Resource
Utilization
indicators.
VIC KPI
Lists the detailed performance indicator for all of the hot cells.

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Introduction to the Team Leader Report

The PCU network monitoring report of Team Leader Report type is displayed, as shown in
Figure 8-34.
Figure 8-34 The PCU network monitoring report of Team leader report type
Table 8-11 describes the functions of each sheet in Team Leader Report.
Table 8-11 Function of each sheet in Team Leader Report
Sheet
Description
Cover
Lists information about the statistic PCU. The information

includes the following items:
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)
Project name
PCU ID
PCU IP
PCU version

8-55
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Sheet
Description
PCU KPI
Displays the overview of the KPI statistics for each day and shows
the trend of each KPI in a chart.
Introduction to the Compare Report

The PCU network monitoring report of Compare Report type is displayed, as shown in
Figure 8-35.
Figure 8-35 The PCU network monitoring report of Compare Report type
8-56

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Table 8-12 describes the functions of each sheet in Compare Report.

Table 8-12 Function of each sheet in Compare Report
Sheet
Description
Cover
Lists information about the statistic PCU. The information includes the
following items:
z
Project name
PCU ID
PCU IP
PCU version
NOTE
Statistic begin time is compare time.
PCU KPI
trend of each KPI in a chart, however, the value of compared is displayed in
a chart.
8.5 Swap Comparison Report

8.5.1 Background
The swap comparison report is used for operators to swap the data that does not belong to
Huawei. You can swap other vendors' data to Huawei equipment
z
After swapping is complete, you need to provide the related synchronization swap
function of traffic data. You can use the traffic data import tool Transdata of Nastar GSM
to perform the traffic data swap.
The Nastar GSM also supplies the common KPI statistic function for before and after
swap. You can use the Nastar GSM to query database traffic about before swap and after
swap.
The swap comparison report is convenient for users to know the change status of network
performance.
8.5.2 Generating the Swap Comparison Report

The sheet range of the swap comparison report can be set, as follows:
z
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)
You can choose the statistical cell group. You can choose more than one cell groups to
generate the report. The numbers of the swap comparison reports are not limited..

8-57
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual

z
You can input the date before swap, after swap, and during a statistic cycle.
You can choose busy time, all day, and other.
You can set the extra worse cell.
To generate the swap comparison report, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Choose Analysis Reports > Swap Comparison Report, as shown in Figure 8-36.
Figure 8-36 Swap Comparison Report
Or click
8-58

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
The Swap Comparison Report dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 8-37.
Figure 8-37 Swap Compare
Step 2 Click
directory.
to select a save path for the network monitor report. Or you can use the default
Step 3 Set statistic date, statistic date before swap, statistic date after swap, and comparison period of
the swap. The comparison period of the swap is from 0 to 31.
Step 4 Set statistic time. The default time is all-day. You can set several busy time, but the busiest
time is three, or set other time.
Step 5 The extra bad cell setting contains TCH Traffic per line ( ERL ), TCH Call Drop Rate
( Including Hanover% ), TCH Congestion Rate ( Including Handover% ). The default
values are 0.1, 3 and 5. You can change the values. Set the parameters in the Swap Compare
dialog box based on the descriptions in the table.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

8-59
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Step 6 Click OK in the Swap Compare dialog box.

The Swap Comparison report is displayed, as shown in Figure 8-38.
Figure 8-38 Swap Comparison Report
----End

You can compare the KPI before swap with that after swap. The default statistic cycle is seven
days. You can change the date period. The swap comparison report takes the cell group as the
statistic object, you can do statistic according to the selected time range.
8-60

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Table 8-13 describes the functions of each sheet in the Swap Comparison Report.
Table 8-13 Sheets in the swap comparison report
Sheet
Cover
CellGroup KPI
Compare
Description
Listing information about the statistic Swap Compare Report:
z
Project name
BSC/Net Name
Numbers of BTS
Numbers of CELL
Numbers of transceiver (TRX)
BSC Version
Project Phase
TCH traffic volume
Swap compare time
Update time
Displaying the overview of the cell group KPI statistics for each day
and shows the trend of each KPI in a chart
Displaying the KPI change trend by the way of displaying on map
Cell KPI
Displaying the overview of the cell KPI statistics for each day and
shows the trend of each KPI in a chart.
Displaying the KPI change trend by the way of displaying on map
Readme
Describing the definition of key performance items, the legend of key

performance items, symbol note and formula
8.6 Enhanced Traffic Statistics

8.6.1 Background
Enhanced traffic statistics can be customized based on various demands of different customers.
Using this method, you can execute the arithmetic operation, including summing up, average,
maximum, and minimum, according to dates, periods, cells, cell groups, and different
categories of BSCs.
The enhanced traffic statistics involves the following two operations:
z
Setting the template of traffic statistics
Querying the template of traffic statistics
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

8-61
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
8.6.2 Setting the Template of Traffic Statistics

To set the template of traffic statistics, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Analysis Reports > Traffic Statistics
The Report Output dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 8-39.
Figure 8-39 Report Output dialog box
8-62

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Table 8-14 shows the parameters setting.

Table 8-14 Output setting of the report
Setting Item
Setting type
Setting Description
Report name
Enter the report name
Report introduction
Input the description information of

the report
Export mode
Select Horizontal Form from

Vertical Form
Horizontal Form refers to

the report output in the form
of a horizontal table by hour
Vertical Form refers to the
report output in the form of a
vertical table by hour.
Statistic date
Input begin and end date, select

Type as Whole or List
Whole refers to the

arithmetic operation to the
selected range of time. The
result is a generated record.
The algorithm for each index
varies, which is based on
different settings for the
arithmetic operations, such
as summing up and
maximum.
List refers to the detailed
information about the
selected range of time. For
example, from 8 to 12, four
detailed messages are
generated.
Statistic time
Set statistic time period

Select Type as Whole, List or
Actual Busy Hour
Statistic Object
Set statistic object type
Actual Busy Hour refers to

the hour that experiences the
busiest traffic.
There are three types: cell,
cell group, and BSC
If a cell is selected, the
information listed in the
combo box is that of the cell.
The entire template statistics
is based on the selected cell.
Likewise, if a cell group or a
BSC is selected, the listed
information is about the
previous indexes
respectively.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

8-63
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Setting Item
Setting type
Setting Description
Choose Index
Select statistic object type and

object.
Multiple indexes can be

chosen. Each has different
algorithm such as summing
up, average number. The
indexes vary with the
statistic date and time.
For some frequently used templates, click Save on the upper right corner, as shown in Figure
8-40.
Figure 8-40 Saving a template
8-64

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
For the templates that are no more used, perform the following step:
Choose Performance Analysis > Frequently Used Statistic Template, and then click Delete on the
upper right corner.
----End
8.6.3 Generating the Traffic Statistic Report

Querying the template of traffic statistics involves the following frequently used operations:
z
Querying the common template

Choose Analysis Reports > Common Statistics, and select the required template. In the
displayed dialog box, click Report Output at the bottom.
Querying the temporary template

Choose Analysis Reports > Enhanced Traffic Statistics.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

8-65
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
At the prompt, type the methods of data statistics accordingly, and then click Report
Output at the bottom of the dialog box, as shown in Figure 8-41.
Figure 8-41 Report output
8-66

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
An .xls report is generated. as shown in Figure 8-42 .

Figure 8-42 Generating an .xls report

Generating the traffic statistic report contains the following two parts.
z
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)
.xls report template for common use
According to the template setting, a generated report consists of object name, statistic
begin time, statistic end time, statistic time range and each KPI value in created
template.
You can analyze the generated result secondly. For details about the content, see
section 5.7.1 "Operating the Analysis Table."

8-67
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual

z
8-68
.xls report template for temporary use
Firstly, Setting template, and generating the related report
Secondly, analyzing the generated result for details about the content, see section5.7.1
"Operating the Analysis Table."

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
9 Further Locating Network Problems
Further Locating Network Problems
About This Chapter

Section
Describes
9.1 Introduction
Introduction to the function of the locating the network

problems
9.2 Analyzing the

Configuration
Description of how to use the Nastar GSM to check the

configuration data and generate the check report
9.3 Querying Performance

Data
Introduction to the performance guide line, the querying

performance guide line conditions, and how to draw
query result, performance guide line geographical
9.4 Analyzing Performance
Introduction to the KPI performance, the performance of

PS KPIs, the cell accessibility, the retainability
performance, the inter-cell handover and the outgoing
inter-cell handover
9.5 Analyzing Frequency
Introduction to the frequency
9.6 Analyzing Neighbors
Introduction to the neighbors
9.7 Analyzing the TRX

Measurement Performance
Introduction to the half rate and full rate of TRX

measurement performance
9.8 Analyzing Antenna &

Feeder
Introduction to the locating problems of the antenna &

feeder system
9.9 Analyzing Uplink

Interference (BSC32)
Analyzing the uplink interference problems.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

9-1
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
9.1 Introduction
As to the Huawei GSM network, the Nastar GSM provides the following functions:
z
Configuration analysis
Performance analysis
Neighbors analysis
Frequency analysis
TRX measurement report analysis
Antenna & feeder report analysis
Uplink interference analysis
9.2 Analyzing the Configuration

9.2.1 Background
In the process of optimizing the network, you can use the Nastar GSM to check whether
configuration data is reasonable and to generate a check report.
Table 9-1 describes the function of the configuration analysis.
Table 9-1 Description of configuration analysis
9-2
Function
Description
Analyzing the Frequency

Optimization
In the process of optimizing the network, you can use the

Nastar GSM to check whether configuration data is
reasonable and to generate a check report.
Planning Neighbors and

Configuration Check Report
The data of configuration check report is frequency

planning and neighbor relation of user planning or
optimized adjusting.
Configuration Check Report
The configuration parameters compare appointed BSC

configuration parameters and appointed template base line,
export the configuration parameters different with the
template base line, then generate the configuration check
report
Configuration Parameters
Comparison Report
For the key configuration parameters of the BSC, the

Nastar GSM takes the latest data comparison of the history
data, export the changed configuration parameters, and
generate the configuration parameter compare report
Geographical Display for

Configuration Parameters
The Nastar GSM supplies the function of displaying the key

configuration parameters of cell on map.

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Function
Description
Using Configuration
Parameters to Update
Project Parameters
You can use configuration parameters to update project

parameters, and keep consistent with present network data.
You can refer to the newest project parameter in other place
conveniently.
9.2.2 Analyzing the Frequency Optimization

Auto Frequency Optimization Report
To generate the frequency optimization report, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Analysis Reports > Auto Frequency Optimization Report, an Auto Frequency
Optimization Report dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 9-1.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

9-3
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Figure 9-1 Auto Frequency Optimization Report dialog box
Step 2 Click
to select a save path for auto frequency optimization report. Or you can use the
default directory.
Step 3 Select a BSC from the BSC list.
The default choice is BSC Top10. You can also choose Select 10 Cells (Must In One BSC).
If you choose the latter, the Export Script function in the Advance Setting tab page is disabled.
Step 4 Click the Advance Setting tab page.

z
9-4
If the related data has not been imported from Transdata, the tab page is displayed, as

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Figure 9-2 Auto Frequency Optimization Report (No data there)
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)
If the related data has been imported from the Transdata, an Advance Setting dialog box
is displayed, as shown in Figure 9-3.

9-5
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Figure 9-3 Advance Setting tab page of the Auto Frequency Optimization Report dialog box
Step 5 Set Frequency band.

Select a band from the Frequency band drop-down list to analysis.
The Frequency band drop-down list enabled only when the related data is imported from the Transdata.
There are four bands, P-GSM, E-GSM, R-GSM, and DCS1800.
9-6

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Step 6 You can choose three range bands at most.

Table 9-2 shows the frequency band and the related frequency range.
Table 9-2 Frequency band and range
Frequency Band
Frequency Range
P-GSM
From 1 to 124
E-GSM
From 975 to 1023
R-GSM
From 955 to 974
DCS1800
From 512 to 885
The export setting item is optional. You can choose or clear the Export Script check box.
Meanwhile, you can set Save Path.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

9-7
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Step 7 Click OK on the Advance Setting tab page of the Auto Frequency Optimization Report
dialog box.
The Auto Frequency Optimization Report is displayed, as shown in Figure 9-4.
Figure 9-4 Auto Frequency Optimization Report
----End
Report Description
The Auto Frequency Optimization Report mainly comprises following sheets:
z
Overview
The Overview describes all items and displays the Whole NET BCCH Interference Max
TOP 10, the Whole NET BCCH Interference Average TOP 10, the Whole NET TCH
Interference Max TOP 10, and the Whole NET TCH Interference Average TOP 10 in the
form of a chart.
Whole NET BCCH Interference Max TOP 10 analysis

The Whole NET BCCH Interference Max TOP 10 analysis displays the result of the
Whole NET BCCH Interference Max TOP 10, including Interference Power Value of
9-8

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
each cell, fluctuate neighbor frequency information and chart, recommended Power
Value, fluctuate neighbor frequency information and chart of the recommended Power
Value.
z
Whole NET BCCH Interference Average TOP 10

The Whole NET BCCH Interference Average TOP 10 displays the result of the Whole
NET BCCH Interference Average TOP 10, including interference Power Value of each
cell, fluctuate neighbor frequency information and chart, recommended Power Value,
fluctuate neighbor frequency information about the recommended Power Value.
Whole NET TCH Interference Max TOP 10

The Whole NET TCH Interference Max TOP 10 displays the result of the Whole NET
TCH Interference Max TOP 10, including interference Power Value of each cell,
fluctuate neighbor frequency information and chart, recommended Power Value,
fluctuate neighbor frequency information and chart of the recommended Power Value.
Whole NET TCH Interference Average TOP 10

The Whole NET TCH Interference Average top 10 displays the result of the Whole NET
TCH Interference Average TOP 10, including interference Power Value of each cell,
fluctuate neighbor frequency information and chart, recommended Power Value,
fluctuate neighbor frequency information and chart of the recommended Power Value.
z
When you choose Select 10 Cells (Must In One BSC) in Base Setting, the former 10 cells are
chosen by default.
Only if there is related data of up Power Value in database, the Band Setting and Range Setting is
active.
If you choose Export Script, the Export Script will generate .txt file in the related directory.
If the Auto Frequency Optimization Report exists blank value in the auto frequency check report, the
sign is displayed.
9.2.3 Planning Neighbors and Configuration Check Report

Check the rationality of the project parameters to prevent the irrational parameters from being
imported.
To generate the result of checking in an .xls format, perform the following steps:
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

9-9
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Step 1 Choose Analysis Reports > ProjectPara Check Report Analysis.

The Project Parameter Check dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 9-5.
Figure 9-5 Project Parameter Check dialog box
Step 2 Click
to select a path for saving the report, or use the default path.
Step 3 Set the Sheet Setting item.

Step 4 Set the numbers of fewer neighbor and the distance of far neighbor.
9-10

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Step 5 Click OK.

The parameter rationality check report is displayed, as shown in Figure 9-6.
Figure 9-6 ProjectPara Check Report in an .xls file
The report shows the result of frequency utilization check, channel check, Co-BCCH
Co-BSIC check, Co-BCCH&Co-BSIC check, single neighbors check, cells with fewer
neighbor check, and far neighbor check.
----End
9.2.4 Configuration Check Report

For details about configuration check report, see section 5.2.5 "Checking Parameters."
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

9-11
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
9.2.5 Configuration Parameters Comparison Report

Generating the Configuration Parameters Comparison Report
To generate the configuration parameters comparing report, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Analysis Reports > Configuration Parameters Comparison Report.
The Configuration Parameter Comparison Report dialog box is displayed, as shown in
Figure 9-7.
Figure 9-7 Configuration parameter comparison report dialog box
Table 9-3 describes the items in the Configuration Parameter Comparison Report dialog
box.
Table 9-3 Description of the Configuration parameter comparison report dialog box
9-12
Item
Description
File output
Click
to select a save path for the configuration parameter
Comparison report. Or you can use the default directory.
Select BSC
Select a BSC from the BSCs list. By default, all BSCs are chosen.

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Item
Description
Net database
The net database is current the currently chosen database. Its created
date is displayed.
Backup network
database
Select one backup net database from the Backup Name drop-down
list, to compare with the chosen Net Database.
Step 2 Set all parameters according to Table 9-3, and then click OK in the Configuration
Parameter Comparison Report dialog box, as shown in Figure 9-8.
Figure 9-8 Configure parameter compare report
----End
Each selected BSC can generate one report at a time.
Report Description
The report mainly comprises the following sheets:
z
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)
Overview
Describes all items
Displays related guide line of current BSC

9-13
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual

z
Site adjust, cell adjust, TRX adjust, frequency adjust, neighbors cell adjust, cell
parameters adjust
Displays the related site adjust information, cell adjust information, TRX adjust
information, frequency adjust information, neighbors cell adjust information, cell
parameters adjust information.
9.2.6 Geographical Display for Configuration Parameters

For details about the geographical display for configuration parameters, see section 6.2.8
"Displaying Project Parameters."
9.2.7 Using Configuration Parameters to Update Project

Parameters
For details about using configuration parameters to update project parameters, see section
"Downloading Configuration Data" of 5.2.2 "Management of Configuration Data."
9.3 Querying Performance Data

9.3.1 Background
The Nastar GSM helps you analyze the optimized data of networks, so that you can find a
problematic region quickly. It also supplies many methods for locating problems, to help you
sort the problem to cell grade and analyze the reason of a problem to original performance
statistic point.
The Nastar GSM analyzes the performance data with multi-time granularity and
multi-dimensinality method. The functions are as follows:
z
Displaying the network performance status on a map and a trend chart.
Comparing the multi-time band and multi-guideline
9.3.2 Querying Performance Guideline

For details about querying performance guideline, see section "" of
5.7.1 "Operating the Analysis Table."
9.3.3 Drawing Query Result

For details about drawing query result, see section "Quick Drawing" of 5.7.1 "Operating the
Analysis Table."
9.3.4 Geographical Performance Guideline

For details about geographical performance guideline, see section 5.7.1 "Operating the
Analysis Table."
9.3.5 TopN Sorting for Cells Performance Guide Line

This function is performed to sort the specified cells according to the values of the associated
KPIs. The TopN cell analysis helps you to view the rank of each cell based on a specified KPI.
Meanwhile, this function supports condition filtering for specified KPIs.
9-14

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
To analyze the TopN cells, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Double-click TopN Cell Analysis of the KPI Performance Analysis node on the Trouble
Shooting page.
The TopN Cell Analysis dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 9-21.
Figure 9-9 TopN Cell Analysis dialog box
Step 2 On the Query Item tab page, select a query item from the Select Query Item list.
Step 3 Enter a value in the field of Top N.
Step 4 Set the sort order.
z
If Descend is select, the query result is displayed in a descending order.
If Descend is deselected, the query result is displayed in an ascending order.
Step 5 Click Filter Setting on the Query Item tab page to set filter conditions.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

9-15
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Step 6 On the Time Range tab page, set the date and the busy hour period.
Step 7 On the Queried Objects tab page, select the object type.
z
Network Element: select cells by cell.
Network Group: select cells by cell group.
You can select a maximum of 64 cells. By default, the system queries all of the cells.
Step 8 On the Queried Objects tab page, select the objects to be queried.
Step 9 Click OK.
The query result is generated in a sheet.
----End
9.4 Analyzing Performance

9.4.1 Analyzing the KPI Performance
Analyzing BSC-Level KPI
To analyze the BSC-level KPI, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Double-click BSC-level KPI Analysis under the KPI Performance Analysis node on the
Trouble Shooting page.
9-16

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
The BSC-level KPI Analysis navigation tree is displayed, as shown in Figure 9-10.
Figure 9-10 Trouble Shooting item list
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

9-17
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
The BSC-level KPI Analysis dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 9-11.
Figure 9-11 BSC-level KPI Analysis dialog box
9-18

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Step 2 On the Time Range tab page, perform the following settings:
z
In the Date group box, set Begin Date and End date. Or click Common date to use the
default common date set by the system.
In the Time area, you can select Whole day or Busy hour. If you select Busy hour, you
can click Modify busy hour to specify the busy time, as shown in Figure 9-12.
A maximum of three busy time ranges can be specified.
Figure 9-12 Busy Time Modify dialog box
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

9-19
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Step 3 On the Queried Objects tab page, select the BSCs to be queried from the BSC list.
You can select one or multiple BSCs.
The Queried Objects tab page is displayed, as shown in Figure 9-13.
Figure 9-13 Objects tab page
Step 4 Click OK.

The query result is generated.
----End
Analyzing the BSC Overall Performance

This task is performed to analyze the indicators related to the BSC overall performance of
Huawei.
9-20

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
The procedure is the same as that described in section "Analyzing BSC-Level KPI" of 9.4.1
"Analyzing the KPI Performance."
Analyzing the Weekly Trend of the KPIs for a Cell

The function is performed to analyze the values of KPIs for all cells or for selected cells in
each day of a week according to the user-defined time and KPIs, and to display the values of
KPIs in different colors. In this way, the trend of the KPIs for a cell during a week is obtained.
To analyze the weekly trend of the KPIs for a cell, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Double-click One Week Trend of Cell's KPI Stat under the KPI Performance Analysis
node on the Trouble Shooting tab page, as shown in Figure 9-14.
Figure 9-14 Trouble Shooting tab page
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

9-21
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
The One Week Trend of Cell's KPI Stat dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 9-15.
Figure 9-15 One Week Trend of Cell's KPI Stat dialog box
Step 2 Select only one query condition on the Query Item tab page.
9-22

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Step 3 Select the Time Range tab page, a dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 9-16.
Figure 9-16 Time Range tab of the One Week Trend of Cells KPI Stat dialog box
You can perform the following settings:

z
In the Date area, select a date from the End Date drop-down list to specify the query
date, and then the system can automatically generate the begin date according to the end
date you selected. Or click Common date to use the default common date set by the
system.
can click Modify busy hour to specify the busy time, as shown in Figure 9-12. Only one
busy time period is allowed.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

9-23
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Step 4 On the Queried Objects tab page, as shown in Figure 9-17, specify the query object. You can
select the object type: Network Element or Network Group. Select the check boxes of the
desired NEs.
Figure 9-17 Queried Objects tab page of the One Week Trend of Cells KPI Stat dialog box
You can select a maximum of 64 cells. By default, the system queries all cells.
Step 5 Click OK.
----End
Analyzing the KPIs for a Cell on an Hourly Basis

This function is to analyze KPIs of the cell level or BSC level in a specified time, and displays
the results of the KPI indicators in a multi-chart view.
9-24

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
The procedure is the same as that described in section "Analyzing BSC-Level KPI" of 9.4.1
"Analyzing the KPI Performance".
Customizing the Cell Filter

During the network optimization, you can set filter conditions to filter faulty cells.
To filter out faulty cells, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Double-click User-defined Cell Filter under the KPI Performance Analysis node on the
The User-defined Cell Filter dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 9-18.
Figure 9-18 User-defined Cell Filter dialog box
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

9-25
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Step 2 Click Filter Setting on the Query Item tab page.

The Query Filter Condition dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 9-19.
Figure 9-19 Query Filter Condition dialog box
In the Query Filter Condition dialog box, perform the following settings:
z
Set AND or OR operator, field, condition, and limit value. Click OK, and then the
conditions are added to the list.
Click Condition Check to check whether the setting is correct.
Click Clear Condition to clear the setting.
After the setting is complete, click OK to return to the Query Item tab page.
9-26

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
z
In the Date area, set Begin date and End date. Or click Common date to use the
can click Modify busy hour to specify the busy time, as shown in Figure 9-20. A
maximum of three time ranges can be specified.
Step 4 On the Queried Objects tab page, specify the query object. You can select the object type:
Network Element or Network Group. Select the check boxes of the desired NEs.
Step 5 Click OK.
----End
Analyzing the TOPN Cells

Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

9-27
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
To analyze the TopN cells, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Double-click TopN Cell Analysis of the KPI Performance Analysis node on the Trouble
Shooting page.
The TopN Cell Analysis dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 9-21.
Figure 9-21 TopN Cell Analysis dialog box
Step 2 On the Query Item tab page, perform the following settings:
z
Select a query item from the Select Query Item list.

Only one item is allowed.
9-28
Set the sort order.
If Descend is selected, the query result is displayed in a descending order.
If Descend is cleared, the query result is displayed in an ascending order
Click Filter Setting on the Query Item tab page, and set filter conditions in the
displayed dialog box.
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
For details on setting filter conditions, see section "Customizing the Cell Filter" Step 2 of
9.4.1 "Analyzing the KPI Performance."
z
Step 4 On the Queried Objects tab page, specify the query object. You select the object type:
Step 5 Click OK.
----End
Drawing the Trend Chart of the KPIs for a Cell

The Cell KPI Trend Chart is used to directly analyze, query, and compare the KPIs of
multiple cells during a period. The Nastar GSM automatically draws the values of the KPIs
for a cell on three areas in the chart window. Different cells are highlighted in different colors.
To draw the trend chart of the KPIs for a cell, perform the following steps:
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

9-29
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Step 1 Double-click Cell KPI Trend Chart & Sheet of the KPI Performance Analysis node on the
The Cell KPI Trend Chart & Sheet dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 9-23.
Figure 9-23 Cell KPI Trend Chart & Sheet dialog box
Step 2 On the Items tab page, select three query items from the Select Query Item list.
z
9-30

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
z
can click Modify busy hour to specify the busy time, as shown in Figure 9-24. A
maximum of three busy time ranges are allowed.
By default, the system queries the cell indicators of the whole day.
By default, the system queries all of the cells. You can select a maximum of eight cells. When
more than eight cells are available, the system queries only the first eight cells.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

9-31
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Figure 9-25 shows the Queried Objects tab page.

Figure 9-25 Queried Objects tab page
Step 5 Click OK.

----End
Analyzing the Extra Bad Cells

You can search for the worst cells by using the filter conditions.
The filter conditions consist of the following parts:
9-32
TCH call drop occurs more than six times.
TCH traffic volume of each line ranges from 0.1 to 0.6.

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
To statistically analyze the worst cells, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Double-click Extra Bad Cell Analysis of the KPI Performance Analysis node on the
The Extra Bad Cell Analysis dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 9-26.
Figure 9-26 Extra Bad Cell Analysis dialog box
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

9-33
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
z
In the Time area, you can select Whole or Busy hour. If you select Busy hour, you can
click Modify busy hour to specify the busy time, as shown in Figure 9-27.
Step 3 On the Queried Objects tab page, specify the query object. You select the object type:
Network Element or Network Group. Select the check boxes of the desired NEs
By default, the system queries all of the cells. You can select a maximum of eight cells. When
more than eight cells are available, the system queries only eight cells.
Step 4 Click OK.
----End
9.4.2 Analyzing the Performance of PS KPIs

Analyzing the Weekly Trend of the KPIs for a Cell (PS)
The function is performed to analyze the values of KPIs for all cells or for selected cells in
each day of a week according to the user-defined time and KPIs, and display the values of
KPIs in different colors. In this way, the trend of the KPIs for a cell during a week is obtained.
9-34

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
To learn how to analyze the weekly trend of the KPIs for a cell (PS), see section "Analyzing
the Weekly Trend of the KPIs for a Cell" of 9.4.1 "Analyzing the KPI Performance."
Analyzing the KPIs for a Cell on an Hourly Basis (PS)

This function is performed to analyze KPIs of cell-level or BSC-level in a specified time, and
to display the results of the KPI indicators in a multi-chart view.
To know how to analyze the KPIs for a cell on an hourly basis (PS), see section "Analyzing
the KPIs for a Cell on an Hourly Basis" of 9.4.1 "Analyzing the KPI Performance."
Customizing the Cell Filter (PS)

During the network optimization, you can set filter conditions to filter faulty cells.
To know how to filter out problematic cell (PS), see section "Customizing the Cell Filter" of
9.4.1 "Analyzing the KPI Performance."
Analyzing TopN Cells (PS)

To know how to analyze TopN cells (PS), see section "Analyzing the TOPN Cells" of 9.4.1
"Analyzing the KPI Performance."
Drawing the Trend Chart of the KPIs for a Cell (PS)

The Cell KPI Trend Chart is used to directly analyze, query, and compare the KPIs of
multiple cells during a period. The Nastar GSM automatically draws the values of the KPIs
for a cell on three areas in the chart window. Different cells are highlighted in different colors.
To know how to draw cell KPI trend chart of the KPIs for a cell (PS), see section "Drawing
the Trend Chart of the KPIs for a Cell" of 9.4.1 "Analyzing the KPI Performance."
Analyzing the Extra Bad Cell (PS)

You can search for the worst cells using the filter conditions.
The filter conditions consist of:
z
TCH call drop occurs more than six times.
TCH traffic volume of each line ranges from 0.1 to 0.6.
To know how to statistically analyze the extra bad cells (PS), see section "Analyzing the Extra
Bad Cells" of 9.4.1 "Analyzing the KPI Performance."
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

9-35
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
9.4.3 Analyzing the Cell Accessibility

This function is performed to analyze the KPIs related to cell accessibility.
To analyze the cell accessibility, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Double-click Cell Access Analysis (BSC32) of the Accessibility node on the Trouble
Shooting page.
The Cell Access Analysis (BSC32) dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 9-28.
Figure 9-28 Cell Access Analysis dialog box
9-36

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
z
In the Date area, set Begin Date and End date. Or click Common date to use the
Step 4 Click OK.
----End
The setting of cell access analysis (BSC6000) is similar to that of cell access analysis (BSC32).
9.4.4 Analyzing the Retainability Performance

This function is performed to analyze the performance indicators related to call drop.
To analyze the SDCCH/TCH call drop, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Double-click SDCCH/TCH Drops Analysis(BSC32) of the Retainability node on the
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

9-37
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Figure 9-30 shows the SDCCH /TCH Drops Analysis (BSC32) dialog box.
Figure 9-30 SDCCH /TCH Drops Analysis(BSC32) dialog box
9-38

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
z
Step 4 Click OK.
----End
If you click Multi-View Setting during task modification, the Multi-View and Multi-Cell Setting
dialog box is displayed. You can set the index item in the Multi-View and Multi-Cell Setting window.
The setting of SDCCH/TCH Drops Analysis (BSC6000) is similar to that of SDCCH/TCH Drops
Analysis (BSC32).
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

9-39
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
9.4.5 Analyzing the Intercell Handover

To analyze the inter-cell handover, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Double-click Inter-cell Handover Analysis (BSC32) of the Mobility node on the Trouble
Shooting page.
Figure 9-32 shows the Inter-cell Handover Analysis (BSC32) dialog box.
Figure 9-32 Inter-cell handover analysis(BSC32) dialog box
9-40

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
z

Step 4 Click OK.
----End
The setting of inter-cell handover analysis (BSC6000) is similar to that of inter-cell handover analysis
(BSC32).
9.4.6 Analyzing the Outgoing Inter-cell Handover

This function is performed to analyze the KPIs related to the outgoing inter-cell handover.
The analysis method of the outgoing inter-cell handover is similar to that of the inter-cell
handover. To learn how to analyze the outgoing inter-cell handover, see section 9.4.5
"Analyzing the Intercell Handover."
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

9-41
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
9.5 Analyzing Frequency

9.5.1 Background
Frequency analysis function can check the configuration frequency in the optimization period
or programming frequency in the programming period. You can adjust the frequency in time.
During performing the frequency analysis function, the Nastar GSM provides the following
functions:
z
Supporting multiple manners of frequency analysis
Allowing you to set analysis parameters according to the network condition.
Supporting geography display
Supporting outputting the frequency modification as the Huawei facility script
There are some common functions to analyze a network, such as adjacent channel check,
co-channel and co-BSIC check, unused ARFCNS check, spectrum distribution check, co-HSN
and co-MA check, and frequency optimization check.
The Nastar GSM supports the following frequencies, as described in Table 9-4.
Table 9-4 Frequencies supported for the Nastar GSM
Type
Fl
Range of n
FU
P-GSM 900
Fl (n) = 890 + 0.2 x n
1 n 124
Fu (n) = Fl (n) + 45
E-GSM 900
Fl (n) = 890 + 0.2 x n
0 n 124
Fu (n) = Fl (n) + 45
Fl (n) = 890 + 0.2
975 n 1023
(n-1024)
R-GSM 900
Fl (n) = 890 + 0.2 x n
0 n 124
Fu (n) = Fl (n) + 45
Fl (n) = 890 + 0.2
955 n 1023
(n-1024)
DCS 1800
Fl (n) = 1710.2 + 0.2 x

(n-512)
512 n 885
Fu (n) = Fl (n) + 95
9.5.2 Checking Co-Channel and Adjacent Channel

The MA list of the hopping frequency is considered as the frequency point of the co-channel
and adjacent channel check.
9-42

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Checking Neighbor Co-Frequency by Cell

To check neighbor co-frequency by cell, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Frequency Analysis > Co-frequency Adj-frequency Check > By Cell, as shown in
Figure 9-34.
Figure 9-34 Frequency analysis by cell shortcut menu
Figure 9-35 shows the Co-Channel and Adjacent Channel Check dialog box.
Figure 9-35 Co-Channel and Adjacent Channel Check dialog box
Step 2 Enter the semi diameter of the cell for check.

Step 3 Select one or multiple items for check in the Check Option field:
z
Co-channel
Adjacent-channel
BCCH, TCH
Display labels with Distinguished BCCD and TCH
Step 4 Click OK
The mouse pointer is changed into a cross pointer.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

9-43
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Step 5 Select a cell in the Site View window, and check the co-channel and adjacent channel of the
selected cell.
The Channel check dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 9-36.
Figure 9-36 Channel check dialog box
The current channel is shown in the Current Channel field.

Step 6 You can select a frequency from the drop-down list, or click
the frequency.
or
to switch
----End
Checking Neighbor Co-Frequency by Frequency

To check neighbor co-frequency by frequency, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Frequency Analysis > Co-frequency Adj-frequency Check > By ARFCN, as
Figure 9-37 Frequency analysis by ARFCN shortcut menu
The Co-Channel and Adjacent Channel dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 9-38.
Figure 9-38 Co-Channel and Adjacent Channel Check dialog box
Step 2 Set the frequency range in the ARFCN Range field.
9-44

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Step 3 Select one or multiple items for check in the Check Option field:
z
Co-channel check
Adjacent-channel check
BCCH
TCH
Step 4 Click OK to check the co-channel and adjacent channel of the selected frequency on the
whole network.
The ARFCN Check dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 9-39.
Figure 9-39 ARFCN Check dialog box
The current frequency is shown in the Current ARFCN field of the ARFCN Check dialog
box.
Step 5 Select a frequency from the drop-down list, or click
frequency.
or
to switch the
----End
Implications of Each CI
If BCCH and TCH are both selected in the Auto Check Channel Interface dialog box, the
system marks B, T, B-T and T-T for the relevant co-channel and adjacent channel.
The meaning of each mark is listed as follows:
z
B-T: compares the BCCH and TCH to current frequency. Meanwhile, the value in TCH
is the down (upper) adjacent channel of the current frequency.
T-T: compares the TCH of this cell to current frequency. Meanwhile the upper and down
adjacent channels also exist in TCH, and the BCCH is neither adjacent nor equal to the
current frequency.
B: indicates that the BCCH of current cell is the upper (down) adjacent channel and the
TCH is neither adjacent nor equal to current frequency.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

9-45

z
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
T: indicates that only one TCH value from this cell is the up adjacent channel of current
frequency, and BCCH value is neither adjacent to nor equal to current frequency, as
shown in Figure 9-40 and Figure 9-41.
Figure 9-40 Check result of the adjacent channel
9-46

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Figure 9-41 Legend window
9.5.3 Checking Co-Channel and Co-BSIC

To check co-channel and co-BSIC, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Frequency Analysis > Co-BCCH Co-BSIC Check, as shown in Figure 9-42.
Figure 9-42 Co-BCCH Co-BSIC Check menu
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

9-47
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
The Search Co-BCCH BSIC Cells dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 9-43.
Figure 9-43 Search Co-BCCH BSIC Cells dialog box
Step 2 Select one of the following search types in the Search Select field.
z
Search by specified BCCH and BSIC

Enter the cell number of the specified BCCH and BSIC, and the cells are displayed in
certain color in the Site View window.
Search co-BCCH co-BSIC in neighbors

Search the co-BSIC cells that are mutually adjacent cells.
Search Co-BCCH Co-BSIC cells in the whole network

Search the co-channel and co-BSIC cell in the whole network, and calculate the distance
between the two cells.
9-48

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Step 3 Click OK.

The Co-channel and Co-BSIC Cell Check dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 9-44.
Figure 9-44 Co-channel and Co-BSIC cell check dialog box
Step 4 Select a cell in the Co-channel and co-BSIC Cell Check dialog box, and right-click the
selected cell to save the check result in .txt format.
Click the table header (BCCH, BSIC, or Distance) to sort out all cells based on the selected header.
Click the header once to sort out the cells in an ascending order, and double-click the header to sort out
the cells in a descending order.
----End
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

9-49
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
9.5.4 Checking Idle ARFCNS

To check the idle ARFCNS, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Frequency Analysis > Idle ARFCNS, as shown in Figure 9-45.
Figure 9-45 Idle ARFCNS menu
The Idle ARFCN Check dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 9-46.
Figure 9-46 Idle ARFCN Check dialog box
Step 2 Set the region for check.

z
Whole network
Selected area
If Selected area is selected, you can use
window to select cells.
or
on the toolbar of the Site View
Step 3 Set the frequency range.
9-50

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Step 4 Click OK to check the idle frequency.

The Idle ARFCN Query Results dialog box is displayed, showing Idle ARFCN list, Used
ARFCN and times, as shown in Figure 9-47.
Figure 9-47 Idle ARFCN Query Results dialog box
----End
9.5.5 Checking Spectrum Utilization Rate

To check the spectrum utilization rate, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Frequency Analysis > Spectrum Utilization, as shown in Figure 9-48.
Figure 9-48 Spectrum Utilization menu
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

9-51
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
The Spectrum Utilization dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 9-49.

Figure 9-49 Spectrum Utilization dialog box
Step 2 Set the ARFCN range.

Step 3 Select the ARFCN type.
z
BCCH
TCH
Step 4 Click OK to check the BCCH or TCH spectrum utilization rate.

The ARFCN Utilization dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 9-50.
Figure 9-50 Result dialog box of ARFCN Utilization Check
Step 5 Select an ARFCN in the ARFCN Utilization dialog box, and right-click the selected ARFCN
to save the check result in .txt format.
Click the table header (Allocate Times, Cell Count, or Utilization) to sort out all cells based on the
selected header. Click the header once to sort out the ARFCNs in an ascending order, or double-click the
header to sort out the ARFCNs in a descending order.
----End
9-52

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
9.5.6 Checking Co-HSN and Co-MA

When different cells have the same MA and the same HSN during setting the hopping data for
cells, the network call quality will be seriously influenced. You can check the distance
between the same HSN cell and the same MA cells to avoid the influence.
To check co-HSN co-MA, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Frequency Analysis > Co-HSN Co-MA Check, as shown in Figure 9-51.
Figure 9-51 Co-HSN Co-MA Check menu
The Co-HSN Co-MA Check dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 9-52.
Figure 9-52 Co-HSN Co-MA Check dialog box
The MA cells are listed in the Co-HSN Co-MA Check dialog box.
Step 2 Select a cell, and right-click the selected cell to save the check result.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

9-53
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Click the table header (HSN, MA, or Distance) to sort out all cells based on the selected header. Click
the header once to sort out the cells in an ascending order, double-click the header to sort out the cells in
a descending order.
During 1x 1 frequency hopping check, the phenomenon of another two cells unselected appear in the
same site is normal.
----End
9.5.7 Checking Frequency Optimization

Frequency optimization check generates the analysis result of the frequency interference
between cells and the frequency utilization rate.
By using the current frequency (BCCH, TCH), adjacent frequency, and a set of available
frequencies previously set in the network, you can obtain the idle frequencies for selection.
To check the frequency optimization, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Frequency Analysis > Frequency Optimization Check.
The Channel Check dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 9-53.
Figure 9-53 Channel Check dialog box
Step 2 Set the distance range for the cells to be checked.

The default value is 30.0000.
You can choose three ways to set the frequency range. The frequency supports the range from
0 to 1023. The distance choice is 2-2.5 times of average coverage distance of cell antenna
power. For example, the cell sending power coverage distance is 10 km. You need to analyze
only Co-frequency adj-frequency cells in 20 kilometers.
You can analyze one of the frequency ranges of all frequencies. If the analysis distance is far,
the analysis time is long. When the frequency range is wide, the analysis time is long.
Step 3 Click OK.
9-54

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
The mouse turns into the across state.

Step 4 Select a cell in the Site View window.
The selected cell is marked in green and the ARFCN Display dialog box is displayed, as
Figure 9-54 ARFCN Display dialog box
Table 9-5 describes the elements in the ARFCN Display dialog box.
Table 9-5 Description of the ARFCN Display dialog box
Element
Description
Current ARFCN
Showing the frequency list of the current cell. The first row
shows the BCCH frequency, and the following rows show the
TCH frequency.
Neighbor ARFCN
Listing all the frequencies used by the cell, including BCCH

and TCH. The frequencies are listed in an ascending order.
Idle ARFCN
Showing the used frequency.
Step 5 Perform the following operations in the ARFCN Display dialog box.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

9-55
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Click a record in the Idle ARFCN list to display the cell with co-channel and neighbors
in the set range.
Click an ARFCN in the Current ARFCN list to check co-channel and neighbors in the
range set by you.
Click a record in the Neighbor ARFCN list to show the information about the neighbors.
Mark the co-frequency and neighbors of the ARFCN (display on the map).
----End
9.5.8 Generating the Frequency Hopping Check Report

To generate the report of checking hopping frequency, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Frequency Analysis > Frequency Hopping Check Report, as shown in Figure 9-55.
Figure 9-55 Frequency Analysis menu
9-56

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
The Hopping Report Object Setting dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 9-56.
Figure 9-56 Hopping report object setting dialog box
Step 2 Select a path for saving the frequency hopping check report
Step 3 Select objects to be checked in the Object Select list.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

9-57
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Step 4 Click OK.

The report of checking hopping frequency is generated, as shown in Figure 9-57.
Figure 9-57 Frequency hopping check report in .xls format
----End
The hopping report only supports HUAWEI BSC32 data.
9.5.9 Exporting the Frequency Scripts

According to the adjusted frequency optimize result of configuration data. The Nastar GSM
analyzes the project parameters. According to the required interface of product, the Nastar
GSM exports script files.
The prerequisite is the information about the local frequency is downloaded from the server
and updated.
9-58

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
To export the frequency scripts, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Choose Frequency Analysis > Export Frequency Script > Last Closed.
The dialog box for exporting a path is displayed, as shown in Figure 9-58.
Figure 9-58 Browse For Folder
Step 2 Choose the directory.

The directory is the path for saving the exported frequency script.
Step 3 Click OK.
The frequency scripts file is exported.
----End
Program comparison information: you can directly analyze and modify frequency information, and you
can also refresh the frequency by auto frequency optimization. You can choose Frequency Analysis >
Export Frequency Script > Compared with Configuration.
9.6 Analyzing Neighbors

9.6.1 Background
The Nastar GSM supplies abundant neighbor relation check and modification method,
supplies to display the analysis result geographically, and exports neighbor relation as Huawei
facility script.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

9-59
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Ensure that the *.dbf file is imported before you analyze neighbors. The main functions of the
neighbor analysis are listed as follows:
z
Neighbors relation maintenance and automatic planning
Provides the maintenance function for the neighbor relation, such as displaying,
adding, deleting, or modifying neighbors.
Provides the automatic planning function for the neighbors with the neighbor
relations algorithm based on the accumulated experiences of Huawei. It helps users to
save a lot of time and effort.
Data comparing and restoring function
Provides the function for comparing project parameters, including comparison

between parameters before modification and parameters after modification,
comparison of project parameters between before and after modification neighbor
cell relations.
Provides the comparison between planned neighbors and configured neighbors.
9.6.2 Checking Unidirectional Neighbors

To check the unidirectional neighbors, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Neighbors Analysis > Unidirectional Neighbors Check, as shown in Figure 9-59.
Figure 9-59 Check Unidirectional Neighbors menu
9-60

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
The unidirectional neighbor check result is displayed, as shown in Figure 9-60.

Figure 9-60 Unidirectional neighbor check result
Step 2 Right-click the result window to save the check result.

----End
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

9-61
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
9.6.3 Maintaining Relation of Neighbors

Displaying Neighbors
To display neighbors, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Neighbor Analysis > Neighbor Display, as shown in Figure 9-61.
Figure 9-61 Neighbor Analysis menu
9-62

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Step 2 Click the Site View window to select a cell.

The current selected cell and its neighbors are marked in different colors (divided to
unidirectional neighbors and bidirectional neighbors), as shown in Figure 9-62.
Figure 9-62 Neighbors relation effect
----End
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

9-63
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Adding Bidirectional Neighbors

To add bidirectional neighbors, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Neighbors Analysis > Neighbors Maintenance > Add Bidirectional Neighbors, as
Figure 9-63 Add Bidirectional Neighbors
Step 2 Click a cell in the Site View window to add the neighbor relation.
You can configure multiple cells as the bidirectional neighbors of the current cell by clicking
several times.
----End
Adding Unidirectional Neighbors

To add unidirectional neighbors, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Neighbors Analysis > Neighbors Maintenance > Add Unidirectional Neighbors,
Step 2 Click a cell in the Site View window to add the neighbor relation.
You can configure multiple cells as the unidirectional neighbors of the current cell by clicking
several times.
----End
Deleting Neighbors
To delete neighbors, perform the following steps:
9-64

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Step 1 Choose Neighbors Analysis > Neighbors Maintenance > Delete Neighbors, as shown in
Figure 9-63.
Step 2 Click one or multiple cells to be deleted.
You can select several cells to delete the neighbors' relation with the current cell.
----End
Saving Modified Neighbors

Choose Neighbors Analysis > Neighbors Maintenance > Save Modified Neighbors to save
the modification of the neighbor relation for the cell.
Exporting Neighbors Comparing Results

Exporting neighbors comparing results comprises the following parts:
z
Choose Neighbors Analysis > Neighbors Maintenance > Export Neighbors

Maintenance Result > Last Closed to compare the neighbor data with the latest closed
project.
Choose Neighbors Analysis > Neighbors Maintenance > Export Neighbors

Maintenance Result > Last Imported to compare the neighbor data with the latest
imported neighbor data.
Exporting Neighbors Comparing Script

For details about exporting neighbors comparing script, see section 9.6.8 "Exporting
Neighbors Adjusting Script."
After the neighbor relation of a cell is added or deleted, the system prompts to save the neighbor relation
of this cell first, and then to continue with other network optimization operations.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

9-65
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
9.6.4 Importing the Neighbor Relation

To import the neighbor relation, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Neighbor Analysis > Import Neighbors File, as shown in Figure 9-64.
Figure 9-64 Import Neighbor File menu
Step 2 Choose a submenu of Import Neighbors File based on a vendor.

The dialog box for selecting the corresponding file is displayed.
Step 3 Select the neighbor relation file of the manufacturer.
Step 4 Click Open.
If the configuration file of the manufacturer is in .xls format, continue selecting the relevant
sheet of the file.
Step 5 Click OK to import the neighbor relation.
----End
9.6.5 Importing Neighbor Relation of the Standard Format

Analysis of the neighbor relation is based on the original .dbf file. The neighbor relation is
imported to the project with the .dbf file. If the neighbor relation changes, the original
neighbor relation also changes. If network optimization engineers want to save the optimized
neighbor relation, they can first save it to an .xls file. The saved neighbor relation can be used
for import when it is required.
The data formats are as follows:
z
9-66
Horizontal format

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
It is used to describe a cell with only one record of the neighbors. The number of fields is
alterable. The first field describes the cell, and the following fields describe the
neighbors. Each field describes a neighbor.
z
Vertical format
There are only two fields, but the records can be multiple. The import format and export
format must be consistent. It depends on you to choose a format.
Importing Horizontal Format

To import the neighbor relation of the horizontal format, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Neighbors Analysis > Import Neighbors File > Standard Format > Horizontal, as
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

9-67
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
The Please choose level adjacent relation file to import window is displayed, as shown in
Figure 9-66.
Figure 9-66 Please choose level adjacent relation file to import dialog box
Step 2 Select the file of the neighbor relation in the horizontal format, and then click Open.
The program automatically identifies and matches certain fields based on the column name of
the neighbor file. For the unmatched or faulty-matched fields, click the first column in the list
box, and select corresponding fields to be matched on the shortcut menu, and then click OK.
----End
The horizontal neighbor importing file must be the file horizontally exported from the Nastar GSM
neighbor. Only when the two files match, you can finish importing successfully. For details, see section
9.6.6 "Exporting Neighbor Relation".
9-68

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Importing Vertical Format

To import the neighbor relation of vertical format, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Neighbors Analysis > Import Neighbors File > Standard Format > Vertical, as
The Please choose upright adjacent relation file to import window is displayed, as shown
in Figure 9-67.
Figure 9-67 Please choose upright adjacent relation file import dialog box
Step 2 Select the file of the neighbor relation in the vertical format, and then click Open.
The program automatically identifies and matches certain fields based on the column name of
the neighbor file. For the unmatched or faulty-matched fields, click the first column in the list
box, and select corresponding fields to be matched on the shortcut menu, click OK.
----End
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

9-69
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
The vertical neighbor importing file must be the file horizontally exported from the Nastar GSM
neighbor. Only when the two files match, you can import the file successfully. For details, refer to
section 9.6.6 "Exporting Neighbor Relation".
9.6.6 Exporting Neighbor Relation

Exporting Neighbor Relation
To export the neighbor relation, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Neighbors Analysis > Export Neighbors, as shown in Figure 9-68.
Figure 9-68 Export Neighbors menu
The Export Neighbors dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 9-69.

Figure 9-69 Export Neighbors dialog box
Step 2 Select Horizontal or Vertical in the Export Format group box.
9-70

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Step 3 Select one or multiple items to be displayed.

Step 4 Click OK to export the neighbor relation table.
z
If Horizontal is selected in the Export Neighbors dialog box, the table of horizontal
neighbor relation in .xls format is displayed, as shown in Figure 9-70.
Figure 9-70 Table of horizontal neighbor relation in .xls format
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

9-71
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
If Vertical Export is selected in the Export Neighbors dialog box, the table of vertical
neighbor relation in .xls format is displayed, as shown in Figure 9-71.
Figure 9-71 Table of vertical neighbor relation in .xls format
----End
9-72

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Clearing Configured Neighbor Relation

To clear the configured neighbor relation, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Neighbors Analysis > Clear Config Neighbors, as shown in Figure 9-72.
Figure 9-72 Clear Config. Neighbors menu
A message indicating you to confirm the clearing operation is displayed, as shown in Figure
9-73.
Figure 9-73 Confirmation box
Step 2 Click Yes.

----End
9.6.7 Analyzing the Redundant Neighbors

Redundant neighbors exist when too many neighbors for a cell are available in a network, or
when the network topology has changed. Redundant neighbors result in resource waste.
Suspected redundant neighbors analysis lists all the suspected redundant neighbors and
displays these suspected redundant neighbors on a map.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

9-73
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
To analyze redundant neighbor, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Double-click Redundant Neighboring Cell Analysis (BSC32) of the Mobility node on the
The Redundant Neighboring Cell Analysis (BSC32) dialog box is displayed, as shown in
Figure 9-74.
Figure 9-74 Redundant Neighborcell Analysis(BSC32) dialog box
Step 2 On the Time Range tab page, set Date and Time. Or click Common date to use the default
common date set by the system.
z
9-74

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Step 5 Click OK.

----End
The procedure of Redundant Neighboring Cell Analysis (BSC6000) is similar to Redundant

Neighboring Cell Analysis (BSC32).
9.6.8 Exporting Neighbors Adjusting Script

Exporting neighbors adjusting script contains the following parts:
z
Precondition
The local data downloaded and updated of neighbor information from the server
(download the configuration data to local).
The project parameter (for displaying the cell on map) imported.
The status of the Nastar GSM is online.
Comparison information
You can directly analyze and modify the relation information of neighbors (After the
project parameters are imported, you can adjust and modify the neighbor relation in a
map), this method should in the manual adjust mode.
Shows the neighbor relation by auto neighbor optimization arithmetic, this method
should in the manual adjust mode.
Comparison Result
Choose Neighbors Analysis > Neighbors Maintenance > Export Neighbors Script
> Last Closed to compare the neighbor script information with the latest closed
project.
Choose Neighbors Analysis > Neighbors Maintenance > Export Neighbors Script
> Compared with Configuration to compare the neighbor script information with
the latest imported neighbor script.
You can perform the Exporting Neighbors Comparing Script task only when the Nastar GSM is
online.
9.7 Analyzing the TRX Measurement Performance

9.7.1 Background
Perform the TRX performance measurement in the full speed and the half speed, the
measurement performance analysis consists of the following two analysis tasks:
z
Measurement report analysis
TRX/quality/TA/link balance analysis
The sum of measurement report is all of the TRX measurement reports according to the TA
call distribution.
The TRX measurement performance comprises the following parts:
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

9-75
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual

z
Full rate TRX level/quality/TA/link balance analysis (BSC32)
Half rate TRX level/quality/TA/link balance analysis (BSC32)
Full rate TRX level/quality/TA/link balance analysis (BSC6000)
Half rate TRX level/quality/TA/link balance analysis (BSC6000)
Through statistic, the sum of measurement reports according to TA call distribution is similar
with the full rate TRX level/quality/TA/link balance analysis. You can take the amounts of full
rate TRX level/quality/TA/link balance analysis report as standard. The amount of
measurement report with half rate is not correct of the primary arithmetic.
9-76

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
9.7.2 Analyzing the Measurement Report

Generating the TRX Report
To generate the measurement report, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Analysis Reports > Measurement Report Analysis, as shown in Figure 9-75.
Figure 9-75 Measurement Report Analysis command
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

9-77
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
The Measurement Report Analysis dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 9-76.
Figure 9-76 Measurement Report Analysis dialog box
Table 9-6 describes the items in the Time and Object Setting tab page in the Measurement
Report Analysis dialog box.
Table 9-6 Description of Time and Object Setting tab page
Item
File Output
9-78
Description
Save path
Click
to select a path for saving
the measurement report.

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Item
Time Setting
Object
Description
Start date
Set the begin time of a query.
End date
Set the end time of a query.
Busy hour
Set one hour of a day.
Full Rate
Query by full rate.
Half Rate
Query by half rate.
BSC
Lists the objects selected by BSC.
Cell
Lists the objects selected by cell.
Cell group
Lists the objects selected by cell group.
Step 2 Select the path for saving the measurement report.

Step 3 Set the date range, and the period in each day (for example, from 0 to 24) on the Time and
Object Setting tab page.
Step 4 Select objects of BSC, of Cell, or of Cell Group. And select objects from the list below
Object.
Step 5 Click the Default Setting tab page in the Measurement Report Analysis dialog box.
You can change the setting on the Default Setting tab page, or just leave it as the default.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

9-79
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Step 6 Click OK.

The carrier analysis report is generated, as shown in Figure 9-77.
Figure 9-77 CarrierAnalyReport
----End
Introduction to the Measurement Report

The measurement report mainly includes the following sheets:
z
BSC measurement data analysis

You can use statistic table to show BSC result.
The related BSC index contains the following parts:
Full Rate Uplink Quality%
Full Rate Uplink Rexlev%
Full Rate Downlink Quality%
Full Rate Downlink Rexlev%
TA Distribution%
Path Balance%
BSC measurement data chart

You can use statistic chart to show BSC result, the related BSC index contains the
following parts:
9-80
Full Rate Uplink Quality%
Full Rate Uplink Rexlev%
Full Rate Downlink Quality%

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Full Rate Downlink Rexlev%
TA Distribution%
Path Balance%
Problematic Carrier Diagram

The diagram lists original index concerning the problematic carriers, and generates the
related problem causing and settling methods.
Original Data of Problematic

The sheet lists all the original records concerning the problematic carriers in the above
chart.
9.7.3 Analyzing the TRX Level /Qual./TA/Link Balance

The TRX level/Qual./TA/link balance analysis is performed to analyze measurement-related
performance indicators.
To analyze the TRX level /Qual./TA/link balance, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Double-click Full Rate TRX Level-Qual.-TA-Link Balance Analysis (BSC32) of the TRX
Performance Analysis node on the Trouble Shooting page.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

9-81
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
The Full Rate TRX Level-Qual.-TA-Link Balance Analysis (BSC32) dialog box is
Figure 9-78 Full Rate TRX Level-Qual.-TA-Link Balance Analysis(BSC32) dialog box
Step 2 Set Begin Date and End Date on the Time Range tab page. Or click Common Date to use
the default common date set by the system.
Step 3 On the Time Range tab page, select Whole day or Busy hour.
z
Step 6 Click OK.
9-82

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
----End
Click Multi-View Setting during modifying the task, the Multi-View and Multi-Cell Setting dialog
box is displayed. The Multi-View and Multi-Cell Setting dialog box can appoint the index item of all
the multi-view windows.
The setting of Full Rate TRX Level-Qual.-TA-Link Balance Analysis (BSC6000), Half Rate TRX
Level-Qual.-TA-Link Balance Analysis (BSC32), and Half Rate TRX Level-Qual.-TA-Link Balance
Analysis (BSC6000) is similar to that of Full Rate TRX Level-Qual.-TA-Link Balance Analysis
(BSC32).
9.8 Analyzing Antenna & Feeder

9.8.1 Background
The arithmetic of antenna & feeder problem location mainly applied in the following
conditions:
z
When you create, move or optimize the network, you may reinstall the antenna & feeder
system.
Adjusting the existed antenna & feeder system.
The antenna & feeder problem orientation and judgment comprise the following parts:
z
The sending and receiving antennas of two cells are different

You can know the two cells whose sending and receiving antennas are different.
One cell sending and receiving antenna is diversity

You can know the TRX which the sending and receiving antenna is diversity.
One cell receiving antenna is diversity

You can know the TRX which the receiving antenna is diversity.
9.8.2 Procedures
To analyze antenna & feeder repot, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Analysis Reports > Antenna & Feeder Analysis.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

9-83
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
The Antenna & Feeder Analysis dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 9-79.
Figure 9-79 Antenna & Feeder Analysis dialog box
Table 9-7 describes the items in Antenna & Feeder Analysis dialog box.
Table 9-7 Description of the Antenna & Feeder Analysis dialog box
Item
Description
File Output
Click
to select a save path for antenna & feeder report. Or you can
use the default directory.
Data
Select the Start Time and End Time. You can choose the Common
Period.
NOTE
The Common Period can change in Analysis Setting of Workspace on the left pane,
9-84

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Item
Description
Busy Time
The default choice is All Day.

If choose Busy Time, you can click Setting to change the value of busy
time. You can choose three busy times at most.
You can also choose the Other, set the Start Time and End Time.
NOTE
The dialog box of Setting is displayed, as shown in Figure 9-81.
Figure 9-80 Analysis Setting menu
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

9-85
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Figure 9-81 Setting dialog box
Step 2 Set all parameters according to the Table 9-7.

Choose Net Element tab page.
A network element dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 9-82.
9-86

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Figure 9-82 Net Element tab page of the Antenna & Feeder Analysis dialog box
Step 3 Choose the Element or Element Group that needs to analyze from the BSC list. The default
BSC choice is none.
When Element Group is chosen, you can click Manager CellGroup to manage the cell
group. For details about how to set the cell groups, see section 8.2.3 "Generating a Daily
Report."
Step 4 Click Analysis Parameters tab page.
The Analysis Parameters tab page of antenna & feeder analysis dialog box is displayed, as
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

9-87
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Figure 9-83 Analysis Parameters tab page of Antenna & Feeder Analysis dialog box
9-88

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Table 9-8 describes the items in Analysis Parameters tab page of Antenna & Feeder
Analysis dialog box.
Table 9-8 Description of Analysis Parameters tab page in Antenna & Feeder Analysis dialog box
Item
Description
Analysis
Mode
There are three arithmetic modes.
Parameters
Arithmetic1 is MainDiversity Arithmetic Analysis. When it is chosen,

the DoorLimit1 and AcceptLimit are enabled. The nutterly1 and
nutterly2 are disabled.
Arithmetic2 is OutCell Handover Analysis. When it is chosen, the

DoorLimit1, AcceptLimit, nutterly1 and nutterly2 are enabled all.
Arithmetic3 is Arithmetic1 and Arithmetic2. When it is chosen, the

DoorLimit1, AcceptLimit, nutterly1 and nutterly2 are enabled all.
DoorLimit1: for judging the difference value of main diversity door

limit. Its default value is 8dBm, ranging from 1 to 65535.
AcceptLimit: for illuminating the difference absolute value of other

TRXs and server cells, which within the range of AcceptLimit is
receivable. Its default value is 2dB, range from 1 to 65535.
nutterly1: for judging which request degrees face and tangent direction
less is unreasonable. Its default value is 0, range from 0 to 65535.
nutterly2: for judging which request degrees back and tangent direction
less is unreasonable. Its default value is 10, range from 0 to 65535.
Step 5 Set all parameters according to Table 9-8. Click OK in Analysis Parameters tab page of
Antenna & Feeder Analysis dialog box
The antenna & feeder analysis report is generated.
----End
9.9 Analyzing Uplink Interference (BSC32)

9.9.1 Background
The Nastar GSM can process the uplink ARFCNS scan data of network elements, and display
the result in an intuitive manner. You can conveniently judge whether interference exists on
the network and choose the ARFCNS effectively.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

9-89
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
9.9.2 Procedures
To analyze the uplink interference, perform as following steps:
Step 1 Choose the Workspace > Trouble Shooting > TRX Performance Analysis > Uplink
Interference Analysis (BSC32), as shown in Figure 9-84.
Figure 9-84 Trouble Shooting menu
9-90

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Double-click the Uplink Interference Analysis (BSC32).

The UL Interference Analysis dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 9-85.
Figure 9-85 UL Interference Analysis dialog box
Table 9-9 describes the items in Time Range tab page of the UL Interference Analysis
dialog box.
Table 9-9 Description of the Time Range tab page in UL Interference Analysis dialog box
Item
Description
Data
Select the Begin data and End data. Or you can choose the Common
date
Time
Default time is Whole day. Or you can choose the Busy hour, and
Modify busy hour enabled
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

9-91
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Item
Description
Task
Description
Describes the task
Step 2 Choose Queried Objects tab page of the UL Interference Analysis dialog box,
The Objects dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 9-86.
Figure 9-86 Queried Objects tab page of the UL Interference Analysis dialog box
Step 3 Object Type default choice is Network Element. Select the object from the Objects list.
You can only select one object.
9-92

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Step 4 Click OK.

An uplink interference frequency setting dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 9-87.
Figure 9-87 Uplink interference frequency setting dialog box
Step 5 Set the frequency range, you can set the most three ranges and the input frequency numbers
should be less than 96,
Step 6 Click OK in the Queried Objects tab page of the UL Interference Analysis dialog box.
The uplink disturb analysis report is generated.
----End
The performance of the Uplink Interference Analysis (BSC6000) is similar to the Uplink Interference
Analysis (BSC32).
If the Time Range setting is unreasonable, click OK, a dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 9-88.
The Uplink Interference Analysis ARFCNS Setting dialog box displays until the Time Range setting
turns reasonable.
Figure 9-88 There is no data
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

9-93
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
10 Predicting Network Trend
10
Predicting Network Trend
About This Chapter

Title
Description
10.1 Network Expansion

Report
The background and procedure for generating the network

expansion report
10.2 Analyzing Report of LAC

Capacity
The background and procedure for generating the LAC

analysis report
10.3 Analyzing the Radio

Resource Utility Ratio
The cell capability analysis, extra-busy cell analysis,

extra-idle cell analysis, and busy-hour traffic analysis
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

10-1
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
10.1 Network Expansion Report

10.1.1 Background
The Nastar GSM supports all radio resource utility ratio on one local network. By comparing
resource configuration, available network resource, network real traffic, and network
designing capacity status, you can obtain the resource utility ratio of network.
The network expansion report provides the following functions:
10-2
Calculating the number of required TRX cell, according to the designed target network
resource utility ratio
Calculating the number of required TRX cell which needs enlarge capacity at cell grade
Supporting open half rate network expansion

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
10.1.2 Procedure
To generate a network expansion report, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Analysis Reports > Network Expansion Report, as shown in Figure 10-1.
Figure 10-1 Network Expansion Report command
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

10-3
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
The Network Expansion Report dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 10-2.
Figure 10-2 Network Expansion Report dialog box
Step 2 Set the start date and end date in the Date Setting area of the Parameter Setting tab page.
Step 3 Set other parameters in the Settings area of the Parameter Setting tab page.
Table 10-1 describes the Settings area in the Parameter Setting tab page in the Network
Expansion Report dialog box.
Table 10-1 Settings of the Parameter Setting tab page in the Network Expansion Report dialog
box
10-4
Item
Description
BH traffic stat. mode
Set the Statistic mode for traffic measurement during

busy hours.
Capa_cell expansion figure (%)
Refers to the figure for capability cell expansion.
Cov_cell expansion figure (%)
Refers to the figure for coverage cell expansion.

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Item
Description
TCH margin
Refers to the margin of traffic channels.
TCHs per TRX
Refers to the number of TCH channels per TRX.
Capa_cell definition
Refers to the definition of the capability cell.
Erl_B GOS (%)
Display mode
Displays in .xls report or OWC control.
Step 4 Click the Query Object tab page.

The Query Object tab page is displayed, as shown in Figure 10-3.
Figure 10-3 Query Object tab page of the Network Expansion Report dialog box
Step 5 Specify Object Type on the Query Object tab page.

z
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)
If BSC is selected, the query objects are listed by BSC.

10-5
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual

z
If Cell Group is selected, the query objects are listed by cell group.
Step 6 Select objects from the object list.

Step 7 Click OK.
z
If .xls is set as display mode, the network expansion report is generated, as shown in
Figure 10-4.
Figure 10-4 Network Expansion Report
10-6

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
z
If OWC is set as display mode, the network expansion report is generated, as shown in
Figure 10-5.
Figure 10-5 Network Expansion Report in OWC mode
----End
10.2 Analyzing Report of LAC Capacity

10.2.1 Background
According to the .xls format file which generated by the LAC capacity analysis, the function
contains the following parts:
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

10-7
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual

z
Supply a better monitoring method, you can get the warning information before the call
capacity of network available.
You can enhance the network capacity during the primary time of the network planning.
10.2.2 Generating an LAC Capacity Analysis Report

To generate an LAC capacity analysis report, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Analysis Reports > LAC Capacity Analysis, as shown in Figure 10-6.
Figure 10-6 LAC Capacity Analysis Report command
10-8

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Alternatively, you can double-click LAC Capacity Analysis in the Network Trend pane on
workspace window.
The LAC Capacity Analysis dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 10-7.
Figure 10-7 LAC Capacity Analysis dialog box
Table 10-2 describes the items in the LAC Capacity Analysis dialog box.
Table 10-2 Description of the LAC Capacity Analysis dialog box
Item
Description
Path
Click
to select a path for saving LAC Capacity Analysis report. Or
you can use the default directory.
LAC
Select an object from the LAC list.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

10-9
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Item
Description
Data Select
Select the start date and end date in Begin Date and End Date fields.
Type a value in the Statistic Cycle (days) field. The value must be an
integer within the range from 1 to 31.
NOTE
If the integer is beyond the range listed previously, the system prompts you to enter a
valid value.
Select All-Day to generate a report of whole day.

Select Busy Hour to generate a report for busy-hour traffic.
Click Change Busy Hour to view the Busy Hour Setting dialog box, and
set the busy hour.
Step 2 Set all parameters according to Table 10-2.
10-10

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Step 3 Click the Param Setting tab page.

The Param Setting tab page of an LAC Capacity Analysis dialog box is displayed, as shown
in Figure 10-8.
Figure 10-8 Parameters Setting tab page of the LAC Capacity Analysis dialog box
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

10-11
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Table 10-3 describes the items in the Param Setting tab page of the LAC Capacity Analysis
dialog box.
Table 10-3 Describes the items in the Parameters Setting tab page of the LAC Capacity Analysis
dialog box
Item
Paging
Mechanism
Description
Primary paging
success rate
Enter a value in the Primary paging success rate

field
Combination
efficiency Mmax
The default value is 3.2, you can modify it
Paging Mechanism
(paging setting: 1 to 3)
The range of Paging Mechanism is 1 to 3, and its

option is temporary mobile station identity
(TMSI), international mobile station identity
(IMSI), and NULL
NOTE
The option is defined in advance.
Load
Parameter
Paging overload
The Load Parameter is optional. The value of

Paging overload is 60, you can modify it
PCH overloads
The value of PCH overloads is 0, you can modify

it
Step 4 Set all parameters according to Table 10-3, and then click OK in the Param Setting tab page
of the LAC Capacity Analysis dialog box.
An LAC Capacity Analysis report is generated, as shown in Figure 10-9.
10-12

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Figure 10-9 LAC Capacity report
----End
10.2.3 Introduction to the LAC Capacity Analysis Report

The LAC capacity analysis report mainly includes the following sheets:
z
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)
Lac optimization
Mainly contains Lac capacity analyzing result.
Advice, according to the result by arithmetic, putting forward the related advice.
TOP 10 overload cells. According to the cell call load, the TOP 10 overload cells are
displayed. When N is less than 10, the N overload cells are displayed. When the
number of the overload cells N is 0, the TOP 10 overload cells sheet is not displayed.
Lac call capacity, displays all call capacity of the whole Lac.

10-13
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Lac redundancy capacity, when overload does not exist or no data is within the
selected time range, only the Lac redundancy sheet is generated and the capacity
available is displayed.
Readme
Describes the related guidelines.
10.3 Analyzing the Radio Resource Utility Ratio

10.3.1 Background
The wireless resource utility ratio analysis contains the cell capability analysis, extra-busy cell
analysis, extra-idle cell analysis, and busy-hour traffic analysis.
The wireless resource utility ratio mainly includes the following functions:
z
Cell capacity analysis

This function is for analyzing the system busy time and real-time of each cell in some
day, comparing the KPI and co-selecting the net KPI to do statistic of the system
busy-hour. This function can do statistic of the sum of the traffic about 24 hours in one
seven days for a cell, and can display with different colors in a sheet. As a result, you are
convenient to query and compare the result.
Extra-busy cell analysis

This function is for analyzing the extra-busy cells, which meet with the parameters set by
user.
Extra-idle cell analysis

This function is for analyzing the extra-idle cells, which meet with the parameters set by
user.
Busy-hour traffic analysis

This function is for exporting the fact busy hour distribution condition for each cell, and
busy time KPI for each day.
10.3.2 Analyzing the Daily Capability of a Cell

This function is performed to analyze the traffic volume in a week for a cell or for all the cells,
and to display the traffic volume in different colors to facilitate your viewing and comparison.
10-14

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
To analyze the daily capability of a cell, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Double-click Daily Cell Capability Analysis of the Wireless Resource Utility Ratio
Analysis node in the Trouble Shooting pane.
The Daily Cell Capability Analysis dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 10-10.
Figure 10-10 Daily Cell Capability Analysis dialog box
Step 2 In the Items tab page, select an appropriate Gos value from the Select One Item list.
Step 3 In the Time Range tab page, select an end date from the End Date drop-down list.
Step 4 In the Queried Objects tab page, select the object type.
z
You can select a maximum of eight cells. By default, the system queries all the cells.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

10-15
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Step 6 Click OK.

----End
In the Time Range tab page, you cannot set Begin Date and Busy Time, or query the data of the whole
day.
10.3.3 Analyzing the Extra Busy Cells

To analyze the extra busy cells, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Double-click Extra Busy Cell Analysis of the Wireless Resource Utility Ratio Analysis
node on the Trouble Shooting page.
10-16

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
The Extra Busy Cell Analysis dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 10-11.
Figure 10-11 Extra Busy Cell Analysis dialog box
Step 2 Set Begin Date and End Date on the Time Range tab page, or click Common date to use
the default common date set by the system.
z
Step 6 Click OK.
----End
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

10-17
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
10.3.4 Analyzing the Extra Idle Cells

To analyze the extra idle cells, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Double-click Extra Idle Cell Analysis under the Wireless Resource Utility Ratio Analysis
node on the Trouble Shooting page.
The Extra Idle Cell Analysis dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 10-12.
Figure 10-12 Extra Idle Cell Analysis dialog box
Step 2 Set Begin Date, End Date, and Time on the Time Range tab page, or click Common date to
use the default common date set by the system.
10-18

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Step 6 Click OK.
----End
10.3.5 Analyzing the Cell Traffic in Rush Hours

To analyze the cell traffic in rush hours, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Double-click Cell Traffic Rush Hour Stat under the Wireless Resource Utility Ratio
Analysis node on the Trouble Shooting page.
The Cell Traffic Rush Hour Stat dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 10-13.
Figure 10-13 Cell Traffic Rush Hour Stat dialog box
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

10-19
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Step 2 Set Begin Date, End Date, and Time on the Time Range tab page, or click Common date to
use the default common date set by the system.
z
Step 6 Click OK.
----End
10-20

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
11 FAQ
11
FAQ
About This Chapter

Section
Describes
11.1 Installing Notice
Introduction to the notice of installation
11.2 Problems of Running

Program
Introduction to the problems that you will contact at

running time, and how to solve
11.3 Problems of Importing

Data
Introduction to the problems that you will contact when

importing data, and how to solve the problems
11.4 Function
Introduction to the problems of function
11.5 Others
Introduction to other problems
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

11-1
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
11 FAQ
11.1 Installing Notice

11.1.1 MSDE is Recommended in the Stand-alone Version
MSDE is recommended in stand-alone version, but MSDE is not recommended in SQL
Server.
The SQL Server requires higher system configuration and occupies more system resources
than the MSDE. Huawei recommends that you install the MSDE rather than the SQL Server,
because the MSDE is sufficient for the stand-alone version.
11.1.2 Problem Caused by Uninstalling the Earlier-Version Nastar

Question
If you have installed both the Nastar GSM2.4 and the Nastar GSM of the earlier-versions, the
MapX component fails to work properly after you uninstall the Nastar GSM of the
earlier-version; thus causes many unexpected problems.
Answer
Switching between versions can solve this problem.
To solve this problem, performing the following steps:
Step 1 Open Add or Delete Programs on the Control Panel.
Step 2 Remove the program GENEX Nastar GSM (earlier-versions and the latest versions) from
the Add or Delete Programs window.
Step 3 Remove the program GENEX Shared.
Step 4 Reinstall the Nastar GSM (earlier-version).
Step 5 Uninstall the Nastar GSM (earlier-version) complete.
Step 6 Re-install the Nastar GSM (the latest version).
The system prompts you to install GENEX Shared components package (including MapX,
Teechart, OWC, MDAC2.7, and Sentinel Lock Driver), and then you need reinstall the
GENEX Shared according to the clew.
----End
11-2

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
11 FAQ
11.2 Problems of Running Program

11.2.1 Problems Caused by Expired License
Question 1
My dongle has expired. How can I update it?
Answer
Update the license to solve this problem, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Open the License Error dialog box, as shown in Figure 11-1.
Figure 11-1 License Error dialog box
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

11-3
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
11 FAQ
Step 2 Click Update.

Step 3 Select the license file, and then click Open.

Step 4 Click OK to complete copying the license.
Step 5 Restart the GENEX Nastar GSM.
----End
Question 2
How to obtain a software license online?
Answer
If you are Huawei internal users, you can use the Nastar through obtaining the software
license. If you are general users, you need install the network card before obtaining the license,
one license is related to only one computer.
To obtain the software license online, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Start the Nastar GSM main program.
11-4

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
11 FAQ
The License information dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-3.

Figure 11-3 License information
Step 2 Send an ESN code to Huawei.

After obtaining the ESN code, Huawei sends the license file to you.
Step 3 Click Update in the License Error dialog box, as shown in Figure 11-1.
Step 4 Select the license obtained from Huawei.
Step 5 Click OK.
----End
11.2.2 Why Cannot the Program Be Correctly Started After the

Installation of the Nastar GSM2.4 Hard Dongle Version?
Question
The Nastar GSM2.4 hard dongle version is installed and a new hard dongle is plugged in the
parallel port. When starting the program, the system gives a message that the hard dongle is
not found yet, and the start fails.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

11-5
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
11 FAQ
Answer
The problem is caused by the confliction between the latest version and the old one.
To handle this problem, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Install the latest version of the Nastar GSM2.4.
Step 2 On Control Panel, remove the installed the Nastar GSM2.4.
Step 3 Restart your system.
Step 4 Reinstall the latest version of the Nastar GSM2.4.
----End
11.2.3 Why Cannot the MSDE Be Correctly Installed?

Question
Why cannot the MSDE be installed correctly?
Answer
Table 11-1 shows the process procedure of the MSDE.
Table 11-1 Process procedure
An MSDE instance is installed

with the same name as the one
you have installed before
An MSDE instance is not

installed with the same name as
the one you have installed
before
11-6
In this case, perform the following steps:

2.
Uninstall the MSDE
3.
Delete all instance files in the SQL Server folder

(C:\Program Files\Microsoft SQL Server\)
4.
Reinstall the MSDE
You can infer that the problem may be caused by the

confliction between the MSDE and the SQL Server.
Therefore you can uninstall the SQL Server firstly, and
then reinstall the MSDE

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
11 FAQ
11.3 Problems of Importing Data

11.3.1 How to Upgrade Performance Statistics Query Task in the
Old Database After the Installation of the Latest Version?
Question
After you install a new Nastar GSM version, the main program has been upgraded
successfully. If the Nastar GSM is connected to the old database, the performance statistics
query task, however, is still old. How to update the performance statistics query task of the
old database?
Answer
After installation of the latest version, connect the Nastar GSM to the local Network and run
new performance statistics query tasks, if you have created a new local network by Transdata.
If you want to upgrade these tasks in an old local network, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Select a local Network to be upgraded in the Transdata workspace.
Step 2 Open the NET menu, and then click Initial Task. Or right-click a blank area and then click
Initial Task to initialize the tasks.
After initialization, the performance statistics query tasks have been cleared in the selected
local network, and been updated into the latest version.
----End
11.3.2 How to Use the Nastar GSM Version 2.5 to Analyze the
Results Imported by the Old Nastar GSM Version?
Question
When you use the latest version (version 2.5) to analyze the results imported by the old one
(version 2.5), the interfaces of earlier-version are displayed. How to update these interfaces?
Answer
You need to update tasks. To update tasks, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Start Transdata, and then select the database NET node connected currently.
Step 2 Select Initial Task on the shortcut menu.
Back up the user-defined tasks before refreshing the task node.

After the tasks are refreshed, the interfaces of the latest version are displayed.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

11-7
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
11 FAQ
----End
11.3.3 Why was the BSC32 Configuration Data Imported

Incorrectly?
Question
After importing configuration data of BSC32 with the same version, you may find the
warning message.
Answer
Usually, this case occurs when the other version configuration data of BSC32 has been
imported. The version is the description of performance statistic, maybe not accord with the
configuration data. If you import the second performance statistic of BSC with the same
version, but the configuration data is not the same version, you will find the warning message.
To solve the problem, perform followings steps:
Step 1 Delete all BSCs of the version imported.
Step 2 Re-import all configuration data updated from the BAM, so that the problem can be solved.
Step 3 Import the newest configuration data.
----End
11.3.4 Importing Performance Data Error

Question
Why cannot import the performance data? After importing configuration data, the alarm
message is displayed in the output view box, and you cannot import the performance data.
Answer
You can input the SQL Server name and the related user name and password, the SQL server
name is always the computer name or IP address.
The computer is installed with two operating systems. If you log in to the SQL Server of the
Transdata is not the current operating systems sample name, the message box will be
displayed during the time of importing the performance data, as shown in Figure 11-4. In the
Network Information dialog box, the driver only has one, as shown in Figure 11-5. In this
case, you should check the server name is the name of the current operation system.
Figure 11-4 Input performance data error
11-8

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
11 FAQ
Figure 11-5 Network information dialog box
11.3.5 Common Problems in Performance Data Import

Common problems in performance data import comprise the following parts:
z
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)
Problem: 2006/06/23 10:50:47 cannot Open BSC [TEST_1_8->loudi] Private Task File
--- D:\loudic10\data\st010.tsk, Please Check.
Reason: The task definition file is not found in the pubinfo.tsk file.
Solution: Check whether this task has been registered in the BAM, the traffic statistic
file is dynamically divided by the NAConvert or by the StatTrans, and the .tsk file of
the task is removed manually.
Problem: 2006/06/23 10:57:59 An item with invalid time was found in C:\Documents
and Settings\hanke\Desktop\sichuan_C13\data\st053\st053.IDX,skip this item.
Reason: The statistic file contains illegal data.
Solution: Check the file source.
Problem: 2006/06/23 10:57:54 File C:\Documents and

Settings\hanke\Desktop\sichuan_C13\data\st053.res Format Error! No ValueSize in
different Res file does not match the previous result will be abandoned.
Reason: The items are different in the register file.
Solution: Check whether the task changes when the BAM is running. You are advised
to import the tasks before and after the modification to avoid data loss.
Problem: task file ST 15.tsk cant match result file ST 15.res, as shown in Figure 11-6

11-9
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
11 FAQ
Figure 11-6 Problem hint dialog box
Reason: The internal data in the .tsk file does not match that in the *.res file.
Solution: For the statistic data divided by the StatTrans or the NAConvert, clear the
Verify Statistic Data checkbox during static data import and try again. If the problem
persists, check the data source.
11.4 Functional Problems

11.4.1 FAQs Concerning the Comparison, Backup, and Recovery
of Project Parameters
z
Question
When to back up the project parameters?
Which of two copies of project parameters are to be compared?
What operations are involved when you plan to cancel the modifications on the
project parameters?
Answer
When the project parameters are imported in the last time, the system backups the
project parameter and saves the backup in the database.
By using the Compare Project Parameters function, the system compares the
current project parameter table with the last imported one and lists all addition,
deletion, and modification records. Then, the Nastar GSM exports them to an .xls file.
By using the Undo Project Parameter Modification function, the system returns to the
project parameter table that is lately imported. You should notice that the Undo Project
Parameter Modification function can disable all addition, deletion, and modification.
11.4.2 Configured Neighbor Relation

z
Question
11-10
When to back up the configured neighbor relation?

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
11 FAQ
Which of two project parameter tables are compared by the Project Parameter
Comparative Display function?
What operations are involved when you plan to cancel the modifications on
configured neighbor relation?
Answer
When the neighbor configuration is imported for the last time, the system makes a
backup and saves the backup in the database.
By using the Compare Project Parameters function, the Nastar GSM compares the
current neighbor configuration table with the last imported one and lists all addition,
deletion, and modification records. Then, the Nastar GSM exports them to an .xls file.
By using the Undo Project Parameter Modification function, the system returns to
the backup neighbor configuration table imported for the last time. Note that the
Undo Project Parameter Modification function can cancel all addition and deletion
operations.
11.4.3 Planned Neighbor Relation

z
Question
When to back up the planned neighbor relation?
Which of two copies of configured neighbors are to be compared?
What operations are involved when you plan to cancel the modifications on the
project parameters?
Answer
When the neighbor planning is generated for the last time, the system backups and
saves the backup in the database.
By using the Compare Project Parameters function, the system compares the
current neighbor planning table with the one generated in the last planning, and lists
all addition and deletion records. Then, the Nastar GSM exports them to an .xls file.
By using the Undo Project Parameter Modification function, the system returns to
the neighbor table generated during the last planning. Note that the Undo Project
Parameter Modification function can cancel all addition and deletion operations.
11.4.4 Meaning of Each CI (Cell Identify)

z
Question
How to identify meanings of cell symbols "B", "T", and "B-T" and "T-T' in the
co-channel and adjacent channel check of the cell?
Answer
For details, see section 9.5.2
"Checking Co-Channel and Adjacent Channel."
If BCCH and TCH both are selected in the Auto Check Channel Interface dialog box,
the system marks B, T, B-T, and T-T for the relevant co-channel and adjacent channel.
The meaning of each mark is listed as follows:
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)
B-T: compares the values of BCCH and TCH with those of the current ARFCN. The
values of TCH indicate the lower (upper) adjacent channel of current ARFCN, while
the values of BCCH indicate upper (down) adjacent channel of current ARFCN.
T-T: compares the values of TCH between this cell and this ARFCN. Meanwhile the
values of upper and down adjacent channels are available. The values of the BCCH
indicate that it is neither adjacent nor equal to current ARFCN.

11-11
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
11 FAQ
B: indicates that the BCCH of current cell is the upper (lower) adjacent channel and
the TCH is neither adjacent nor equal to current ARFCN.
T: indicates that only one TCH value from this cell is the upper adjacent channel of
current ARFCN. The BCCH value indicates that it is neither adjacent to nor equal to
current ARFCN.
11.4.5 Selected Cells Lack Relevant Neighbors

z
Question
Why no corresponding neighbors of the selected cells on the map after neighbor
configuration is imported?
Answer
The problem may be caused by the following reasons:
11-12
The current working layer is on the automatic neighborhood planning. Click

switch to the neighborhood configuration layer.
When the neighbor is imported, the system enables the unique matching based on
LAC+CI. Ensure that the imported project parameters of the adjacent cell include
LAC+CI data. And the LAC+CI data has a unique neighbor relation.

to
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
11 FAQ
11.4.6 Switching Between Network Optimization Operations and

Common Operations
z
Question
When you conduct the network optimization analysis, a map is displayed on the site view,
Figure 11-7 Co-channel and adjacent channel check
At this time, the pointer of the mouse is a cross, indicating that network optimization
operation is complete. In such a situation, the co-channel and adjacent channel check is
being conducted.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

11-13
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
11 FAQ
If you need to check other parts of the map, you have to zoom in, zoom out, or move, as
Figure 11-8 Amplified map of co-channel and adjacent channel check
If you plan to continue the network optimization before executing map operations, what
should be done?
z
Answer
After executing the map operations, right-click on the site view. The shortcut menu is
displayed.
11-14
Click Continue Network Optimization Operation to continue the Network

optimization analysis.
Click Exit Current Operation to exit the network optimization analysis.

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
11 FAQ
Figure 11-9 Site View
11.4.7 Why Cannot the Project Parameters Be Exported?

z
Question
Why cannot the project parameters be exported? The alert commands cannot be executed.
And the application is out of date.
Answer
Check whether the Microsoft Office Excel is overdue. If Microsoft Office Excel is
overdue, activate or reinstall Microsoft Office Excel.
11.4.8 Why Cannot a Task Be Running?

z
Question
Why the running of a task fails? No information about VIC cells is displayed.
Answer
An error occurs when the Nastar GSM is connected to database. Restart the Nastar GSM.
11.4.9 Language of Task Tree

z
Question
The language of the task tree does not agree with that of the main program.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)
Answer
11-15
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
11 FAQ
If the problem described previously occurs, you can infer that the languages in the Nastar
GSM version and the Transdata version do not match. Use the right version of the
Transdata and initialize the task.
11.4.10 Incorrect Antenna Icons

z
Question
The antenna icons shown on the map are incorrect.
Answer
The font file is not correctly installed. Reinstall the font file.
11.4.11 Why Cannot the Workspace or Property Window Be

Displayed?
z
Question
The workspace or Property window is not displayed, though you have chosen the
relevant menu.
Answer
Check whether the workspace or the Property window is dragged to the border. If the
workspace or the Property window is dragged to the border, drag it back.
11.4.12 What do the Begin Time and End Time in the Network
Monitoring Report Stand For?
z
Question
What do Begin time and End time in the network monitoring report stand for?
Answer
The source data has a range for date. The begin date and end date clearly mark this
range.
11.4.13 What do the Statistic Begin Date and Statistic End Date in
the Network Monitoring Report Stand For?
z
Question
What do Statistic begin date and Statistic end date in the network monitoring report
stand for?
Answer
When you export a report, you need to learn the range of the date. The begin date and
end date mark this. Ensure that the end date is later than the begin date.
11.4.14 Description of Data Source for Channel Analysis and

Network Optimization Analysis
The functions of the channel analysis and network optimization analysis are based on project
parameters.
If project parameters are not updated, the channel analysis and network optimization analysis
are based on the previous project parameters.
11-16

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
11 FAQ
11.4.15 What Problems Occur if the Project Parameters Are

Inconsistent with Configuration Parameters?
z
Question
What problems occur if project parameters are inconsistent with configuration
parameters?
Answer
The neighbor relation is related to the configuration parameters.
After the project parameters are imported, the configuration data fails to be imported if
the configuration data from the database is inconsistent with the project parameter.
During the download of the configuration data, the configuration data fails to be
downloaded if the configuration data in the server is inconsistent with the project
parameters.
If the configuration data fails to be imported or downloaded, and the Nastar GSM never
succeeds in importing or downloading the configuration data before, the configuration
information (such as neighbor relation) is null. If the Nastar GSM succeeds in importing
or downloading the configuration data before, the configuration is in the previous state.
This may affect the accuracy of the analysis result generated by the Neighbors Analysis
function.
11.4.16 Result of RNP Parameter Rationality Check is inconsistent

with That of Frequency Optimization Check
z
Question
Why the result of RNP parameter rationality check is inconsistent with that of frequency
optimization check?
Answer
Different check range

The RNP parameters rationality check checks the co-BCCH co-BSIC, whereas the
frequency optimization check checks co-BCCH co-BSIC and co-TCH co-BSIC of the
current cell
Different query object

The RNP parameters rationality check checks the configuration data imported from
the server, whereas the frequency optimization check checks the configuration data of
the local.
Inconsistent LAC and IC

The LAC and IC in the local do not match with that in the server database. Therefore,
the configuration data of the two checks is different and the check result is different.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

11-17
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
11 FAQ
11.4.17 Description of the Calculation Formula of Non-Original in

the Network Monitoring Report
Table 11-2describes the calculation formula of non-original in the network monitoring report.
Table 11-2 Calculation formula of non-original
11-18
Name
ID
Target Expressions
Immediate assignment
failure
T2185 T2186
Total immediate assignment requests

Total successful immediate assignments
failure for location
update
T7283 T2187
Attempted channel seizures for location

update Total successful immediate
assignments for location update
failure for MTC
T7281 T2191
Attempted channel seizures for MTC

Total successful immediate assignments
for MTC
failure for emergency
call
T7279 T2193
Attempted channel seizures for

emergency call Total successful
immediate assignments for emergency
call
failure for
re-establishment
T7280 T2194
Attempted channel seizures for

re-establishment Total successful
immediate assignments for
re-establishment
failure (Other process)
[T7282] [T2195]
[T2189]
Attempted channel seizures for MOC

successful immediate assignments for
other procedures Successful
immediate assignments for MOC
Unsuccessful outgoing
inter-BSC inter-cell
handovers (MS
reported: Abnormal
release, unspecified)
T7198 +T7200
+T7199 +T7197
+T7205 +T7203
+T7210 +T7204
+T7202 +T7207
+T7208 +T7209
+T7211 +T7213
+T7201 +T7212
+T7206
Sum of all MS reported: Abnormal

release, unspecified
handovers
(HANDOVER
REQUIRED
REJECT)
T7222 + T7227 +
T7225 + T7219 +
T7223 + T7229 +
T7220 + T7218 +
T7231 + T7230 +
T7226 + T7221 +
T7224 + T7228
Sum of all HANDOVER REQUIRED

REJECT

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
11 FAQ
Name
ID
Target Expressions
handovers (CLEAR
COMMAND take
reason)
T7241 + T7243 +
T7240 + T7245 +
T7242 + T7244 +
T7239 + T7238
Sum of all CLEAR COMMAND take

reason
TCH Call Drop Rate

(excluding handovers)
(%)
(T2142)/
(T2105T2103T2112
T2113)
TCH Call Drop/TCH Assignment

Success Successful TCH seizures for
intra-cell handover Successful TCH
seizures for intra-BSC incoming cell
handover Successful TCH seizures for
inter-BSC incoming cell handover
11.4.18 When Using the Shortcut Key, the Displayed Dialog Box
Is Not the Related Function Dialog Box, Why?
Question
When using the shortcut key, the displayed dialog box is not the related function dialog box,
why?
Answer
In such a situation, the shortcut key may be conflicted with the runtime software of minimized
task. For example, open PowerWord, and the PowerWord is in status of getting word, the
CTRL+F12 shortcut key is use for reciting. At this time, using the CTRL+F12 shortcut key
of the Nastar GSM, the result is incorrect. Only when you close the PowerWord, the shortcut
key is effective.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

11-19
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
11 FAQ
11.4.19 How to Adjust Parameters That Makes the View Can

Display Antenna as the Zoom Changing?
To adjust parameters, and view can display antenna as zoom changing, perform the following
steps:
Step 1 Choose Geographic Display > Display Option > Cell Display Setting.
The Show Items Option dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-10.
Figure 11-10 Show Items Option dialog box
Step 2 Select or clear the following items in the Item field to display them on the map.
z
Site
Site Label
Antenna
Cell Label
Sector
Step 3 Set the minimum and maximum map zooming range in the Display Area field.
If the zoom value is within the setting range, the system displays the BTS antenna. Otherwise,
the BTS antenna cannot be displayed. You can set the range based on the antenna density on
the map.
Step 4 Set the displayed color of various types of antennas in the Color Setting field.
Step 5 Click OK.
----End
11-20

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
11 FAQ
Description
When the displayed area is set from minimum range 0 km to maximum range 50 km, the
antennas are displayed too dense on the map. Therefore, the cells are not very clear to be
distinguished from other cells, as shown in Figure 11-11.
Figure 11-11 Case of a too large displaying area
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

11-21
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
11 FAQ
You can adjust the range of the displayed area. For example, set the range from minimum 0
km to maximum 25 km. Then system automatically estimates the area size and the BTS
antenna out of the range (0 km to 25 km) is not displayed, as shown in Figure 11-12.
Figure 11-12 Displaying the area range after being corrected
11.5 Others
11.5.1 Obtaining the Data from the Earlier-Version
z
Question
Sometimes, the on-site engineers need to use the data from the Nastar GSM of the
earlier-version. Since the database structure of the latest version has changed, you cannot
directly use the original data resource in *.mdb files.
11-22
Answer

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
11 FAQ
You should first export the important data of the original database to an .xls file. Then
use the data import function provided by the Nastar GSM to import the copy of the file
to the database of the latest version.
Using the Neighbor Relation Data of Older Versions

To obtain the data of neighbor relation, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Open the software of earlier-version.
Step 2 Choose Neighbors Analysis > Export Neighbors, as shown in Figure 11-13.
Figure 11-13 Export Neighbors command
The Export Neighbors dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-14.

Figure 11-14 Export Neighbors dialog box
Step 3 Select Horizontal or Vertical in the area of Export Format.

Step 4 Select one or multiple items to be displayed: Cell name, LAC, CI, BCCH, or BSIC.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

11-23
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
11 FAQ
Step 5 Click OK to export the Adjacent Relation Table and save it in an .xls file.
Step 6 Open the software of the latest version.
Step 7 Select a neighbor file.
z
Import the neighbors file in horizontal format.
Choose Neighbors Analysis > Import Neighbors File > Standard Format >
Horizontal, as shown in Figure 11-15.
The Please choose level adjacent relation file to import dialog box is displayed, as
Figure 11-16 Please choose level adjacent relation file to import dialog box
11-24
Click Open.
Import the neighbors file in vertical format.

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
11 FAQ
Choose Neighbors Analysis > Import Neighbors Files > Standard Format >
Vertical.
The Please choose upright adjacent relation file to import dialog box is displayed,
Figure 11-17 Please choose upright adjacent relation file to import dialog box
Click Open.
----End
The format of the neighbor relation imported in the latest version must be consistent with that exported
in the older version. For example, if the neighbor relation is exported in horizontal format, then you
should import it in horizontal format.
Using Project Parameters

To use project parameters of earlier-versions, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Open the software of the earlier-version.
Step 2 Choose Project > Export Project Parameters.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

11-25
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
11 FAQ
The Output dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-18.

Figure 11-18 Output dialog box
Step 3 In the Output dialog box, select the parameters to be exported.

Step 4 Click OK to export the project parameter of the current project.
Step 5 Open the software of the latest version.
Step 6 Choose Project >Import Project Parameters.
11-26

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
11 FAQ

Step 7 Select the project parameter table file, and then click Open.
The Select Table dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-20.
Figure 11-20 Select Table dialog box
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

11-27
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
11 FAQ
Step 8 Select the project parameter table to be imported, and then click OK.
The Import Setup dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-21.
Figure 11-21 Import Setup dialog box
----End
11.5.2 From Tab File to MapX File

z
Question
How to convert the Mapinfo Table file to the map file that is available to MapX?
Answer
To convert Mapinfo Table file to the map file that is available to MapX, perform the
following steps:
Step 1 Find the path of MapX Common. For example, C:\Program Files\Common Files\MapInfo
Shared\MapX Common.
Step 2 Run GeosetManager50.exe.
Step 3 Create a map GeoSet.
Step 4 Add the existing tab file and import the GeoSet map file.
Step 5 Save the map file and the transformation is over.
----End
11.5.3 Implications of the Handover Indicators in the Nastar GSM

z
11-28
Question
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
11 FAQ
Would you like to explain the implications of the handover indicators in the Nastar GSM,
since so many indicators are available?
z
Answer
The calculation for handover indicators is relatively complex. Table 11-3 lists the
handover success rate at the BSC level.
Table 11-3 Handover success rate

Item
Description
Level
Handover
Success Rate
(%)
([2265 Successful intra-cell handovers]+[2239

Successful incoming internal inter-cell
handovers]+[2240 Successful incoming inter
BSC inter-cell handovers])
Summed up at the cell

level
/ ([2264 Attempted intra-cell

handovers]+[2201 Attempted incoming inter
BSC inter-cell handovers]+[2200 Incoming
internal inter-cell handovers])
Intra-BSC
Handover
Success Rate
(%)
[2239 Successful incoming internal inter cell

handovers + 2243 Successful outgoing internal
inter-cell handovers + 2265 Successful
intra-cell handovers]

level
/[2199 Attempted incoming internal inter-cell

handovers + 2204 Attempted outgoing internal
inter-cell handovers + 2264 Attempted
intra-cell handovers]
Outgoing BSC
Handover
Success Rate
(%)
[ 2244 Successful outgoing inter-BSC inter-cell

handovers
Incoming BSC
Handover
Success Rate
(%)
[ 2240 Successful incoming inter-BSC

inter-cell handovers
900->1800
Handover
Success Rate
(%)
[ 55 Successful inter-cell handovers

(900/850->1800/1900) + 69 Successful
incoming BSC handovers
(900/850->1800/1900) + 94 Successful
outgoing BSC handovers
(900/850->1800/1900)]
/[ 52 Attempted inter-cell handovers
(900/850->1800/1900) + 64 Attempted
(900/850->1800/1900) + 89 Attempted
(900/850->1800/1900)]
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

level
/ 2206 Attempted outgoing inter-BSC inter-cell

handovers] * 100%
level
/ 2201 Attempted incoming inter-BSC

inter-cell handovers] * 100%

The corresponding
indicators at the cell
level are unavailable.
Obtain them from the
BSC overall
performance
measurement.
11-29
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
11 FAQ
Item
Description
Level
1800->900
Handover
Success Rate
(%)
[ 56 Successful inter-cell handovers

(1800/1900->900/850) + 70 Successful
(1800/1900->900/850) + 95 Successful
(1800/1900->900/850)]
/[ 53 Attempted inter-cell handovers
(1800/1900->900/850) + 65 Attempted
(1800/1900->900/850) + 90 Attempted
(1800/1900->900/850)]
The corresponding
indicators at the cell
level are not available.
Obtain them from the
BSC overall
performance
measurement.
The handover success rate at the BSC level serves as reference for the BSC overall handover. In general,
the analysis on intra BSC handover success rate, outgoing BSC handover success rate, and incoming
BSC handover success rate are enough.
The result of handover success rate summed up at the BSC level in the performance analysis is
inaccurate, because the intra BSC handover success rate sums up the handovers from cells, in addition to
the handovers to cells and intra-cell handover. The handover success rate at the BSC level in the KPI
analysis sums up the intra-cell handovers and the handovers to the cell.
In case of exceptional handover success rate, check whether the detailed indicators are registered
completely.
11-30

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
12 Acronyms and Abbreviations
12
Acronyms and Abbreviations
Table 12-1 describes the full name of each abbreviation.

Table 12-1 Abbreviations
Abbreviation
Full Name
BAM
Back Administration Module
BCC
BTS Color Code
BCCH
Broadcast Control Channel
BSC
Base Station Controller
BSIC
Base Station Identity Code
BSS
Base Station Subsystem
CHR
Call History Record
CI
Cell Identity
CPU
Center Processing Unit
CSV
Comma Separation Value
FTP
File Transfer Protocol
GByte
Gigabyte
GHz
Gigahertz
GSM
Global System for Mobile communications
GUI
Graphical User Interface
HA
High Availability
ID
Identity
IMSI
International Mobile Station Identity
IP
Internet Protocol
KPI
Key Performance Index
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

12-1
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
12 Acronyms and Abbreviations
12-2
Abbreviation
Full Name
LAC
Location Area Code
LMT
Local Maintenance Terminate
MS
Mobile Station
MSC
Mobile Service Switching Center
MSDE
Microsoft SQL Server Desktop Engine
MB
Megabyte
NCC
Network Color Code
OMC
Operation and Maintenance Center
PC
Personal Computer
PCU
Packet Control Unit
PLS
Performance Local Server
PNS
Performance Nastar Server
QoS
Quality of Service
RNP
Radio Network Planning
SDCCH
Stand-alone Dedicated Control Channel
TA
Timing Advance
TCH
Traffic Channel
TCP
Transport Control Protocol
TMSI
Temporary Mobile Station Identity
TRX
Transceiver
VIC
Very Important Cells

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Contents
Contents
A Introduction to the Data Collection Tool ........................................................................... A-1
A.1 System Description .....................................................................................................................................A-2
A.2 Procedures ...................................................................................................................................................A-3
B GUI of the Data Collection Tool ...........................................................................................B-1

B.1 Main Interface ............................................................................................................................................. B-2
B.2 Menu Bar..................................................................................................................................................... B-3
B.2.1 File ..................................................................................................................................................... B-3
B.2.2 Task .................................................................................................................................................... B-4
B.2.3 Help .................................................................................................................................................... B-4
B.3 Toolbar......................................................................................................................................................... B-4
C Task Management....................................................................................................................C-1
C.1 Creating a Data Collection Task .................................................................................................................. C-2
C.2 Viewing a Data Collection Task ................................................................................................................ C-13
C.2.1 Viewing a Task List .......................................................................................................................... C-13
C.2.2 View the Task Information ............................................................................................................... C-14
C.3 Managing Data Collection Tasks............................................................................................................... C-21
C.3.1 Managing a Single Data Collection Task ......................................................................................... C-21
C.3.2 Managing Tasks for the Entire BSC/RNC........................................................................................ C-24
D GSM Index Definition........................................................................................................... D-1

E Engineering Parameters........................................................................................................... E-1
F Shortcut Keys............................................................................................................................. F-1
G Acronyms and Abbreviations............................................................................................... G-1
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Figures
Figures
Figure A-1 Procedures.......................................................................................................................................A-4
Figure B-1 Blank window ................................................................................................................................. B-2
Figure B-2 Interface of the operating tasks ....................................................................................................... B-3
Figure B-3 File menu ........................................................................................................................................ B-3
Figure B-4 Task menu ....................................................................................................................................... B-4
Figure B-5 Help menu....................................................................................................................................... B-4
Figure B-6 Toolbar ............................................................................................................................................ B-4
Figure C-1 BSC/RNC Selection dialog box...................................................................................................... C-2
Figure C-2 New BSC/RNC dialog box ............................................................................................................. C-3
Figure C-3 Information dialog box ................................................................................................................... C-3
Figure C-4 Data Type tab page in the New Task dialog box ............................................................................. C-4
Figure C-5 BSC Server tab page in the New Task dialog box .......................................................................... C-5
Figure C-6 DataSource Path tab page ............................................................................................................... C-6
Figure C-7 Performance tab page...................................................................................................................... C-7
Figure C-8 Configuration tab page.................................................................................................................... C-8
Figure C-9 Collection Data Time tab page........................................................................................................ C-9
Figure C-10 Collection Task Time tab page.................................................................................................... C-10
Figure C-11 Advance tab page ........................................................................................................................ C-11
Figure C-12 Data Save Path tab page.............................................................................................................. C-12
Figure C-13 Data Reserve Days tab page ....................................................................................................... C-13
Figure C-14 Task list ....................................................................................................................................... C-14
Figure C-15 Interface of checking task information ....................................................................................... C-15
Figure C-16 Interface of checking system logs............................................................................................... C-15
Figure C-17 Interface of task information....................................................................................................... C-16
Figure C-18 Interface of task configuration information ................................................................................ C-17
Figure C-19 Collection Task tab page ............................................................................................................. C-17
ii

Issue 02 (2008-02-22)
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Figures
Figure C-20 Selecting a record........................................................................................................................ C-18

Figure C-21 Task Period Info window ............................................................................................................ C-18
Figure C-22 Upload Task interface ................................................................................................................. C-19
Figure C-23 Selecting a task on the Upload Task interface............................................................................. C-19
Figure C-24 Upload Record Info window....................................................................................................... C-19
Figure C-25 Operation log information interface............................................................................................ C-20
Figure C-26 Deleting or exporting a log ......................................................................................................... C-20
Figure C-27 Title bar in the task information pane ......................................................................................... C-20
Figure C-28 Title bar in the task log pane ....................................................................................................... C-21
Figure C-29 Shortcut menu of a task............................................................................................................... C-22
Figure C-30 Modifying task configuration window........................................................................................ C-23
Figure C-31 Shortcut menu of a BSC node..................................................................................................... C-24
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

iii
A Introduction to the Data Collection Tool
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Tables
Table A-1 Data source types for specified versions...........................................................................................A-2
Table A-2 Description of data source ................................................................................................................A-2
Table B-1 Description of buttons....................................................................................................................... B-5
Table D-1 Description of the definition of access index....................................................................................D-1
Table E-1 Engineering parameters .................................................................................................................... E-1
Table F-1 Shortcut keys......................................................................................................................................F-1
iv

Issue 02 (2008-02-22)
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Introduction to the Data Collection Tool
About This Chapter

Section
Describes
A.1 System Description
The main functions of the GENEX Nastar data collection

tool.
A.2 Procedures
The procedures that the GENEX Nastar data collection

tool follows.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

A-1
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
A.1 System Description

The GENEX Nastar data collection tool collects network data. The sources of network data
can be:
z
Network optimization data from the back administration module (BAM) or the M2000
product
CHR pre-processed results provided by the performance local server (PLS)
The GENEX Nastar data collection tool collects and compresses the data, and then uploads
the processed data to the performance Nastar server through FTP for analysis.
In multi-level networks, the data collection tool can process the data that is analyzed by the
PNS.
The data that can be processed by the current software version of the GENEX data collection
tool is CDMA data, WCDMA data, and GSM data. In this document, the CDMA data is taken
as an example.
The CDMA versions, which are consistent with NE versions, consist of the following
versions:
z
BSC6000V900R001
BSC6000V900R003
G3PCUV300R008C01
G3PCUV300R008C02
Table A-1 describes types of data sources contained in each version.

Table A-1 Data source types for specified versions
Version
Types of Data Source
BSC6000V900R001
The data comes from the following sources:
BSC6000V900R003
Configuration
Performance
G3PCUV300R008C01
The data comes from the following sources:
G3PCUV300R008C02
PCU Config
PCU KPI
Table A-2 describes each data source.

Table A-2 Description of data source
A-2
Data Source
Description
Configuration
Configuration data of network parameters
Performance
Performance data used for performance statistics analysis
PCU Config
GPRS configuration data

Issue 02 (2008-02-22)
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Data Source
Description
PCU KPI
GPRS performance data
The current version of the GENEX Nastar data collection tool has the following functions:
z
Filtering the data

Filters the data obtained within the period preset.
Collecting the data

Copies or downloads the data from the BAM server or PLS server by sharing directory
or through FTP.
Compressing the data

Compresses the data collected.
Uploading the data

Uploads the collected data to the GENEX Nastar PNS through FTP.
A.2 Procedures
To install the Nastar data collection tool, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Set system parameters.

Step 2 Set parameters for GSM base station controller or for radio network controller.
Step 3 Create a data collection task.
----End
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

A-3
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Figure A-1 shows the flow of using the Nastar data collection tool.
Figure A-1 Procedures
Start the Nastar
data
collection tool
Set system
parameters
Set the BSC/

RNC
parameters
Create a data
collection task
Run the
task
A-4

Issue 02 (2008-02-22)
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
B GUI of the Data Collection Tool
GUI of the Data Collection Tool
About This Chapter

Section
Describes
B.1 Main Interface
The main interface of the data collection tool.
B.2 Menu Bar
The functions of the icons on the menu bar.
B.3 Toolbar
The functions of the icons on the toolbar.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

B-1
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
B.1 Main Interface

You can view the main interface after you start the main program and the GENEX Nastar data
collection tool. The main interface consists of menu, toolbar, and display area.
Figure B-1 and Figure B-2 show the task information and system log window.
Figure B-1 Blank window
B-2

Issue 02 (2008-02-22)
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Figure B-2 Interface of the operating tasks
B.2 Menu Bar

The menu bar consists of the following items:
z
File
Task
Help
B.2.1 File
The File menu enables you to set system parameters, BSC parameters, or RNC parameters.
You can also choose to exit the system from the File menu, as shown in Figure B-3.
Figure B-3 File menu
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

B-3
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
B.2.2 Task
The Task menu enables you to create tasks, including GSM, CDMA, and WCDMA tasks.
Figure B-4 shows the Task menu.
Figure B-4 Task menu
B.2.3 Help
The Help menu contains the help documents and displays the version information about the
data collection tool.
Figure B-5 Help menu
B.3 Toolbar
The toolbar enables you to perform either of the following tasks:
z
Creating a GSM task
Creating a CDMA task
Creating a WCDMA task
Viewing the task information
Viewing task logs
Figure B-6 Toolbar
B-4

Issue 02 (2008-02-22)
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Table B-1 describes the function of each button.

Table B-1 Description of buttons
Button
Used to
Create a GSM task.
Create a CDMA task.
Create a WCDMA task.

View the task information.
View log files of a task.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

B-5
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
C Task Management
Task Management
About This Chapter

Section
Describes
C.1 Creating a Data Collection Task
How to create a data collection task.
C.2 Viewing a Data Collection Task
How to view a data collection task.
C.3 Managing Data Collection Tasks
How to manage a data collection task.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

C-1
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
C Task Management
C.1 Creating a Data Collection Task

To create a data collection task, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Task > New GSM Task. Alternatively, click
on the toolbar.
The BSC/RNC Selection dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure C-1.

Figure C-1 BSC/RNC Selection dialog box
Step 2 Select a BSC or RNC in the BSC/RNC Name drop-down list. If the BSC/RNC does not exist,
click New.
The New BSC/RNC dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure C-2.
C-2

Issue 02 (2008-02-22)
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
C Task Management
Figure C-2 New BSC/RNC dialog box
Step 3 Enter the BSC/RNC name. Select an NE version. Enter the IP address of the server.
You can also set the busy time in the dialog box.
Step 4 Click OK.

The Information dialog box is displayed, prompting you to save the settings.
Figure C-3 shows the Information dialog box
Figure C-3 Information dialog box
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

C-3
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
C Task Management
Step 5 Click OK.

The New Task dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure C-4.
Figure C-4 Data Type tab page in the New Task dialog box
Step 6 Select one or more data types, and then select the collection mode from corresponding
drop-down list.
C-4

Issue 02 (2008-02-22)
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
C Task Management
Step 7 Click Next. The BSC Server tab page in the New Task dialog box is displayed, as shown in
Figure C-5.
Figure C-5 BSC Server tab page in the New Task dialog box
Step 8 Set the parameters of the BSC/RNC server.

The BSC/RNC server name has been automatically obtained from the BSC or RNC settings.
If you select From FTP Server from the drop-down list in Step 5, you can modify parameters
in the Download FTP Server Setting area in the dialog box.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

C-5
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
C Task Management
Step 9 Click Next.

The DataSource Path tab page is displayed, as shown in Figure C-6.
Figure C-6 DataSource Path tab page
C-6

Issue 02 (2008-02-22)
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
C Task Management
Step 10 Select a path of the data source. The system sets the data source paths of each data type by
default. If the default path does not correspond to the actual path, you need to set the path
again. Then, click Next.
The Performance tab page is displayed, as shown in Figure C-7.
Figure C-7 Performance tab page
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

C-7
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
C Task Management
Figure C-8 Configuration tab page
Step 11 Select an object type.

For example, if configuration data is not selected in Step 6, you can skip this step.
C-8

Issue 02 (2008-02-22)
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
C Task Management
Step 12 Choose an object type.

If the selected data type contains the Performance type, you need to select an object type.
Otherwise, skip this step.
Click Next.
The Collection Data Time tab page is displayed, as shown in Figure C-9.
Figure C-9 Collection Data Time tab page
Step 13 Set the time range of data collection.

The time types of filtering can be classified into All-day and Busy Time. If you select a data
type that does not need to filter the time, for example, the configuration data, you can skip this
step.
The time in End Time must be beyond the time set in Begin Time. Otherwise, the system displays an
error message.
Click Next.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

C-9
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
C Task Management
The Collection Task Time tab page is displayed, as shown in Figure C-10.
Figure C-10 Collection Task Time tab page
Step 14 Set the time and period of the collection task.

The task operation modes are classified into Instant Task and Scheduled Task.
z
Instant tasks are performed after tasks are created. The tasks also automatically stop after
the operation is complete.
Scheduled tasks are performed at the preset start time. The tasks are performed according
to the preset time period before they stop.
Click Next.
C-10

Issue 02 (2008-02-22)
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
C Task Management
The Advance tab page is displayed, as shown in Figure C-11.

Figure C-11 Advance tab page
Step 15 Select Zip to compress data. Select Upload To FTP Server to upload data to the FTP server.
In the Nastar GSM, the data collection server and PNS are integrated in one physical server,
you can skip this step.
Step 16 Click Next.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

C-11
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
C Task Management
The Data Save Path tab page is displayed, as shown in Figure C-12.
Figure C-12 Data Save Path tab page
C-12

Issue 02 (2008-02-22)
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
C Task Management
Step 17 Set a path to save the data. Then, click Finish.

If the collection task is set as Scheduled Tasks, you can set the longest period to save the data.
The unit is day. With reference to the system time, the data collection tool saves only the data
during the time period. Saving the data for seven days is recommended. Figure C-13 shows
the Data Reserve Days tab page.
Figure C-13 Data Reserve Days tab page

----End
C.2 Viewing a Data Collection Task

C.2.1 Viewing a Task List
After you create a task, the task list is displayed on the left pane of the task information
window. Three task lists, namely, GSM, CDMA, and WCDMA, are displayed.
Each task folder in the list is categorized according to the BSC/RNC settings, and each
BSC/RNC task is categorized into scheduled task and instant task. Each task is named in the
way of version number_data type.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

C-13
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
C Task Management
Figure C-14 shows the Task list.

Figure C-14 Task list
C.2.2 View the Task Information

The task information contains the following information:
z
Configuration information
Collection status
Upload status
Log information
Double-click a task in the task list to view the information about the task and related log files.
For a period task, click the related icons to view the task information or log files.
C-14

Issue 02 (2008-02-22)
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
C Task Management
Figure C-15 and Figure C-16 show the task information and system log window.
Figure C-15 Interface of checking task information
Figure C-16 Interface of checking system logs
Interface of Task Information

The task information window is divided into three panes. The left pane is a task list. The right
pane displays the configuration information, whereas the lower pane displays the log
information.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

C-15
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
C Task Management
Figure C-17 shows the Task Information interface.

Figure C-17 Interface of task information
C-16

Issue 02 (2008-02-22)
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
C Task Management
Viewing the Configuration of a Task

As shown in Figure C-18, the right pane displays the configuration information. You can
modify the configuration information on this interface.
Figure C-18 Interface of task configuration information
Collecting Tasks
The lower part of the right task list displays the collection and upload status of tasks.
The task collection status information consists of the following information:
z
Running period
Collection status
Remarks
Figure C-19 shows the Collection Task tab page.

Figure C-19 Collection Task tab page
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

C-17
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
C Task Management
Double-click the record to view the detailed collection information, as shown in Figure C-20
and Figure C-21.
Figure C-20 Selecting a record
Figure C-21 Task Period Info window
Uploading the Information

The information about task upload consists of the following items:
C-18
Task begin time
Upload file
Upload status
Remark

Issue 02 (2008-02-22)
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
C Task Management
Figure C-22 shows the Upload Task tab page.

Figure C-22 Upload Task interface
Double-click a task on the Upload Task interface. The Upload Record Info window is
displayed, as shown in Figure C-24.
Figure C-23 Selecting a task on the Upload Task interface
Figure C-24 Upload Record Info window
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

C-19
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
C Task Management
Viewing Log Information

The lower pane displays the information about operation logs, as shown in Figure C-25.
Figure C-25 Operation log information interface
Right-click a log record and choose Clear or Export from the shortcut menu to delete or
export the log, as shown in Figure C-26.
Figure C-26 Deleting or exporting a log
Closing the Task Information Window

Double-click the title bar in the task information pane or in the task log pane to close the task
information window, as shown in Figure C-27 and Figure C-28.
Figure C-27 Title bar in the task information pane
C-20

Issue 02 (2008-02-22)
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
C Task Management
Figure C-28 Title bar in the task log pane
C.3 Managing Data Collection Tasks

C.3.1 Managing a Single Data Collection Task
The management of a single data collection task has the following functions:
z
Modifying the task configuration
Starting the collection
Stopping the collection
Starting the upload
Stopping the upload
Clearing an upload record
Viewing a task path
Deleting a task
For details about how to modify the configuration of a task, refer to the section describing
how to modify the task configuration.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

C-21
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
C Task Management
For other functions, you can right-click a task on the task list and choose an option
corresponding to the desired function from the shortcut menu, as shown in Figure C-29.
Figure C-29 Shortcut menu of a task
Modifying the Task Configuration

You can double-click a task list. The Task Information interface is displayed. Modify the
configuration information on the task configuration information interface. You can modify the
following configuration information about a task:
C-22
Data source path
User name and password required to log in to the BSC/RNC system
Data collection time
Data collection type
Task collection time (available only for scheduled tasks)
Whether to compress and upload the data to the FTP server

Issue 02 (2008-02-22)
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
C Task Management
Figure C-30 shows the window of modifying the task configuration.

Figure C-30 Modifying task configuration window
Starting the Collection

You can choose Start Collection to start a stopped collection task. If you start an instant task
that is uploading data, you need to stop the upload. After the instant task is started, the
previously collected data is deleted.
Stopping the Collection

You can choose Stop Collection to stop a collection task.
Starting the Upload

You need to set FTP-related parameters when you set up a task or configure system
parameters. If the FTP parameters are not set, you cannot upload the task.
Stopping the Upload

You can choose Stop Upload to stop uploading data.
Clearing an Upload Record

The system saves upload records. If you plan to upload the file again or upload the file to
another FTP server, you need to clear upload records before you restart the upload.
Viewing a Task Path

You can choose Browse Task Folder to open the local save path of the collected data.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

C-23
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
C Task Management
Deleting a Task
If you choose Remove Task, an information dialog box is displayed, prompting you whether
to delete the collected data. If you choose to delete the task, the system deletes the data and
tasks. If you choose to not to delete the data, the system deletes tasks whereas saves data.
C.3.2 Managing Tasks for the Entire BSC/RNC

The management of tasks for entire BSC/RNC has the following functions:
z
Creating a task
Deleting a task
Deleting the BSC/RNC
Right-click a BSC/RNC node. The shortcut menu is displayed, as shown in Figure C-31.
Figure C-31 Shortcut menu of a BSC node
C-24

Issue 02 (2008-02-22)
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
C Task Management
Creating a Task
When you choose New Task from the shortcut menu, the system automatically creates a task
under the selected BSC/RNC.
Deleting the BSC/RNC

To delete the BSC/RNC, right-click the BSC/RNC to be deleted and choose Remove to delete
the BSC/RNC. Ensure that the tasks under the BSC/RNC to be deleted are removed before
you delete the BSC/RNC.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

C-25
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
D GSM Index Definition
GSM Index Definition
Table D-1 describes the definition of access index.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

D-1
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Table D-1 Description of the definition of access index

GSM Access Index Definition
Ite
m
Index
Name
Index
Definitio
n
Weigh
t
Class A BSC
Class B BSC
Class C BSC
Excellent
Threshold
Eligible
Threshold
Minimum
Threshold
Excellent
Threshold
Eligible
Threshold
Minimum
Threshold
Excellent
Threshold
Eligible
Threshold
Minimum
Threshold
Immedi
ate
Assign
ment
Success
ful Rate
From BSC
received
CHREQ to
received
ETS IND
information
, which
reported by
MS on
special
signaling
channel, it
includes the
failure
resulted by
BSC, cell
or LAPD
over
loading,
does not
include the
receive
failure
resulted by
wireless
connect
random and
the connect
failure
resulted by
RACH over
loading.
[2186
immediate
assignment
successful
rate / 2185
immediate
assignment
request
rate] *
100%
10
98%
96%
94%
96%
94%
92%
92%
88%
85%
TCH
Assign
ment
Success
ful Rate
The success
rate of BSC
assignment
TCH, in
very early
assignment,
assignment
and
handover
flow [2106
successful
TCH
seizures for
call / 2090
attempted
TCH for
call]
*100%
10
98%
96%
94%
96%
94%
92%
94%
92%
88%
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

D-1
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual

Ite
m
Index
Name
Index
Definitio
n
Weigh
t
Class A BSC
Class B BSC
Class C BSC
Excellent
Threshold
Eligible
Threshold
Minimum
Threshold
Excellent
Threshold
Eligible
Threshold
Minimum
Threshold
Excellent
Threshold
Eligible
Threshold
Minimum
Threshold
SDCC
H
Conges
tion
Rate
The
proportion
of SDCCH
channel
overflow
times and
SDCCH
channel
overall
times
[ 2062SDC
CH
overflow
times /
2048SDCC
H request
times
(overall) ]
10
0.30%
0.80%
1.20%
0.60%
1.00%
1.50%
0.80%
1.50%
3%
TCH
Conges
tion
Rate
(TCH
Overflo
w) (%)
The
proportion
of TCH
channel
overflow
times and
TCH
channel
overall
times
[ 2124 TCH
overflow
times /
2089 TCH
request
times
(overall) ]
10
0.80%
1.20%
2%
1.00%
2%
3%
1%
2%
5%
SDCC
H Call
Drop
Rate
The
proportion
of SDCCH
call drop
times and
SDCCH
seizure
success
times [2070
SDCCH
call drop
times /
2049
SDCCH
seizure
success
times] *
100%
10
0.70%
1.00%
2%
0.90%
2%
2%
1%
2%
3%
TCH
Call
Drop
Rate
(Exclud
ing
Handov
er) (%)
The
proportion
of TCH call
drop times
and TCH
seizure
success
times [2142
TCH call
drop times /
2105 TCH
seizure
success
times] *
100%
20
0.80%
1.00%
2%
1.00%
2%
2%
1%
2%
5%
D-2

Issue 02 (2008-02-22)
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual

Ite
m
Index
Name
Index
Definitio
n
Weigh
t
Class A BSC
Class B BSC
Class C BSC
Excellent
Threshold
Eligible
Threshold
Minimum
Threshold
Excellent
Threshold
Eligible
Threshold
Minimum
Threshold
Excellent
Threshold
Eligible
Threshold
Minimum
Threshold
Handov
er
Success
Rate
The
intra-cell
and inter
cell
handover
success rate
in BSC,
including
the
handover
by all
reason
resulted [54
inter
handover
success rate
in BSC +
48
intra-cell
handover
success
rate] / [50
inter cell
handover
try rate in
BSC +47
intra-cell
handover
try rate]
20
95%
90%
85%
92%
87%
83%
90%
85%
80%
Worst
Cell
Proport
ion
The cell
rate, when
the traffic
volume per
channel is
greater than
0.1 ERL,
the call
drop rate is
greater than
3% or the
congestion
rate is
greater than
5%. The
denominato
r is the total
cell
number,
which per
channel
greater than
0.1 erl.
10
1%
2%
2%
2%
2%
5%
2%
5%
10%
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

D-3
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
E Engineering Parameters
Engineering Parameters
Table E-1 describes the engineering parameters.

Table E-1 Engineering parameters
Name
Implication
MSCNAME
Name of the MSC
BSCNAME
Name of the BSC
SITENAME
Name of the BTS
LONGITUDE
Longitude of the BTS position, in the form of Degree, Minute,

Second, or decimal (mandatory).
LATITUDE
Latitude of the BTS position, in the form of Degree, Minute, Second,

or decimal (mandatory).
ALTITUDE
Altitude of the BTS position measured in meters.
SITETYPE
BTS types, including macro 1800 directional, macro 1800 omni,

macro 900 directional, macro 900 omni, micro 1800, or micro
900.Macro means macro BTSs. Micro means micro cells. 1800 and
900 mean sites of 1800M and 900M respectively. Directional means
directional BTS whereas omni means omni BTS.
EQUTYPE
Equipment type
PROJECTPHASE
Phases of a project
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

E-1
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Name
Implication
ONAIR
Whether the system is switched on.

The following options are available:
E-2
TRUE
FALSE
Enable
Disable
ENABLE
Disable
YES
No
ONAIRDATE
The date on which the system is switched on. The date is in the format
of yyyy-mm-dd, such as 2006-2-7.
SURVEYDATE
The date on which the survey is started. The date is in the format of
yyyy-mm-dd, such as 2006-2-7.
CELLNAME
Name of a cell
LAC
LAC number, at most five digits.
CI
CI number, at most five digits.
BCCH
BCCH value
BSIC
BSIC value, two digits with each digit between 0 and 7.
HSN
Fill in the corresponding number.
MA
MA
FHMODE
Frequency hopping mode. You can select non-hopping, baseband

hopping, or synthesized hopping.
GPRS
Whether it is GPRS cell. Fill in TRUE or FALSE.
EDGE
Whether it is EDGE cell. Fill in TRUE or FALSE.
TRXPOWER
Power of a TRX
TRXS
Number of TRXs
POLARIZATION
Polarization mode
FEEDERLOSS
Feeder loss
ANT_HEIGHT
Antenna height (number)

Issue 02 (2008-02-22)
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
Name
Implication
AZIMUTH
Orientation, unit: degree (mandatory)
MECHTILT
Mechanical downtilt, unit: degree
ELECTILT
Electric downtilt, unit: degree
ANTENNANUM
Number of antennas
ANT_NAME
Name of the antenna
ANTGAIN
Antenna gain
ANTENNATYPE
Antenna type
HORIZONTAL_B
EAMWIDTH
Horizontal beamwidth
VERTICAL_
BEAMWIDTH
Vertical beamwidth
CDUTYPE
CDU type
TMATYPE
Type of the tower mounted amplifier
TMAGAIN
Gain of the tower mounted amplifier
EIRP
EIRP
REGION
Region attribute of the cell. This parameter is used in the performance

data.
VENDOR
Name of the equipment supplier
CITY
City to which the cell belongs. This parameter is used in the

performance data.
USERDEF1
User-defined attribute 1
USERDEF2
USERDEF3
USERDEF4
USERDEF5
USERDEF6
USERDEF7
USERDEF8
USERDEF9
USERDEF10
PLANPROP
Planning attribute, used in automatic neighbor planning. Fill in

downtown area, suburb, or countryside.
TCH
TCH value. Multiple values should be separated by semicolon.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

E-3
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
F Shortcut Keys
Shortcut Keys
During the co-channel and adjacent channel check, you can use shortcut keys to check
different frequency.
Table F-1 describes the function of the shortcut keys.
Table F-1 Shortcut keys
Shortcut Keys
Used to
Ctrl+O
Open an existing project.
Ctrl+I
Import engineering parameter files.
Ctrl+Shift+I
Export engineering parameter files.
Ctrl+P
Import configuration parameters (Huawei as default).
Ctrl+Shift+P
Export configuration parameters (Huawei as default).
Ctrl+1
Display the Daily Report window.
Ctrl+2
Display the Monthly Report window.
Ctrl+3
Display the Weekly Report window.
Ctrl+4
Display the Semi-monthly Report window.
Ctrl+5
Display the Health Check Report window.
Ctrl+6
Display the Network Monitoring Report window.
Ctrl+7
Display the Quality Evaluation Report window.
Ctrl+8
Display the Capacity Expansion Report window.
F10
Switch the Workspace window.
F9
Switch the Property window.
F8
Switch the Site Navigator window.
F7
Switch the Legend window.
Ctrl+D
Switch between layer 1800 and 900.
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

F-1
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
F Shortcut Keys
F-2
Shortcut Keys
Used to
Ctrl+Q
Switch between simulation neighbor and configuration neighbor.
Ctrl+F
Search for a cell.
Ctrl+B
Display the romanced engineering parameter setting window.
Ctrl+G
Switch to distance measuring window.
Ctrl+K
Switch the grid effect.
Ctrl+E
Display neighbors.
Shift+left-click
On condition that neighbors are displayed, press Shift, and click a cell to
add unidirectional neighbor.
Ctrl+left-click
On condition that neighbors are displayed, press Ctrl, and click a cell to
add bidirectional neighbor (not selected as precondition).
Ctrl+left-click
On condition that neighbors are displayed, press Ctrl, and click a cell to
deleted neighbor (Selected as precondition).
Ctrl+V
Check co-channel by cell.
Ctrl+C
Check co-channel by ARFCN.
Ctrl+X
Search cell by co-channel and co BSIC.
Ctrl+R
Search for idle frequencies.
Ctrl+T
Check the spectrum efficiency.

Issue 02 (2008-02-22)
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
G Acronyms and Abbreviations
Acronyms and Abbreviations
Abbreviation
Full Name
BAM
Back Administration Module
BCC
BTS Color Code
BCCH
Broadcast Control Channel
BSC
Base Station Controller
BSIC
Base Station Identity Code
BSS
Base Station Subsystem
CHR
Call History Record
CI
Cell Identity
CPU
Center Processing Unit
CSV
Comma Separation Value
FTP
File Transfer Protocol
GByte
Gigabyte
GHz
Gigahertz
GSM
Global System for Mobile communications
GUI
Graphical User Interface
HA
High Availability
ID
Identity
IMSI
International Mobile Station Identity
IP
Internet Protocol
KPI
Key Performance Index
LAC
Location Area Code
LMT
Local Maintenance Terminate
Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

G-1
GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual
G Acronyms and Abbreviations
G-2
Abbreviation
Full Name
MS
Mobile Station
MSC
Mobile Service Switching Center
MSDE
Microsoft SQL Server Desktop Engine
MB
Megabyte
NCC
Network Color Code
OMC
Operation and Maintenance Center
PC
Personal Computer
PCU
Packet Control Unit
PLS
Performance Local Server
PNS
Performance Nastar Server
QoS
Quality of Service
RNP
Radio Network Planning
SDCCH
Stand-alone Dedicated Control Channel
TA
Timing Advance
TCH
Traffic Channel
TCP
Transport Control Protocol
TMSI
Temporary Mobile Station Identity
TRX
Transceiver
VIC
Very Important Cells

Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

Nastar GSM User Manual

Diunggah oleh

Informasi Dokumen

Hak Cipta

Format Tersedia

Bagikan dokumen Ini

Bagikan atau Tanam Dokumen

Opsi Berbagi

Apakah menurut Anda dokumen ini bermanfaat?

Apakah konten ini tidak pantas?

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

Nastar GSM User Manual

Diunggah oleh

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

GENEX Nastar GSM

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Huawei Industrial Base

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2008. All rights reserved.

Trademarks and Permissions

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

GENEX Nastar GSM

2 Installation of the Nastar GSM ...............................................................................................2-1

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

GENEX Nastar GSM

2.6.2 Updating the License..............................................................................................................................2-50

4 Using the Transdata...................................................................................................................4-1

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

GENEX Nastar GSM

5 Common Operations .................................................................................................................5-1

6 Optimizing the Network ..........................................................................................................6-1

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

GENEX Nastar GSM

6.2.1 Background ..............................................................................................................................................6-2

7 Network Performance Alarms .................................................................................................7-1

8 Generating a Network Monitoring Report ...........................................................................8-1

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

GENEX Nastar GSM

8.4.2 Generating the PCU Performance Monitoring Report ...........................................................................8-50

9 Further Locating Network Problems......................................................................................9-1

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

GENEX Nastar GSM

9.5.7 Checking Frequency Optimization .........................................................................................................9-53

10 Predicting Network Trend ...................................................................................................10-1

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

GENEX Nastar GSM

11.2.1 Problems Caused by Expired License .................................................................................................. 11-3

12 Acronyms and Abbreviations..............................................................................................12-1

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

GENEX Nastar GSM

A.2 Procedures .................................................................................................................................................A-3

B GUI of the Data Collection Tool ...........................................................................................B-1

D GSM Index Definition........................................................................................................... D-1

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

GENEX Nastar GSM

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

GENEX Nastar GSM

Figure 2-24 Standard Edition progress dialog box .........................................................................................2-28

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

GENEX Nastar GSM

Figure 3-8 Submenus of the View menu...........................................................................................................3-7

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

GENEX Nastar GSM

Figure 4-8 Add BSC\PCU dialog box ..............................................................................................................4-9

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

GENEX Nastar GSM

Figure 4-41 Import Task setting dialog box....................................................................................................4-32

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

GENEX Nastar GSM

Figure 5-23 Configuration parameter exported in an .xls file.........................................................................5-24

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

GENEX Nastar GSM

Figure 5-56 Site Edit dialog box.....................................................................................................................5-55

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

GENEX Nastar GSM

Figure 5-89 Filtering query results .................................................................................................................5-88

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

GENEX Nastar GSM